巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Bāhirima: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bāhira, compar.-adversative formation] outer, external, outside Vin.III,149 (b. māna external measure; opp. abbhantarima); J.V,38 (opp. abbhantarima). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhita: {'def': '(bāheti 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(bāheti 的【过分】)。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bāhitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. bāhita] keeping out, exclusion Nd2 464 (in expln of word brāhmaṇa). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhiteyya: {'def': '[unclear; grd. of bāheti1, but formed fr. pp.?] to be kept out (?) M.I,328. The reading seems to be corrupt; meaning is very doubtful; Neumann trsls “musst (mir) weichen.” (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhitikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. bāhita, pp. of bāheti1] a mantle, wrapper (lit. “that which keeps out,” i. e. the cold or wind) M.II,116, 117. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bahi, cp. bāhira and Vedic bāhya] foreign J.I,421; III,432. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhu: {'def': '【阳】手臂。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】手臂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic bāhu, prob. to bahati2; cp. Gr. ph_xus in same meaning, Ohg. buoc. It seems that bāhu is more frequent in later literature, whereas the by-form bāhā belongs to the older period] the arm J.III,271 (bāhumā bāhuṁ pīḷentā shoulder to shoulder); Vism.192. --°ṁ pasāreti to stretch out the arm (cp. bāhaṁ) PvA.112; pacchā-bāhuṁ (cp. bāhaṁ) PvA.4 (gāḷha-bandhanaṁ bandhāpetvā). --(p)pacālakaṁ (adv.) after the manner of one who swings his arms about Vin.II,213 (see expln at Vin.IV,188). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhujañña: {'def': '【形】民衆的，衆人的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bahu+jana, cp. sāmañña fr. samaṇa] belonging to the mass of people, property of many people or of the masses D.II,106, 219; S.II,107= V,262; J.I,29 (V.212). Note. The expression occurs only in stock phrase iddha phīta vitthārika bāhujañña. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】属于民众的，众人的。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bāhulika: {'def': '【形】生活得丰富充裕的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】生活得丰富充裕的。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bāhulla: {'def': 'bāhulya,【中】丰富，豪华的生活。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'bāhulya, 【中】丰富，豪华的生活。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bahula] 1. abundance, superfluity, great quantity M.I,171; A.IV,87 (°kathā) A.IV,87; Ps.I,197; J.I,81. -- 2. luxurious living, swaggering, puffed up frame of mind Vin.I,9, 59, 209; II,197; III,251. -- See also bāhulya & bāhullika. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhullika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bāhulla] living in abundance, swaggering, luxurious, spendthrift Vin.I,9 (+padhāna-vibbhanto, as also J.I,68, with which Kern, Toev. s. v. compares MVastu II.241 & III,329); II,197; III,250; M.I,14; III,6; A.I,71; III,108, 179 sq.; J.I,68; III,363. The reading is often bāhulika. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhulya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bahula, the Sk. form for P. bāhulla] abundance Sdhp.77. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāhusacca: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bahu+sacca, which latter corresponds to a Sk. śrautya fr. śru, thus b. is the abstract to bahussuta. See on expln of word Kern, Toev. s. v.] great learning, profound knowledge M.I,445; A.I,38 (so read for bahu°); II,218; Vin.III,10; Dh.271; Vv 639. (Page 487)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】多学，非常有学问。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】多学，多闻，非常有学问。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bāhā: {'def': '(f.) [a specific Pali doublet of bāhu, q. v. It is on the whole restricted to certain phrases, but occurs side by side of bāhu in others, like pacchā-bāhaṁ & °bāhuṁ, bāhaṁ & bāhuṁ pasāreti] 1. the arm A.II,67=III,45 (°bala); Vin.II,105; J.III,62; V,215 (°mudu). pacchā-bāhaṁ arm(s) behind (his back) D.I,245 (gāḷhabandhanaṁ baddha). bāhaṁ pasāreti to stretch out the arm D.I,222=M.I,252≈. bāhāyaṁ gahetvā taking (him or her) by the arm D.I,221 sq.; M.I,365 (nānā-bāhāsu g.); PvA.148. bāhā paggayha reaching or stretching out one’s arms (as sign of supplication) D.II,139; J.V,267; PvA.92 and passim. -- 2. not quite certain, whether “post” of a door or a “screen” (from bahati3), the former more likely. Only --° in ālambana° post to hold on to, a balustrade Vin.II,120, 152; dvāra° doorpost D.II,190; Pv.I,51. Cp. bāhitikā. --aṭṭhi (bāh°) arm-bone KhA 50. --paramparāya arm in arm Vin.III,126. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】手臂，柱，柄。 ~bala, 【中】臂力，即：手工劳动。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】手臂(台语：手胳头chiu2 kok thau5)，柱，柄。bāhābala,【中】臂力，即：手工劳动。在印度古老的文献—「吠陀赞歌」的「原人歌」中，最早谈到了人类的起源，歌中述说印度的四个种姓阶级里；婆罗门（ Brahmana，司祭者）生於原人的嘴、刹帝利（Ksatriya，王族）生於原人的双臂、吠舍（Vaisya，庶民）生於原人的双腿，而首陀罗（Sudra，奴隶）则是从原人的双足出生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bāhābalaparicita: {'def': '(bāhā臂+bala力+paricita获得【过分】) 【过分】以臂力获得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bākucī: {'def': '(f.) [cp. *Sk. bākucī] the plant Vernonia anthelminthica Abhp 586. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bākula: {'def': '（Bakkula）（比库名）拔古喇，（古音译：）薄拘罗，薄俱罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Bāla: {'def': '【形】年轻的，无知识的，愚蠢的。【阳】孩子，愚人(fool)。bālaka,【阳】孩子。bālata,【阴】愚蠢。cf. mūḷha(愚人)。Tīṇ’imāni, bhikkhave, bālassa bālalakkhanāni bālanimittāni bālapadānāni.(诸比丘！此三是愚人的愚痴之特徵、愚痴之特相、愚痴之特质。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [cp. Sk. bāla (rarely Vedic, more freq. in Ep. & Class. Sk.); its orig. meaning is “young, unable to speak,” cp. Lat. infans, hence “like a child, childish; infantile”] 1. ignorant (often with ref. to ignorance in a moral sense, of the common people, the puthujjana), foolish (as contrasted with paṇḍita cp. the Bālapaṇḍita-sutta M.III,163 sq.; D.II,305 sq.; Vism.499, and contrasts at Sn.578; Dh.63, 64; Pv IV.332; Dhs.1300), lacking in reason, devoid of the power to think & act right. In the latter sense sometimes coupled with andha (spiritually blind), as andhabāla stupid & ignorant, mentally dull, e. g. at DhA.I,143; II,89; PvA.254. -- A fanciful etym. of b. at KhA 124 is “balanti ananti ti bālā.” Other refs.: D.I,59, 108; S.I,23; A.I,59, 68, 84; II,51, 180; Sn.199, 259, 318, 578, 879; It.68; Dh.28, 60 sq., 71 sq., 206 sq., 330; J.I,124 (lola° greedy-foolish); V,366 (bālo āmaka-pakkaṁ va); Vv 835; Pv.I,82; IV,129; Pug.33; Nd1 163, 286 sq., 290; SnA 509 (=aviddasu); PvA.193. Compar. bālatara J.III,278, 279; VvA.326. -- 2. young, new; newly risen (of the sun): °ātāpa the morning sun DA.I,287; DhA.I,164; Mhbv 25; °vasanta “early spring” (=Citramāsa), N. of the first one of the 4 summer months (gimha-māsā) KhA 192; --suriya the newly risen sun J.V,284; PvA.137, 211. -- 3. a child; in wider application meaning a youth under 16 years of age (cp. Abhp 251) DA.I,134. Cp. bālaka. --nakkhatta N. of a certain “feast of fools,” i. e. carnival DhA.I,256. --saṅgatacārin one who keeps company with a fool Dh.207. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [for vāla] the hair of the head PvA.285 (°koṭimatta not even one tip of the hair; gloss BB vālagga°). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】年轻的，无知识的，愚蠢的。【阳】孩子，愚人。 ~ka, 【阳】孩子。 ~ta, 【阴】愚蠢。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bālaka: {'def': '[fr. bāla] 1. boy, child, youth S.I,176; ThA.146 (Ap. V,44: spelt °akka); Sdhp.351. -- f. bālikā young girl ThA.54 (Ap. V,1). -- 2. fool DhsA.51 (°rata fond of fools). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bālakin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bālaka] having fools, consisting of fools; f. °inī M.I,373 (parisā). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bālatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to bāla] foolishness J.I,101, 223. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bālisika: {'def': '[fr. balisa] a fisherman S.II,226; IV,158; J.I,482; III,52 (cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 194); Miln.364, 412; DhA.III,397. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】渔夫。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】渔夫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bālya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. bāla] 1. childhood, youth S.III,1. -- 2. ignorance, folly Dh.63; J.II,220 (=bāla-bhāva); III,278 (balya); PvA.40. Also used as adj. in compar. bālyatara more foolish, extremely foolish Vv 836 sq.=DhA.I,30 (=bālatara, atisayena bāla VvA.326). -- 3. weakness (?) J.VI,295 (balya, but C. bālya=dubbala-bhāva). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】童年，愚蠢。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】童年，愚蠢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bālā: {'def': 'Bālikā, 【阴】女孩。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Bālikā,【阴】女孩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bārasa: {'def': '【形】十二。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】十二。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bārāṇaseyyaka: {'def': 'a. [cf. BSk. Vārāṇaseya, Vārāṇaseyaka] ベナレス産の(布, 衣).', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. Bārāṇasī] of Benares, coming fr. B. (a kind of muslin) D.II,110; III,260. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bārāṇasī: {'def': '【阴】贝拿勒斯(印度东北部城市瓦腊纳西 (Varanasi))。Bārāṇaseyyaka,【形】贝拿勒斯制造的，来自贝拿勒斯的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'f. 波羅奈, ベナレス[カーシー国の首都].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阴】贝拿勒斯（印度东北部城市瓦腊纳西 (Varanasi)）。 ~ṇaseyyaka,【形】贝拿勒斯制造的，来自贝拿勒斯的。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '（城市名）巴拉纳西，（古音译：）波罗奈斯，婆罗痆斯', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Bāttiṁsati: {'def': '﹐【数】三十二。bāttiṁsati lakkhaṇa﹐三十二相。三十二相大人相(巴dvattiṁsamahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni；梵dvātriṃwan mahā-purusa-laksaṇāni) (D.30.)︰(1)足安平立相(suppatiṭṭhita-pādatā-lakkhaṇa；梵 su-pratisṭhita-pāda)，即足下平满相。平足蹈地，平(足)举起，脚掌完全放下触地。(2)脚掌轮相(pāda-tala-cakka-lakkhaṇa；梵 cakrāṅkita-hasta-pāda-tala)，即千辐轮相。两脚掌生二轮，有千辐(之肉纹相)、有辋、有毂，所有的纹路明显，分明整然。(3)足踵(圆满)广平相(āyatapaṇhi-lakkhaṇa；梵 āyata-pāda-pārsṇi)，足跟广平相。(4)(诸)指纤长相(dīghaṇguli-lakkhaṇa；梵 dīrghāṅguli)，手臂美嫩形端正，指头柔软又纤长。(5)身体直如梵天相(brahmujugatta-lakkhaṇa；梵 rjugātratā)，有如梵天身直挺，清秀明净长得帅。(6)七隆满处相(sattussadatā-lakkhaṇa；梵 saptotsada)即两手、两足、两肩、颈项等七处(肉)皆隆满。(7)手足柔软相(mudutalunahatthapāda-lakkhaṇāni；梵 mrdu-taruṇa-hasta-pāda-tala)。(8)手足有网缦相(jāla-hattha-pāda-lakkhaṇāni；梵 jālāvanaddha-hasta-pāda)手足指间，有缦网相。《大本经》(T1.5.2)︰「三者、手足网缦，犹如鹅王。」《中阿含59经》《三十二相经》(T1.493.2)：「8大人手足网缦，犹如鴈(=雁)王。」(9)足踝高相(ussaṅkhapāda-lakkhaṇa；梵 ucchaṅkha-pāda)两踝月庸相(ussaṅkhapāda)，即足趺隆起相，为足背高起圆满之相。(10)身毛端向上相(uddhagga-lomatā-lakkhaṇa；梵 ūrdhvaṃ-garoma)身毛向上生，乌青色(nīlāni añjanavaṇṇāni)、卷曲状(kuṇḍalāvaṭṭāni)、向右旋(dakkhiṇāvaṭṭakajātāni)。(11)小腿如羚羊相(eṇijaṅgha-lakkhaṇa；梵 aiṇeya-jaṅgha)。小腿像羚羊腿。小腿，古译作︰腨(足专ㄕㄨㄢˋ)。(12)肌肤软细相(sukhumacchavilakkhaṇa；梵 sūksma-suvarṇa-cchavi)，即皮肤细软相，尘垢不沾身。(13)黄金色相(suvaṇṇavaṇṇalakkhaṇa；梵 suvarṇa-varṇa)有似黄金的皮肤。(14)马阴藏相(鞘内藏阴相)(kosohita-vatthaguyha-lakkhaṇaṁ；梵 kowopagata-vasti-guhya)，指男阴密隐於体内如马阴之相。《中阿含59经》：「13大人阴马藏。犹良马王。」(15)身围如尼拘律树相(nigrodha parimaṇḍala-lakkhaṇa；梵 nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala)身围如尼拘律树(榕树科)，身形圆好。(16)立正不弯时，双手掌可触摸双膝(相)(ṭhitakova anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jaṇṇukāni parimasati parimajjati；梵 sthitānavanata-pralamba-bāhutā)，即不弯触膝相(anonama-jaṇṇuparimasana-lakkhaṇa)。(17)上躯如狮子相(sīhapubbaddhakāya-lakkhaṇa；梵 siṃha-pūrvārdha kāya)即︰上身安住如狮子。《大本经》(T1.5.2)︰「胸膺方整如师子。」▓46世尊身分上半圆满，如师子王威严无对。(18)两肩间充满相(citantaraṁsa-lakkhaṇa；梵 citāntarāṁsa)。又作腋下平满相、肩膊圆满相。(19)两肩圆度相等相(samavaṭṭa-kkhandha-lakkhaṇa；梵 su-samvrta-skandha) 即两肩圆满丰腴之相。《中阿含59经》：「21大人两肩上连，通颈平满。」(20)最上之味觉相(rasagga-saggitā-lakkhaṇa；梵 rasa-rasāgratā)脖子之上(舌上)，味觉敏锐传滋味。大本经》(T1.5.2)︰「二十六、咽喉清净，所食众味，无不称适。」(21)眼绀碧青相(abhinīla-netta-lakkhaṇa；梵 abhinīla-netra)目绀青色相，如青莲华。《大本经》(T1.5a)︰「三十、眼如牛王，眼上下俱眴。」(22)眼睫如牝牛相(go-pakhuma-lakkhaṇa；梵 go-paksmā)又作眼睫如牛王相，指睫毛整齐而不杂乱。▓38世尊眼睫上下齐整稠密不白。(23)头顶有肉髻相(uṇhīsasīsa-lakkhaṇa；梵 usṇīsa-wiraskatā)顶上有肉，隆起如髻形之相。《中阿含59经》：「31大人顶有肉髻，团圆相称，发螺右旋。」▓66顶相无能见者。◆1无见顶。--此「无见顶」之说须要保留。(24)一一毛由一一毛孔生(相)(ekekalomo ca hoti；梵 ekaika-roma-pradaksiṇāvarta)一孔一毛(ekeka-loma)，指一孔各生一毛。《大本经》(T1.5.2)︰「其毛右旋，绀琉璃色。」《中阿含59经》：「11大人一一毛，一一毛者，身一孔一毛生，色若绀青，如螺右旋。」▓64世尊身毛绀青光净。如孔雀项。红晖绮饰色类赤铜。◆31毛处处右旋。(25)眉间生白毫毛(相)(uṇṇā bhamukhāntare jātā；梵 ūrṇā-kewa)。眉间生白毫毛似兜罗绵(odātā mudutūlasannibhā)。《大本经》(T1.5a)︰「三十一、眉间白毫柔软细泽，引长一寻，放则右旋螺如真珠。」(一寻︰一成人的身高)▲70眉间毫相光白鲜洁。「白毫相」长一寻，或一丈五尺(T34.29.1)，恐怕是讹传。(26)四十齿相(cattālīsa-lakkhaṇa；梵 catvāriṃwad-danta)齿有四十颗。(27)齿无缝相(aviraḷadanta-lakkhaṇa)，无间隙，极坚固。《中阿含59经》：「24不踈齿。」(28)广长舌相(pahūta-jivha-lakkhaṇa；梵 prabhūta-tanu-jihva) 又作广长舌相、舌广博相、舌软薄相。舌头可伸展至发际。《大本经》(T1.5.2)︰「左右舐耳。」(29)梵音之迦陵频伽声音(相)(brahmassaro ca karavīkabhāṇī；梵 brahma-svara)，梵音(brahmassara)，声如迦陵频伽鸟(karavīka-bhāṇi)的清脆(《佛说长阿含经》卷第五(T1.35.2-3)︰「一者其音正直。二者其音和雅。三者其音清彻。四者其音深满。五者周遍远闻。具此五者。乃名梵音。」(30)狮子颊相(sīhahanulakkhaṇaṁ；梵 siṃha-hanu)指两颊隆满(两腮圆润)如狮子颊。▲65颊相平满。▲66颊无缺减。▲66颊无过恶。(31)齿整齐相 (samadantasudāṭhālakkhaṇāni；梵 sama-danta)。(32)齿纯白相(susukkadāṭhālakkhaṇāni；梵 suwukka-danta)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bāvīsati: {'def': '(num.) [bā=dvā,+vīsati] twenty-two Kvu 218; Miln.419; DhsA.2. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】二十二。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】二十二。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bāḷha: {'def': '【形】强壮的，很多的，过多的。bāḷhaṁ,【副】强烈地，过度地，非常地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】强壮的，很多的，过多的。 ~haŋ,【副】强烈地，过度地，非常地。(p237)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic bāḍha, orig. pp. of bahati2] strong; only as adv. °ṁ and °-, viz. -- 1. bāḷhaṁ strongly, very much, excessively, too much, to satiety J.II,293; VI,291 (i. e. too often, C. punappunaṁ); Miln.407; PvA.274. Comparative bāḷhataraṁ in a higher degree, even more, too much Vin.II,270, 276; Miln.125. -- 2. (°-) in bāḷha-gilāna very ill, grievously sick D.I,72; A.II,144; S.V,303; DA.I,212. (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāḷhika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bāḷha], only in su° having excess of good things, very prosperous J.V,214 (C. expls by suṭṭhu aḍḍha). (Page 486)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bāṇa: {'def': '[cp. Vedic bāṇa] an arrow Mbhv 19. (Page 485)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】箭。bāṇadhi,【阳】箭袋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】箭。 ~dhi, 【阳】箭袋。(p236)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Bībhacca: {'def': '【形】可怕的，恐怖的。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】可怕的，恐怖的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Bībhaccha: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bībhatsa, bībhatsate to feel disgust. Not a des. fr. bādhate: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fastidium] disgusting, awful, horrible, dreadful J.II,276; IV,71 (°vaṇṇa), Sdhp.603. °dassana a disgusting sight, horrible to behold J.I,171; PvA.32, 56, 68, 99 (: all with ref. to Petas). -- The spelling bhībhaccha (after bhī) is sometimes found, e. g. at J.I,61; IV,491; V,42. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bīja: {'def': '【中】种子，细菌，产生元素。 ~kosa, 【阳】花的胚囊，果皮，阴囊。~gāma, 【阳】种子王国。 ~jāta, 【中】种子的种类。 ~bīja, 【中】以种子繁殖的植物。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】种子，种籽，细菌，产生元素。有五种生种子(pañca bījajatani)：根种(mūlabījaṁ)，茎种(khandhabījaṁ)，节种(phalubījaṁ)，枝种(aggabījaṁ) ，(种)种子(bījabījaṁ)。bījakosa,【阳】花的胚囊，果皮，阴囊。bījagāma,【阳】种子王国。bījajāta,【中】种子的种类。bījabīja,【中】以种子繁殖的植物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic bīja] 1. seed, germ, semen, spawn. Used very frequently in figurative sense: see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 116. -- D.I,135 (°bhatta seed-corn & food); III,44 (the five kinds: see below under °gāma); M.I,457; S.I,21, 134, 172, 227; III,54, 91; IV,315; A.I,32 (ucchu°), 135, 223, 229, 239; III,404; IV,237; V,213 (ucchu°); Sn.77 (saddhā bījaṁ tapo vuṭṭhi, cp. SnA 142 sq., where a detailed discussion on bīja is found), 209, 235 (khīṇa° adj. fig.); J.I,242 (tiṇa°-ādīni grass and other seeds), 281; Pv.I,11; Vism.555 (in simile); KhA 194 (on Sn.235, in another comparison); Sdhp.24, 270 sq., 318. nibbatta° (or nivatta°) (adj.) that which has dropped its seed (hence a lawful food) Vin.I,215, cp. II.109; IV,35. -- 2. element, in udaka° whose element is the water J.VI,160. --gāma seed-group, seed-kingdom, seed-creation (opp. bhūta-gāma). There are 5 kinds of seeds usually enumd, e. g. at D.I,5 (expld at DA.I,77, trsln at Dial. I.6 and passim), viz. mūla°, khandha°, phalu°, agga°, bija°, or plants propagated by roots, cuttings, joints, buddings, shoots, seeds (Dial. III,40: tubers, shoots, berries, joints, seeds). The same set occurs at D.III,44, 47; Vin.IV,34; SnA 144. -- Without ref. to the 5 kinds at M.III,34; S.V,46; Miln.33. --jāta species of seed S.III,54. --bīja one of the 5 groups of edible or useful plants, falling under bījagāma. It is expld at Vin.IV,35 & DA.I,81 by the terms pubbaṇṇa (i. e. the seven dhaññāni or grains, sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kaṅgu, varaka, kudrūsa) and aparaṇṇa (i. e. beans and other leguminous plants, and gourds such as mugga, māsa, tila, kulattha, alābu, kumbhaṇḍa). --sakaṭa a cart (-load) of seeds SnA 137. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bījaka: {'def': '[fr. bīja] scion, offspring Vin.III,18. --nīla° a waterplant Vin.III,276 (C. on Vin.III,177). (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bījati: {'def': '& Bījanī are by-forms of vījati & vījanī (q. v.). (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bījin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. bīja] having seed, only in cpd. eka° having one seed (for only one future life) left A.I,233; S.V,205; Nett 189, cp. A. IV.380; Kvu II.471, see also KvuA in J.P.T.S. 1889, 137. (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Bīraṇa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. vīraṇa & vīraṇī-mūla=uśīra Halāyudha 2, 467] a fragrant grass, Andropogon muricatum S.III,137; (here represented as larger than the kusa & babbaja grasses, smaller than a tree). (Page 488)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】须芒草（参考 Usīra，生产芬香的根）。 ~tthambha, 【阳】须芒草丛。(p238)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】岩兰草、须芒草(Andropogon muricatus)，味道带著青苔味，属于越陈越香的精油。原产地印度称为「Khas-khas」，所谓「镇定之油」。但是它不会镇压神经系统来达到镇定效果，相反的，它能让您心情平和，情绪平稳。另外，岩兰草也是对付因紧张，情绪失调，压力造成的失眠有相当的效果。bīraṇatthambha,【阳】须芒草丛。参考 Usīra，生产芬香的根。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Būha: {'def': 'see vyūha. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Būḷha: {'def': '[for vūḷha, cp. Sk. vyūḍha for the usual vyūha, q. v.] array of troops J.I,387. (Page 490)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

C: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第六个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 z。(p123)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第六个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 z。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ca: {'def': '(indef. enchtic particle) [Vedic ca adv. to rel. pron. *qǔo, idg. *que=Cr. te, Lat. que, Goth. --h. Cp. ka, ki, ku] 1. Indefinite (after demonstr. pron. in the sense of kiṁ=what about? or how is it? cp. kiṁ)=ever, whoever, what-ever, etc. [Sk. kaśca, Gr. οs te, Lat: quisque, Goth. hvazuh] so ca whoever (see below 3), tañ ca pan’amhākaṁ ruccati tena c’amhā attamanā M.I,93; yañ ca kho . . . ceteti yañ ca pakappeti . . . whatever he thinks, whatever he intends . . . S.II,65. As a rule the Pali form corresp. to Sk. kaśca is *kascid=koci, & ci (cid) is the regular P. representative of the indefinite ca (cp. cana & api). -- 2. Copulative or disjunctive according to the general context being positive or negative. (a) copulative: and, then, now: tadā ca now then, and then (in historical exposition) J.III,188. Most frequent in connecting two or three words, usually placed after the second, but also after the third: atthaṁ anatthañ ca Dh.256; pubbâparāni ca Dh.352; alaṁ etehi ambehi jambūhi panasehi ca J.II,160. -- In the same sense added to each link of the chain as ca-ca (cp. Sk. ca-ca, Gr. te te, Lat. que que; also mixed with constituents of similar pairs as api-ca, cp. te-kai): tuyhañ ca tassā ca to you and her (orig. this or whatever to you, whatever to her)=to you as well as to her J.I,151. Often with the first member emphasized by eva: c’eva, as well as: hasi c’eva rodi ca he laughed as well as cried J.I,167; maṁsena c’eva phalāphalena ca with flesh as well as with all kinds of fruit J.III,127; subhaddako c’eva supesalo ca J.III,82; c’eva apace padūse pi ca waste and even defile ThA.72 (Ap V.40). ‹-› (b) disjunctive: but (esp. after a negation): yo ca but who Th.1, 401; yadā ca but when (cp. tadā ca) J.III,128. In conditional clauses (cp. 3) comb^d with sace=but if, on the other hand: sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati . . . sace ca pabbajati agārā Sn.1003. With neg, na ca=but not: mahatī vata te bondi, na ca paññā tadūpikā (but your wisdom is not in the same proportion) J.II,160. ‹-› 3. Conditional: if [=Vedic ced, Lat. absque] D.I,186, 207; II,36, 57 (jāti ca not va); M.I,91; S.III,66 (rūpañ ca attā abhavissa); A.I,58; V,87; J.II,110 (ciram pi kho khadeyya yavaṁ . . . ravamāno ca dūsayi: “he might have caten a long time, if he had not come to harm by his cry,” or “but”); IV,487; V,185, 216 (Sakko ca me varaṁ dajjā so ca labbhetha me varo: “if S. will give me a wish, that wish will be granted,” or: “whatever wish he will allow, that one will be fulfilled”); VI,206, 208. -- na ca (at the beginning of an interrog. phrase)= if not S.I,190 (ahaṁ ca kho . . . pavāremi, na ca me Bhagavā kiñci garahati: if the Bh. will not blame me). For BSk. ca=ced see AvŚ II.189, n. o. (Page 258)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '（连接词或转折连词的虚词）和，此外，既然。(p123)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(连接词或转折连词的虚词)和，此外，既然。cettha(ca+ettha)﹐此外，这里。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Caccara: {'def': '(Sk. catvara),【中】庭院，院子，十字路口，交叉路(a quadrangular place, a square, courtyard; a place where four roads meet, a cross road)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. catvara, cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 56] a quadrangular place, a square, courtyard; a place where four roads meet, a cross road Vin.III,151; IV,271; Miln.1 (+catukkasiṅghāṭaka), 330 (do.); J.I,425 (°raccha). (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】庭院，院子，十字路口，交叉路。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cacidaritu: {'def': '【阳】表演者，观察者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cadika: {'def': 'at Miln.197 (ūmikavaṅkacadika) prob. for °madika. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caja: {'def': '(adj.) giving up, to be given up; in cpd. duc° hard to give up A.III,50; J.V,8. Cp. cāga. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】放弃，遗弃(giving up, to be given up)。duccaja, 难放弃(hard to give up A.III,50; J.V,8.)。cp. cāga(舍)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cajana: {'def': '【中】留置，放弃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】留置，放弃。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cajati: {'def': '(caj+a；Sk. tyajate, tyaj), 1.释放(to let loose, to emit, to discharge)。2.放弃，遗弃(to abandon, to give up, sacrifice)。【过】caji。【过分】catta。【现分】cajanta, cajamāna。【独】cajitvā。grd. caja(Sk. tyajya)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(caj + a), 释放，遗弃，放弃。【过】 caji。【过分】catta。【现分】 cajanta, cajamāna。【独】 cajitvā。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. tyajate, tyaj=Gr. soζέw to scare away] 1. to let loose, to emit, to discharge A.II,33; J.II,342 (mutta karīsaṁ) fig. to utter (a speech) J.V,362. -- 2. to abandon, to give up, sacrifice (with Loc. of person to whom: Asuresu pāṇaṁ S.I,224=J.I,203) Dh.290; J.II,205; III,211; V,464; VI,570. -- pp. catta, q. v. -- grd. caja [Sk. tyajya] q. v. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakita: {'def': '【形】扰乱，害怕。(p123)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】扰乱，害怕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. cakita, cak] disturbed; afraid, timid Dāvs.IV,35, 46. (Page 258)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakka: {'def': '【中】轮子，圆周，圆盘，周期，指令。 ~aṅkita, 【形】有一个轮子的标志。 ~pāṇī, 【阳】毗瑟挐神（(Vishṇu) 其手中有个圆盘）。 ~yuga,【中】一双轮子。 ~ratana, 【中】（转轮王的）轮宝。 ~vattī, 【阳】转轮王。 ~samārūḷha, 【形】（在紧急中）登上了交通工具。(p123)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】轮子，圆周，圆盘，周期，指令。cakkaṅkita,【形】有一个轮子的标志。cakkapāṇī,【阳】毘瑟挐神((Vishṇu) 其手中有个圆盘)。cakkayuga,【中】一双轮子。cakkaratana,【中】(转轮王的)轮宝。cakkavattī(=cakkavatti-rājan),【阳】转轮王(又作转轮圣王，此王拥有七宝：轮、象、马、珠、女、居士、主兵臣，具足四德：长寿、无疾病、容貌出色、宝藏丰富；统一须弥四洲，以正法治世。)。cakkasamārūḷha,【形】(在紧急中)登上了交通工具。D.30./III,142.︰“Dvattiṁsimāni, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni bhavanti; seyyathidaṁ, cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado.(诸比丘！大人具有三十二大人相，若具足大人(相)，只有二趣处而无其他(趣)。若居在家者，成为转轮王之正法王，征服四方，安定国土，七宝具足，其七宝者，即︰轮宝、象宝、马宝、摩尼宝、女宝、居士宝、主兵宝为第七。他有逾千王子，(皆具)勇猛与英雄气慨，善伐敌军。他於此大地到海边，不用杖罚与刀刑，唯依法征服统治。然而，若他由在家而出家成为无家者，除去世间的覆障，将成为阿罗汉、正自觉者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic cakra, redupl. formation fr. *quel to turn round (cp. P. kaṇṭha › Lat. collus & see also note on gala)=that which is (continuously) turning, i. e. wheel, or abstr, the shape or periphery of it, i. e. circle. Cakra=Gr. ku/klos, Ags. hveohl, hveol=wheel. The unredupl. form in Sk. carati (versatur), Gr. pέlomai, poleu/w, poλos (pole); Lat. colo, incolo; Obulg. kolo wheel, Oisl. hvel] I. Crude meaning: 1. a wheel (of a carriage) Dh.1; PvA.65 (ratha°); Miln.27. -- 2. a discus used as a missile weapon J.I,74; Pgdp 36; cp. khura° a razor as an Instr. of torture. -- 3. a disc, a circle: heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni, forming the 2^nd characteristic mark of a Mahāpurisa D.II,17= III,143; D.III,149. -- J.II,331; Miln.51. -- 4. an array of troops (under tayo vyūhā: paduma° cakka° sakaṭa°) J.II,404=IV.343. -- II. Applied meaning: 1. (a wheel as component part of a carriage, or one of a duad or tetrad=) collection, set, part; succession; sphere, region, cycle Vin.I,330 (cp. Vin. Texts II.281); III,96; iriyāpatha° the 4 ways of behaviour, the various positions (standing, walking, sitting, lying down) DA.I,249; Sdhp.604. sā°, miga° the sphere or region of dogs & wild animals Miln.178; cakkena (Instr.) in succession PvA.III,cakkaṁ kātabbaṁ, or bandhitabbaṁ freq. in Yam. and Paṭṭh, “The cycle of formulated words is to be here repeated.” -- 2. (like the four wheels constituting the moving power of a carriage=) a vehicle, instrument, means & ways; attribute, quality; state, condition, esp. good condition (fit instrumentality), catucakka an Instr. of four, a lucky tetrad, a fourwheeler of the body as expressing itself in the four kinds of deportment, iriyāpathas A.II,32; S.I,16, 63 (catucakkaṁ). In this sense generalized as a happy state, consisting of “4 blessings”: paṭirūpadesa-vāsa, sappurisûpassaya, atta-sammāpaṇidhi, pubbe-kata-puññatā A.II,32; J.V,114; mentioned at Ps.I,84. Cp. also Sn.554 sq.; 684. Esp. pronounced in the two phrases dhamma-cakka (the wheel of the Doctrine, i. e. the symbol of conquering efficacy, or happiness implicated in the D.) and brahma-c° the best wheel, the supreme instrument, the noblest quality. Both with pavatteti to start & kcep up (like starting & guiding a carriage), to set rolling, to originate, to make universally known. dhamma° e. g. S.I,191; A.I,23, 101; II,34, 120; III,151; IV,313; Sn.556 sq.; 693; J.III,412; Ps.II,159 sq.; PvA.67 (see dhamma). brahma° M.I,71; S.II,27; A.II,9, 24; III,9, 417; V,33; Vbh.317 sq.; 344 (see brahma). Cp. cakkavattin (below). -- Cp. vi°.

--chinna (udaka) (water of a well) the wheel of which is broken Ud.83; --bhañjanin one who destroys a state of welfare & good J.V,112 (patirāpadesavāsādino kusala-cakkassa bhañjanī C.); --bheda breaking peace or concord, sowing discord Vin.II,198; III,171; --yuga a pair of wheels Vv 83²; --ratana the treasure of the wheel, that is of the sun (cp. Rh. D. Buddh. Suttas p. 252; Dialogues II.197, 102) D.II,171; III,59 sq., 75; J.I,63; II,311; DA.I,249. See also cakkavattin; --vaṭṭaka (nt.) a scoop-wheel (a wheel revolving over a well with a string of earthen pots going down empty & coming up full, after dredger fashion) Vin.II,122; --vattin (cp. dhammacakkaṁ pavatteti above) he who sets rolling the Wheel, a just & faithful king (rājā hoti c. dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto Sn.p. 106, in corresp. pass. v. 1002 as vijeyya pathaviṁ imaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena-m-anusāsati). A definition is given by Bdhgh. at DA.I,249. -- Three sorts of c. are later distinguished: a cakkavāla-c° a universal king, or cāturanta-c° (ruling over four great continents Sn.p. 106; KhA 227), a dīpa-c° (ruling over one), a padesa-c° (ruling over part of one) Usually in phrase rājā cakka vattin: D.I,88; III,156; IV,302; V,44, 99, 342; D.II,16, 172; III,59 sq., 75, 142 sq.; M.III,65; A.I,76, 109 sq.; II,37, 133, 245; III,147 sq; 365; IV,89, 105; V,22; Kh VIII,12 (°sukha); J.I,51; II,395; IV,119; Vbh.336; PvA.117; VvA.18; Sdhp.238, 453; DhA.II,135 (°sirī). --°gabbha Vism.126: --°rajjaṁ kāresi J.II,311; --viddha (nt.) a particular form of shooting J.V,130; --samārūḷha (adj.) having mounted the wheels, i. e. their carts (of janapadā) A.I,178; III,66, 104. (Page 258)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakkalaka: {'def': '[fr. cakka] a disc or tuft (?) Vism.255 (kaḷīra°, where KhA 50 reads in same context kaḷīra-daṇḍa). (Page 259)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakkali: {'def': '(f.) drapery Vin.II,174. (Page 259)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakkalikā: {'def': 'a window blind, curtain Vin.II,148. (Page 259)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakkavāka: {'def': '【阳】红鹅。(p123)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic cakravāka, cp. kṛkavāku, to sound root kṛ, see note on gala] the ruddy goose (Anas Casarca) J.III,520; IV,70 sq. (N. of J No. 451); Pv.II,12³; Miln.364, 401; -- f. cakkavākī J.III,524; VI,189=501. (Page 259)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】红鹅(ruddy goose)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cakkavāla: {'def': '【阳】【中】宇宙(世界的圆周)，太阳系，轮围山，铁围山。cakkavālagabbha,【阳】世界圆周的内部。cakkavālapabbata,【阳】环绕著地球的回圈岩石。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】宇宙（世界的圆周），太阳系。 ~gabbha, 【阳】世界圆周的内部。 ~pabbata, 【阳】环绕着地球的循环岩石。(p123)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cakkavāḷa: {'def': '(m. & nt.) a circle, a sphere, esp. a mythical range of mountains supposed to encircle the world; pl. worlds or spheres J.I,53, 203; VI,330; Vism.205 (its extent), 207, 367, 421; DhsA.297; DhA 11. 15; III,498; in the trope “cakkavāḷaṁ atisambādhaṁ brahmaloko atinīco” (=the whole world cannot hold it) to express immensity DhA.I,310; VvA.68.

--gabbha the interior of the C. sphere J.IV,119; DA.I,284; --pabbata (nt.) the C. mountains, “world’s end” J.III,32; VI,272; --rajja (nt.) the whole world, strictly speaking the whole region of a sphere J.II,392. (Page 259)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakkhu: {'def': '(‹梵caks),【中】眼睛。cakkhuka,【形】有眼睛的。cakkhuda, cakkhudada,【形】给(慧) 眼的人。cakkhudhātu,【阴】眼界(即：视觉感官)。cakkhupatha,【阳】视野(视觉的范围)。cakkhubhūta,【形】亲眼目睹。cakkhumantu,【形】赋予眼睛的。cakkhulola,【形】贪看许多事物的(眼贪)。cakkhuviññāṇa,【中】眼识(=视觉)。cakkhuviññeyya,【形】是藉著视力感知的。cakkhusamphassa,【阳】眼接触(视觉与颜色的接触)。cakkhāyatana,【中】眼处(视觉感官)。cakkhindriya,【中】眼根(视觉官能)。SA.35.1./II,354.︰cakkhunti dve cakkhūni-- ñāṇacakkhu ceva maṁsacakkhu ca. Tattha ñāṇacakkhu pañcavidhaṁ-- Buddhacakkhu, dhammacakkhu, samantacakkhu, dibbacakkhu, paññācakkhūti. Tesu Buddhacakkhu nāma āsayānusayañāṇañceva indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca, yaṁ-- “Buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokento”ti āgataṁ. Dhammacakkhu nāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā tīṇi ca phalāni, yaṁ-- “Virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādī”ti āgataṁ. Samantacakkhu nāma sabbaññutaññāṇaṁ, yaṁ-- “pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū”ti āgataṁ. Dibbacakkhu nāma ālokapharaṇena uppannaṁ ñāṇaṁ, yaṁ-- “dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā”ti (pārā.13 ma.ni.2.341) āgataṁ. Paññācakkhu nāma catusaccaparicchedakañāṇaṁ, yaṁ-- “cakkhuṁ udapādī”ti (sa.ni.5.1081 mahāva.15) āgataṁ. Maṁsacakkhupi duvidhaṁ-- sasambhāracakkhu, pasādacakkhūti. (眼有智眼和肉眼。智眼有佛眼，法眼，普眼，天眼，慧眼。佛眼即排出随眠之智，根的超越听闻之智；那是来自--‘以佛眼熟视世间’。法眼即低下的三道三果；那是来自--‘远尘，离垢，生起法眼净’。普眼即一切知智；那是来自(娑婆世界主之梵天劝请语)--‘愿普眼升起欢喜’。天眼即以充满光明而生起的智；那是来自--‘以清净的天眼’。慧眼即四圣谛的全尺度之智；那是来自--‘生起天眼’。肉眼有两种，有形的眼和眼净色。) Thag.v.501.“Cakkhumāssa yathā andho, sotavā badhiro yathā; Paññavāssa yathā mūgo, balavā dubbaloriva. Atha atthe samuppanne, sayetha matasāyikan”ti.(有眼者像瞎子，有耳者像聋子，有慧者像哑巴，身体强壮像羸弱的人。) 《毗尼日用切要香乳记》 (X60n1116.p202b)︰「有眼若盲，有耳若聋，以定慧成於中，礼诵行於外，形同枯木，心若死灰，如是行持，则三业自净矣。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】眼睛。 ~ka, 【形】有眼睛的。 ~da, ~dada, 【形】给（慧）眼的人。 ~dhātu, 【阴】眼界（视觉的要素，即：视觉感官）。 ~patha,【阳】视野（视觉的范围）。 ~bhūta, 【形】持有正确理解的人。 ~mantu,【形】赋予眼睛的。 ~lola, 【形】贪看许多事物的。 ~viññāṇa, 【中】眼识，视觉。 ~viññeyya, 【形】是藉着视力感感知的。 ~samphassa, 【阳】眼接触（视觉与形象的接触）。~āyatana,【中】眼处（视觉感官）。 ~indriya,【中】眼根（视觉官能）。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic cakṣuḥ, etym. not clear, as redupl. perhaps to īks, akṣa eye, kṣạṇa moment, or as intens. to cit, cp. cinteti, & see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under inquam] the eye (Nom. sg. cakkhuṁ Vin.I,34; S.I,115; M.III,134, etc.). -- I. The eye as organ of sense-(a) psychologically: cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā “seeing visible object (shape) with the eye” (Nd² on rūpa q. v.) is the defin. of this first & most important of the senses (cp. Pv.II,6¹ dakkhiṇa c.=the most valuable thing): the psychology of sight is discussed at DA.I,194 sq., and more fully at Dhs.597 sq. (see DhsA.306 sq; Dhs.trsl. 173 sq.); cp. cak khunā puriso ālokati rūpagatāni Nd² 234. In any enumeration of the senses cakkhu heads the list, e. g. Vin.I,34; D.I,21; II,308, 336 sq.; III,102, 225, 244 sq.; 269; Nett 28.-See rūpa. Also combd. with sota: M.I,318; III,264; A.I,281. -- cakkhusmiṁ haññati rūpehi S.IV,201; hata° A.I,129. passāmi naṁ manasā cakkhunā va “I see him with my mind as with my eye” Sn.1142.-Vin.I,184; S.I,32, 199; IV,123; Dh.360; J.IV,137; DA.I,183; Nett 191. Vism.444 sq. As adj. (-°) seeing, having or catching sight of: eka° (dvi°) one-eyed (two°) A.I,128 sq.; āmisa° seeing an object of sensual enjoyment S.II,226; IV,159; J.V,91 (=kilesalola). acakkhu blind A.III,250, 256; Ps.I,129. -- (b) ethically: as a “sense” belonging to what is called “body” (kāya) it shares all the qualities of the latter (see kāya), & is to be regarded as an Instr. only, i. e. the person must not value it by itself or identify himself with it. Subduing the senses means in the first place acquiring control over one’s eyes (cp. okkhitta cakkhu, with down-cast eyes Sn.63, 411, 972; Pv IV.3⁴⁴; & indriyesu guttadvāra; °indriya). In this connection the foll. passages may be mentioned: Vin.I,34; D.I,70; S.IV,123; II,244 (aniccaṁ, etc.); III,255 (do.) IV.81, 128 (na tumhākaṁ); Ps.I,132 (aniccatṭhaṁ). Numerous others see under rūpa. -- II. The eve as the most important channel of mental acquiring, as faculty of perception & apperception; insight, knowledge (cp. veda, olda to vid, to see). In connection with ñāṇa (ghώsis) it refers to the apperception of the truth (see dhamma-cakkhu): intuition and recognition, which means perfect understanding (cp. the use of the phrase jānāti passati “to know and to see”=to understand clearly). See e. g. S.II,7--11, 105; IV,233; V,179; 258; 422 sq. Most frequently as dhamma° “the eye of the truth,” said of the attainment of that right knowledge which leads to Arahantship, in phrase virajaṁ vitamalaṁ dh-cakkhuṁ uppajjati Vin.I,16; D.I,86, 110; S.II,134 sq.; IV,47; 107; V,467; A.IV,186; Ps.II,150 sq.; 162; Miln.16. Similarly paññā°, It.52; ariya° M.I,510. -- III, The eye as the Instr. of supersensuous perception, “clear” sight, clairvoyance. This is the gift of favoured beings whose senses are more highly developed than those of others, and who through right cognition have acquired the two “eyes” or visionary faculties, termed dibba- cakkhu & buddha-cakkhu It.52; D.II,38 resp. They are most completely described at Nd² 235 (under cakkhumā), & the foll. categories of the range of application of cakkhu are set forth: 1. maṁsa-cakkhu: the physical eye which is said to be exceptionally powerful & sensitive. See Kv III,7 (trans. p. 149 ff.). Vism.428 (maṁsa° 2 ñāṇa°).-2. dibba-°: the deva-eye, the eye of a seer, allpervading, & seeing all that proceeds in hidden worlds.‹-› 3. paññā°: the eye of wisdom; he who knows all that can be known (jānaṁ passaṁ recognizing & seeing, i. e. of perfect understanding; cakkhubhūta ñāṇa° dhamma° brahma°). -- 4. buddha°: the eye of a Buddha or of complete intuition, i. e. of a person who “sees the heart of man,” of a being realizing the moral state of other beings and determined to help them on the Path to Right Knowledge. -- 5. samanta°: (a summary account of Nos. 1--4, & in all Scripture-passages a standing Ep. of Gotama Buddha, see below), the eye of all round knowledge, the eye of a Tathāgata, of a being perfected in all wisdom. -- Out of these are mentioned & discussed singly or in set: (Nos. 1--5): DhsA.306; SnA 351; (Nos. 1--3:) It.52=Kvu 251 sq. (It.52=Kvu 254); (dibba:) Vin.I,8, 288; II,183; III,5; D.I,82, 162; III, 52, III, 281; M.I,213; S.I,144, 196; II,122, 213, 276; IV,240; V,266, 305; A.I,165, 256, 281 sq.; III,19, 29, 418; IV,85, 141, 178, 291; V,13, 35, 68, 200, 211, 340; J.III,346; Ps.I,114; II,175; Vbh.344; PvA.5. -- (paññā°:) S.IV,292; V,467, A.I,35; DhA.III,174, 175. -- (buddha°:) Vin.I,6; S.I,138; Ps.II,33; PvA.61. -- (samanta°:) S.I,137=Nd² 235⁴; Sn.345, 378, 1063, 1069, 1090, 1133; Ps.II,31=Nd² 235⁵.

--āyatana (either cakkh’or cakkhv°) the organ or sense of sight D.III,243, 280, 290; Dhs.585, 653; --indriya (cakkhundriya) the organ of eye, faculty of vision D.I,70; III,225, 239; A.I,113; Dhs.585, 597, 661, 830, 971; Vism.7; --karaṇa (always in combⁿ w. ñāṇa-karaṇa) producing (right) insight (and knowledge) It.82 (of kusalavitakkā); f. °ī S.IV,331 (of majjhimā paṭipadā); Ps.II,147; --dada one who gives the eye (of understanding) Th.1, 3; --dhātu the element of vision Dhs.597, 703, 817. --patha the range of vision; sight J.I,65=DhA.I,173; J.I,146; IV,189, 378, 403 (=cakkhūnaṁ etaṁ nāmaṁ C.); VvA.119; --bhāta (+ñāṇa°) (adj.) one who has become the possessor of right understanding S.II,255; IV,94; A.V,226 sq. --lola greed (or greedy) with the eye Nd² 177; --viññāṇa consciousness by means of visual perception, visual cognition Vin.I,34; D.II,308, 310; III,243; Dhs.433, 556, 585, 589, 620; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. Eth. p. 177; Miln.trsl. I.80, 89; --viññeyya (adj.) (i. e. rūpā) to be apperceived by the sense of sight Vin.I,184; D.II,281; III,234; Dhs.589, 967, 1095; --samphassa contact with the sense of vision (usually with °ja: sprung from visual contact) (of vedanā, feelings) Vin.I,34; D.II,308 sq.; III,243; Ps.I,5, 40, 136. (Page 259)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakkhuka: {'def': '(adj.) having eyes, seeing (-°), in dibba° A.I,23. 148 (see cakkhu III,²) and a° blind D.I,191; S.III,140; Nd 67. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakkhula: {'def': '(adj.) [=cakkhuka] in visama° squint-eyed. squinting J.I,353; VI,548. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakkhumant: {'def': '(adj.) [cakkhu+mant] having eyes, being gifted with sight; of clear sight, intuition or wisdom; possessing knowledge (cp. samantacakkhu) D.I,76 (one who knows, i. e. a connoisseur); cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhinti “those who have eyes to see shall see” (of the Buddha) D.I,85, 110, etc. -- Vin.I,16; S.I,27; A.I,116, 124; IV,106; Dh.273; It.108, 115; DA.I,221; DhA.III,403; IV,85. -- Esp. as Ep. of the Buddha: the Allwise S.I,121, 134, 159, 210; Sn.31, 160, 992, 1028, 1116, 1128; Vv 12⁵ (=pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā Buddho Bhagavā VvA.60, cp. cakkhu III,); Vv 81²⁷. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cakkhu眼睛+mant有),【阳】具眼者。cakkhumā, (m.s.Nom.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cakkhunī: {'def': '【阴】眼睛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cakkhussa: {'def': '【形】善于眼的。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】善於眼的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic cakṣuṣya] pleasing to or good for the eyes (opp. a°) Vin.II,137, 148. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cakora: {'def': '【阳】鹧鸪(francolin partridge松鸡)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. cakora to kol (kor), see note on gala] the francolin partridge (Perdix rufa) J.V,416; Vv 35⁸; VvA.163. See also caṅkora. (Page 258)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鹧鸪，松鸡。(p123)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cala: {'def': '【形】移动的，颤抖的，不稳定的。calacitta,【中】变幻无常的心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】移动的，颤抖的，不稳定的。 ~citta, 【中】变幻无常的心。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [see calati] moving, quivering; unsteady, fickle, transient S.IV,68 (dhammā calā c’eva vyayā ca aniccā, etc.); J.II,299; III,381; V,345; Miln.93, 418; Sdhp.430, 494. --acala steadfast, immovable S.I,232; J.I,71 (ṭṭhāna); Vv 51⁴ (°ṭṭhāna=Ep. of Nibbāna); acalaṁ sukhaṁ (=Nibbāna) Th.2, 350; cp. niccala motionless DhA.III,38.

--âcala [intens. redupl.] moving to & fro, in constant motion, unsteady J.IV,494, 498 (=cañcala); Miln.92; (cp. Divy 180, 281); --kkaku having a quivering hump J.III,380 IV.330 (=calamānakakudha or calakakudha). (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Calaka: {'def': '² (nt.) [perhaps from carv to chew; but Sk. carvana, chewing, is not found in the specific sense of P. calaka. Cp. ucchiṭṭha and cuṇṇa] a piece of meat thrown away after having been chewed Vin.II,115; IV,266 (=vighāsa); VvA.222 (°aṭṭhikāni meat-remnants & bones). (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (m.) a camp marshal, adjutant D.I,51≈(in list of various occupations); A.IV,107 sq. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Calana: {'def': '(adj. & nt.) shaking, trembling, vibrating; excitement J.III,188; DhsA.72. -- f. calanī (quick,+laṅghī) a kind of antelope J.VI,537. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】运动，发抖，激动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】运动，发抖，激动。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Calati: {'def': '(cal+a), 移动，激起，战栗，被激动。【过】cali。【过分】calita。【现分】calanta, calamāna。【独】calitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cal + a), 移动，激起，战栗，被激动。【过】 cali。【过分】 calita。【现分】 calanta, calamāna。【独】 calitvā。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Dhtp 251 kampana, to shake. Perhaps connected with car, carati] to move, stir, be agitated, tremble, be confused, waver S.I,107; Sn.752; J.I,303 (kileso cali); III,188 (macchā c.) Miln.260. -- ppr. med. calamāna J.IV,331. -- Esp. freq. in expression kammaja-vātā caliṁsu the labour-pains began to stir J.I,52; VI,485. ‹-› pp. calita (q. v.). -- caus. caleti to shake S.I,109. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Calita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of calati] wavering, unsteady Miln.93, 251; Vism.113; VvA.177. -- (nt.) Sn.p. 146. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Camara: {'def': 'camarī, 【阳】（在喜玛拉雅区域中的）公犁牛。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'camarī,【阳】(在喜玛拉雅区域中的)公犁牛(a chowrie, the tail of bos grunniens used as a whisk)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Deriv. unknown, probably non-Aryan. Sk. camara] 1. the Yak ox (Bos grunniens) J.I,149; III,18, 375; V,416; Miln.365. -- f. --ī J.I,20; Sdhp.621. -- In cpds. camari° J.IV,256. -- 2. a kind of antelope (-ī) J.VI,537.

--vījanī (f.) a chowry (the bushy tail of the Yak made into a brush to drive away flies) Vin.II,130. This is one of the royal ensigns (see kakudhabhaṇḍa & cp. vāla-vījanī). (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Camasa: {'def': '[Vedic camasa, a cup] a ladle or spoon for sacrificing into the sacred fire J.VI,528²⁴=529⁴ (unite ca with masa, cp. 529⁹ and n. 4: aggijuhana-kaṭacchu-saṅkhātimasañca [for camasañ ca] v. l. B^d). Cp. Kern, Toevoegselen s. v. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Camati: {'def': '(& cameti) [cam to sip; but given at Dhtm 552 in meaning “adana,” eating] to rinse, only in cpd. ācamati (ācameti). (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Camma: {'def': '【中】兽皮，皮革。 ~kāra, 【阳】制革工人。 ~khaṇḍa, 【阳】皮垫子。 ~pasibbaka, 【阳】皮袋。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic carman, cp. Lat. corium hide or leather, cortex bark, scortum hide; Ohg. herdo; Ags. heorQa=E. hide; also Sk. kṛtti; Ohg. scirm (shield); E. skin; from *sqer to cut, skin (cp. kaṭu)=the cut-off hide, cp. Gr. dέrw: (dέrma] 1. skin, hide, leather Vin.I,192 (sīha° vyaggha° dīpi°), 196 (elaka° aja° miga°); A.IV,393 (sīha° dīpi°); PvA.157 (kadalimiga° as rug); J.II,110 (sīha°); III,82, 184; Miln.53; Sdhp.140. It is supposed to be subcutaneous (under chavi as tegument), & next to the bone: chaviṁ chindetvā cammaṁ chindati S.II,238=A.IV,129; freq. in expr. like aṭṭhi-cammanahāru-matta (skin & bones) PvA.68, see under nahāru; camma-maṁsa-nahāru PvA.80. -- 2. a shield Vin.II,192 (asi° sword & shield); M.I,86; A.III,93; J.V,373; VI,580.

--aṇḍa a water-skin J.I,250; --kāra a worker in leather, a tanner Vin.IV,7; Miln.331; a harness-maker J.V,45; a waggon-builder and general artisan J.IV,174 (=rathakāra); also as --kārin PvA.175 (=rathakārin); --khaṇḍa an animal’s skin, used as a rug Miln.366; Vism.99; skin used as a water-vessel (see khaṇḍa) Vin.II,122; Ps.I,176; --ghaṭaka a water-skin J.II,345; --naddha (nt.) a drum Bu I.31; --pasibbaka a sack, made of skin or leather ThA.283; J.VI,431, 432 (as v. l.); --bandha a leather strap Vin.I,194; --bhastā (f.) a sack J.V,45; --māluka a leather bag J.VI,431, 432; --yodhin a soldier in cuirass D.I,51≈(in list of var. occupations; DA.I,157: cammakañcukaṁ pavisitvā); A.IV,107, 110; --varatta (f.) a leather thong J.II,153; --vāsin one who wears the skin (of a black antelope), i. e. a hermit J.VI,528; --sāṭaka an ascetic wearing clothes of skin J.III,82 (nāma paribbājaka). (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵carman),【中】皮肤，兽皮，皮革。cammakāra,【阳】制革工人。cammakhaṇḍa,【阳】皮垫子。cammapasibbaka,【阳】皮袋。0', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cammaka: {'def': 'a skin Bu II.52. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Campa: {'def': '=campaka J.VI,151. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Campaka: {'def': 'the Champaka tree (Michelia champaka) having fragrant white & yellow flowers J.V,420; VI,269; Miln.338; DA.I,280; Vism.514 (°rukkha, in simile); DhA.I,384; VvA.194. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】瞻波迦、旃簸迦，黄兰(东印度〔樟科〕的一种乔木 (Michelia Champaca)，花黄色(瞻卜华，素馨花)，可用作香料的油)。KhA.181.︰Tesañhi campakavakulakusumādīnaṁ sahajātavaṇṇagandhādayo viya.(俱生的戒德等功德)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】瞻波迦、旃簸迦，黄兰（东印度〔樟科〕的一种乔木 (Michelia Champaca)，花黄色，产生可用作香料的油）。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Campeyya: {'def': 'N. of a Nāgarāja J.IV,454 (=°jātaka, No. 506); Vism.304. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Campeyya-khandhaka: {'def': '瞻波犍度 Mv 9.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '瞻波犍度 Mv 9.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Campeyyaka: {'def': '【形】属于瞻波城的。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】瞻波城的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) belonging to Campā Vin.V,114; J.VI,269 (here: a Champaka-like tree). (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Campā: {'def': '【阴】瞻波城（印度的一个城镇的名字，现在的 Bhagalpore）。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】瞻波城(印度的一个城名，现在的 Bhagalpore)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'f. 瞻波, チャンパー [アンガの首都].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 瞻波(城) [アンガ(央伽,恆河下流的大國)的首都].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(f.) N. of a town (Bhagulpore) & a river D.I,111; DA.I,279; J.IV,454. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Camu: {'def': '(f.) [Both derivation and exact meaning uncertain. The Vedic camū is a peculiar vessel into wh. the Soma flows from the press. In late Pali & Sk. it means a kind of small army, perhaps a division drawn up more or less in the shape of the Vedic vessel] an army J.II,22; camūpati a general Mhvs 10, 65; 23, 4; Dāvs.I,3. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Camū: {'def': '【阴】军队。camūpati。camūnātha,【阳】军队的将军。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】军队。 ~pati。 ~nātha, 【阳】军队的将军。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cana: {'def': 'canaŋ, 以表达全部之一部分的虚词，例： Kudācana, 有时。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) [Vedic cana fr. rel. pron. *qǔo+demonstr. pron. *no, cp. anā, nānā; Gr. rή; Lat. --ne in quandone=P. kudācana. cana=Goth. hun, Ohg. gin, Ger. ir-gen-d. Cp. ci] indef. particle “like, as if,” added to rel. or interrog. pronouns, as kiñcana anything, kudācana at any time, etc. Cp. ca & ci. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'canaṁ, 以表达全部之一部分的虚词，例： Kudācana, 有时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Canaṁ: {'def': '=cana; and then, if Vin.III,121 (cp. ca 3); or should it be separated at this passage into ca naṁ? (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Canda: {'def': '[Vedic candra from *(s)quend to be light or glowing, cp. candana sandal (incense) wood, Gr. kάhdaros cinder; Lat. candeo, candidus, incendo; Cymr. cann white; E. candid, candle, incense, cinder] the moon (i. e. the shiner) S.I,196; II,206; M.II,104; A.I,227, II.139 sq.; III,34; Dh.413; Sn.465, 569, 1016; J.III,52; VI,232; Pv.I,12⁷; II,6⁶; Vv 64⁷ (maṇi° a shiny jewel. or a moonlike jewel, see VvA.278, v. l. °sanda). --puṇṇa° the full moon J.I,149, 267; V,215; °mukha with a face like a full moon (of the Buddha) DhA.III,171. Canda is extremely frequent in similes & comparisens: see list in J.P.T.S. 1907, 85 sq. In enumerations of heavenly bodies or divine beings Canda always precedes Suriya (the Sun), e. g. D.II,259; A.I,215; II,139; Nd² 308 (under Devatā). Cp. candimant. On quâsi mythol. etym. see Vism.418.

--kanta a gem Miln.118; --(g)gāha a moon-eclipse (lit. seizure, i. e. by Rāhu) D.I,10 (cp. DA.I,95); --maṇḍala the moon’s disc, the shiny disc, i. e. the moon A.I,283; J.I,253; III,55; IV,378; V,123; Dhs.617; Vism.216 (in compar,); PvA.65; --suriyā (pl.) sun & moon J.IV,61. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵candra),【阳】月亮。candaggāha,【阳】月蚀。candamaṇḍala,【中】圆月。candra-vaṃwa,【阳】月统。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】月亮。 ~ggāha, 【阳】月蚀。 ~maṇḍala, 【中】圆月。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Candaka: {'def': '=canda VvA.278 (maṇi°); Sdhp.92 (mayūra° the eye in a peacock’s tail). (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Candana: {'def': '【阳】檀香(sandal-wood tree﹐产生檀香木的乔木 (Santalum album))。【中】檀香木。candasāra,【阳】檀香木的本质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】檀香（产生檀香木的乔木 (Santalum album)）。【中】檀香木。 ~sāra, 【阳】檀香木的本质。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [Deriv. unknown. Possibly nonAryan; but see under canda, Sk. candana] sandal (tree, wood or unguent, also perfume) Vin.I,203; A.I,9, 145, 226; III,237; Dh.54; J.V,420 (tree, m.); Miln.382; DhA.I,422; IV,189 (°pūjā); VvA.158 (agalu° with aloe & sandal); PvA.76. -- Kāsika° sandal from Kāsī A.III,391; IV,281; Miln.243, 348; ratta° red s. J.IV,442; lohita° id. A.V,22; J.I,37; hari° yellow s. J.I,146.

--ussada covered with sandal perfumes Th.1, 267; Pv III,9¹ (=candanasārānulitto PvA.211); --gaṇṭhi (or better gaṇḍi; see the latter) a block of sandal wood Vin.II,110; --gandhin having a scent of sandal J.III,190; --vilepana sandal unguent J.IV,3. --sāra choice sandal (wood or perfume) Vv 52³, J.I,53, 340. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Candanikā: {'def': '【阴】污水坑。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) a pool at the entrance of a village (usually, but not necessarily dirty: see Vin.II,122 & cp. candanapaṅka Av.Ś I.221, see also PW sub candana²) S.V,361; M.I,11, 73, 448; A.I,161; Th.1, 567; J.V,15; Miln.220; Vism.264, 343, 359; Sdhp.132. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】池塘(a pool at the entrance of a village (usually, but not necessarily dirty))。candanikāya, 池塘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Candatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. canda] in cpd. paripuṇṇa° state or condition of the full moon SnA 502. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Candavāro: {'def': '﹐【阳】星期一(日语：月曜日getsuyōbi)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Candikā: {'def': '【阴】月光。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. capala),【阴】月光。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Candimā: {'def': '(m. or f.?) [Sk. candramas m. & candrimā f., cp. pūrṇimā; a cpd. of canda+mā, cp. māsa. The Pāli form, however, is based on a supposed derivation fr. canda+mant, like bhagavā, and is most likely m. On this formation cp. Lat. lumen=Sk. rukmān luminous, shiny] the moon. By itself only in similes at Dh.208, 387 (at end of pada) & in “abbhā mutto va candimā” M.II,104=Dh.172=Th.1, 871; Dh.382=Th.1, 873; Ps.I,175. -- Otherwise only in combⁿ with suriya, moon & sun, D.I,240; II,12; III,85 sq., 90, 112; S.II,266; V,264 sq.; A.I,227; II,53, 130; V,59; Vv 30; J.II,213; Miln.191; Vism.153. Also in cpd. candimāpabhā the light of the moon (thus BB, whereas SS read at all passages candiyā° or candiya-pabhā) S.III,156=V.44= It.20. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】月亮。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. candramas m. & candrimā f., cp. pūrṇimā; a cpd. of canda+mā, cp. māsa. The Pāli form, however, is based on a supposed derivation fr. canda+mant),【阳】月亮。candimāpabhā,月光。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Capala: {'def': '【形】变化多端，摆动，不稳定(moving to & fro, wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle)。capalatā,【阴】变化多端。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】变幻无常的，摆动，不稳定。 ~tā, 【阴】变幻无常。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. capala cp. cāpa bow; from *qep to shake or quiver, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under caperro] moving to & fro, wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle S.I,204; V,269; M.I,470 (and a° steady); A.III,199, 355, 391; Dh.33; Pug.35; J.I,295; II,360. At J.VI,548 it means one who lets the saliva flow out of his mouth (expl^d by paggharita-lāla “trickle-spit”). (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Capalatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. last] fickleness, unsteadiness Miln.93. 251; Pgdp 47, 64. At Nd² 585 as capalanā+cāpalyaṁ with gedhikatā, meaning greed, desire (cp. capala at J.VI,548). (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cappeti: {'def': '[Sk. carvayati Dhtp 295 gives root cabb in meaning “adana”] to chew Bdhgh on Vin.II,115. Cp. jappati. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Capu: {'def': '(or capucapu),【副】喳哺喳哺(拟声词，当吃时，发出如此声音)。capucapukārakaṁ, 喳哺喳哺作声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(or capucapu) a sound made when smacking one’s lips Vin.II,214 (capucapukāraka adj.), 221; IV,197. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Capu-capu-kārakaŋ: {'def': '【副】喳哺喳哺（象声词，当吃时，发出如此声音）。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cara: {'def': '1. 走路的人，经常出入的人，2. 间谍。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(n-adj.) [from car, carati] 1. the act of going about, walking; one who walks or lives (usually --°): oka° living in water M.I,117; J.VI,416; antara° S.IV,173; eka° solitary Sn.166; saddhiṁ° a companion Sn.45; anattha° J.V,433; jala° Dāvs.IV,38. See also cāreti & gocara. -- Instr. carasā (adv.) walking M.I,449. -- cara-vāda “going about talk,” gossip, idle talk S.III,12; V,419. -- sucara easy, duccara difficult Vin.III,26. -- 2. one who is sent on a message, a secret emissary, a spy S.I,79. Also as carapurisa J.II,404; IV,343; VI,469; DhA.I,193. ‹-› Note.--cara-purāya at A.V,133 should be changed into v. l. SS paramparāya. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.走路的人，经常出入的人。2.间谍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Carahi: {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. tarhi; with change t to c due to analogy with °ci (°cid) in combⁿ with interr.] then, therefore, now, esp. after interr. pron.: ko carahi jānāti who then knows? Sn.990; kathañ carahi jānemu how then shall we know? Sn.999; kiñ c. A.V,194. -- Vin.I,36; II,292; Sn.988; J.III,312; Miln.25; DA.I,289. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caraka: {'def': '参考 Cara。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1.=cara² (a messenger) J.VI,369 (attha°); adj. walking through: sabbalokaṁ° J.V,395. -- 2. any animal S.I,106; PvA.153 (vana°). (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Cara。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Carati: {'def': '[Vedic carati, *qǔel to move, turn, turn round (cp. kaṇṭha & kula)=Lat. colo (incolo), Gr. pέlomai, poλos (also ai)poλos goat-herd & boukoλos cowherd=gocara); also P. cakka, q. v. A doublet of car is cal, see calati Dhtp 243 expl^d car by “gati-bhakkhanesu”] to move about, to “live and move,” to behave, to be. -- Imper. act. cara (J.I,152), carā (metri causa, J.III,393); ‹-› imper. med. carassu (Sn.696), pl. carāmase (=exhortative, Sn.32); -- ppr. caranto (J.I,152; PvA.14) & caraṁ (Sn.151; Dh.61, 305; It.117); med. caramāna (Vin.I,83; Pv.I,10¹⁰; PvA.160); -- pot. careyya (Sn.45, 386, 1065; Dh.142, 328) & care (Sn.35; Dh.49, 168, 329; It.120); -- fut. carissati (M.I,428); -- aor. sg. 1^st acariṁ (S.III,29), acārisaṁ (Pv III,9⁵), 3^rd acari (Sn.344), acāri (Sn.354; Dh.326); cari (J.II,133). -- pl. 3^rd acariṁsu (Sn.809), acārisuṁ (Sn.284); cariṁsu (Sn.289), acaruṁ (Sn.289), acāruṁ (J.VI,114); -- inf. carituṁ (caritu-kāma J.II,103); -- ger. caritvā (J.I,50) & caritvāna (Sn.816); -- pp. ciṇṇa (q. v.) -- Caus. cāreti (=denom. of cara), pp. carita. 2^nd caus. carāpeti (q. v.). -- See also cara, caraṇa, cariyā, cāraka, cārikā, cārin.

Meaning: 1. Lit. (a) to move about, to walk, travel, etc.; almost synon. with gacchati in contrast to tiṭṭhati to stand still; cp. phrase carañ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṁ nisinno udāhu sayaṁ It.117 (walking, standing, sitting, reclining; the four iriyāpathā); care tiṭṭhe acche saye It.120; tiṭṭhaṁ caraṁ nisinno vā sayāno vā Sn.151. ‹-› Defined as “catūhi iriyāpathehi vicarati” (i. e. more generally applied as “behaviour,” irrespective of position) DhA.II,36. Expl. constantly by series viharati iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti Nd² 237. -- carāmi loke I move about (=I live) in the world Sn.25, 455; agiho c. I lead a homeless life Sn.456, 464; eko c. he keeps to himself Sn.35, 956; Dh.305, 329; sato c. he is mindful Sn.1054, 1085; gocaraṁ gaṇhanto c. to walk about grazing (see below) J.III,275; gavesanto c. to look for J.I,61. -- (b) With definition of a purpose: piṇḍāya c. to go for alms (gāmaṁ to the village) Sn.386; bhikkhāya c. id. J.III,82. -- With Acc. (in etymol. constr.) to undertake, set out for, undergo, or simply to perform, to do. Either with c. cārikaṁ to wander about, to travel: Vin.I,83; S.I,305 (applied: “walk ye a walk”); Sn.92; Dh.326; PvA.14 (janapada-cārikaṁ), 160 (pabbata-c° wandering over the mountains); or with cāraṁ: piṇḍa-c.° carati to perform the begging-round Sn.414; or with caritaṁ: duccaritaṁ c. to lead a bad life Sn.665 (see carita). Also with Acc. of similar meaning, as esanaṁ c. to beg Th.1, 123; vadhaṁ c. to kill Th.1, 138; dukkhaṁ c. to undergo pain S.I,210. ‹-› (c) In pregnant sense: to go out for food, to graze (as gocaraṁ c. to pasture, see gocara). Appl. to cows: caranti gāvo Sn.20; J.III,479; or to the bhikkhu: Pv.I,10¹⁰ (bh. caramāno=bhikkhāya c. PvA.51); Sn.386 (vikāle na c. buddhā: the Buddhas do not graze at the wrong time). -- 2. Appl^d meaning: (a) abs. to behave, conduct oneself Sn.1080; J.VI,114; Miln.25 (kāmesu micchā c. to commit immorality). -- (b) with obj. to practise, exercise, lead a life: brahmacariyaṁ c. to lead a life of purity Vin.I,17; Sn.289, 566, 1128; dhammañ c. to walk in righteousness J.I,152; sucaritaṁ c. to act rightly, duccaritaṁ c. to act perversely S.I,94; Dh.231. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(car+a), 走路，漫游，举止，练习，运行。【过】cari。【过分】carita。【现分】caranta, caramāna。【独】caritvā。【过分】ciṇṇa。atha kiñcarahi, 若然，如果是这样的话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(car + a), 走路，漫游，举止，练习，运行。【过】 cari。【过分】 carita。【现分】 caranta, caramāna。【独】 caritvā。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Caraṇa: {'def': '【中】步行，脚，行为，举止。abhiaraṇa,【中】访问(visiting)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】步行，脚，行为。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [of a deer, called pañca-hattha “having 5 hands,” i. e. the mouth and the 4 feet] 1. walking about, grazing, feeding VvA.308 (°ṭṭhāna). -- 2. the foot Vin.IV,212; J.V,431. -- 3. acting, behaviour, good conduct, freq. in combⁿ with vijjā, e. g. A.II,163; V,327; Dh.144; Vism.202 (in detail); PvA.1, etc. ‹-› D.III,97, 156; Sn.410, 462, 536; Miln.24. sampannacaraṇa (adj.) accomplished in right behaviour S.I,153, 166; Sn.1126; Pv.II,13⁸. -- Cp. sañ°. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caraṇavant: {'def': '(adj.) one of good conduct (=sampannacaraṇa) Sn.533, 536. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Carima: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic carama, Gr. tέlos end, paλai a long time (ago)] subsequent, last (opp. pubba) Th.1, 202; It.18; J.V,120. -- acarima not later (apubba ac° simultaneously) D.I,185; M.III,65; Pug. 13.

--bhava the last rebirth (in Saṁsāra, with ref. to Arahantship) ThA.260, cp. caramabhavika in Divy (freq.) & next. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'carimaka, 【形】最后的，后来的。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'carimaka,【形】最后的，后来的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Carimaka: {'def': '(adj.) last (=carima) M.I,426; Nd² 569^b (°viññāṇassa nirodha, the destruction of the last conscious state, of the death of an Arahant); Vism.291. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Carita: {'def': '(Carati的【过分】), 性行(temperament)。《清净道论》(Vism.101.-110)说六种性行(six kinds of temperament)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】1.个性，行为。2.生活。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 个性，行为。 2. 生活。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of cāreti, see cara & carati] 1. (adj.) going, moving, being like, behaving (-°) J.VI,313; Miln.92 (rāgac°=ratta); Vism.105, 114 (rāga°, dosa°, moha°, etc.). -- 2. (nt.) action, behaviour, living Dh.330 (ekassa c. living alone); Ps.I,124; Miln.178. See also carati 1^b, 2^b. Esp. freq. with su° and duc°: good, right, proper or (nt.) good action, right conduct & the opposite; e. g. sucarita Dh.168, 231; PvA.12, 71, 120; duccarita A.I,146; II,85, 141; III,267, 352; D.III,111. 214; Dh.169, Sn.665; Pv.I,9⁴ (°ṁ caritvā), etc. See also kāya° vacī° mano° under kāya. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caritaka: {'def': '(nt.) conduct (=carita²) Th.1, 36. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caritar: {'def': '[n. agent to cāreti, cp. carita] walking, performing (c. Acc.) M.I,77. (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caritu: {'def': '【阳】表演者，观察者。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cariya: {'def': '(nt.) & cariyā (f.) [from car, carati] (mostly --°) conduct, behaviour, state of, life of. Three cariyās at Ps.I,79; six at Vism.101; eight at Ps.II,19 sq., 225 & four sets of eight in detail at Nd² 237^b. Very freq. in dhamma° & brahma°, a good walk of life, proper conduct, chastity -- eka° living alone Sn.820; unchā° begging J.II,272; III,37; bhikkhā° a life of begging Sn.700; nagga° nakedness Dh.141. -- See also carati 2^b. In cpds. cariyā°.

--piṭaka the last book in the Khuddaka-nikāya; --manussa a spy, an outpost J.III,361 (v. l. cārika°). (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】操行，行为。cariyā,【阴】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cariyā: {'def': '【阴】操行，行为。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cariyā-piṭaka: {'def': '所行蔵 [小部経の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '所行藏 [小部經之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Carāpeti: {'def': '(Carati的【使】), 使移动，使练习，流通。【过】carāpetesi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. 11. of carati] to cause to move, to make go J.I,267 (bheriṁ c. to have the drum beaten); PvA.75 (do.); DhA.I,398 (to circulate). As cārāpeti J.V,510 (bheriṁ). (Page 263)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cassa: {'def': '(ca+assa)﹐和…可能是，和…给这个的，和…给他。(assa,【三.单.潜】可能是。)(assa﹐ima 的【与.属.单】)给这个，给这个的。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Catta: {'def': '[pp. of cajati] given up. sacrificed A.II,41; III,50; Th.1, 209 (°vaṇṇa who has lost fame); J.II,336; IV,195; V,41 (°jīvita). (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cajati 的【过分】), 已放弃，已牺牲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cajati 的【过分】), 已放弃，已牺牲。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cattatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. catta] the fact of giving up, abandonment, resignation Vbh.254 sq.; DhsA.381. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cattutthī: {'def': '【阴】一个半月的第四天，(巴利语法)第四格，即：与事格。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】一个半月的第四天，（巴利语法）第四格，即：与事格。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cattāri: {'def': 'sammappadhānā(catvāri-sammapprahāṇāni),【中】四正断、四正胜、四正勤(four right exertions -- the effort (a)to prevent evil from arising in the mind, (b)to abandon whatever evil has already arisen, (c)to give rise to the good, and (d)to maintain the good that has arisen))。S.49.1-12./V,244.︰“Cattārome, bhikkhave, sammappadhānā. Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya 1chandaṁ, 2janeti vāyamati, 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati, 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya 1chandaṁ, janeti 2vāyamati, 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati, 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ 1chandaṁ, janeti 2vāyamati, 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati, 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā 1chandaṁ, janeti 2vāyamati, 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati, 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro sammappadhānāti”.(诸比丘！有此四正勤。什么是四？诸比丘！於此，比丘使未生之恶不善法令不生，1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4鞭策心。已生之恶不善法令断，1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4鞭策心。为对未生之善法令生，1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4鞭策心。为对已生之善法令住、不忘失、倍修习、广修习、令圆满，1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4鞭策心。诸比丘！此为四正勤。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'iddhipādā(梵catvāra-rddhi-pāda),【中】四如意足，四神足(four bases of success -- desire, persistence, intentness, circumspection)。chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgata iddhipāda(chanda-samādhi-prahāṇa-saṃskāra-samanvāgata-rddhipāda)﹐欲三摩地断行成就神足)；citta-s.(citta-s.)﹐心三摩地断行成就神足；vīriya-s.(vīrya-s.)﹐勤三摩地断行成就神足；vīmaṁsā-s.(mīmāṃsā-s.)﹐观三摩地断行成就神足。四神足的体性是定，定是神通所依止的，所以称为神足。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cattāro: {'def': 'satipaṭṭhānā(n.p.),四念处，四念住(Foundation of mindfulness; frame of reference(--body(身), feelings(受), mind(心), and mental events(法), viewed in and of themselves as they occur)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cattārīsa: {'def': '(& cattālīsa) [Sk. catvāriṁśat] forty S.II,85; Sn.p. 87; It.99≈. Usually cattāḷīsa J.I,58; V,433; DhA.I,41; II,9. 93.

--danta having 40 teeth (one of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa) D II 18; III,144, 172. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cattārīsaka: {'def': '(adj.) having forty M.III,77. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cattāḷīsati: {'def': '【阴】四十。cattālīsakoṭidhanaṁ, 四十亿财产。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Catu: {'def': 'Catur,【形】四。catukkaṇṇa,【形】四方形(或长方形的)，有四个角落的。catukkhattuṁ,【副】四次。catugguṇa,【形】四倍的，四重的，【乐】每小节四拍的。catucattāḷīsati,【阴】四十四。catujjātigandha,【阳】四种香味〔即：橘黄色的香料、茉莉香料、老鹳草香精油 (?)(来自命名 Turukkha 的土耳其植物的香料)、一种希腊花香料〕。catuttiṁsati,【阴】三十四。catuddasa,【形】十四。catuddisā,【阴】四方(东南西北)。【形】catudvāra,【形】有四个门的。catunavuti,【阴】九十四。catupaccaya,【阳】四件必需品，即：食物，衣服，药和寄宿处。catupaṇṇāsā, catupaññāsā,【阴】五十四。catuparisā,【阴】四重集会，即：比丘，比丘尼，优婆塞，优婆夷。catuparisamajjha,【阳】群众当中。catubhūmika,【形】有四层的，有四阶段的。catumadhura,【中】四甜，即：酥油，蜂蜜，糖和麻油。caturaṅgika,【形】四区的，四组的。caturaṅginī,【阴】四军，即：象，战车，骑兵和步兵的军队。caturaṅgula,【形】四寸的。caturassa,【形】四边形的。caturaṁsa,【形】有四边缘的。caturāsīti,【阴】八十四。catuvīsati,【阴】二十四。catuvīsatakkhara﹐二十四音节。catusaṭṭhi,【阴】六十四。catusattati,【阴】七十四。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】四。 ~kkaṇṇa, 【形】四方形（或长方形的），有四个角落的。~kkhattuŋ, 【副】四次。 ~gguṇa, 【形】四倍的，四重的，〖乐〗每小节四拍的。 ~cattāḷīsati, 【阴】四十四。 ~jjātigandha, 【阳】四种香味〔即：橘黄色的香料、茉莉香料、老鹳草香精油 (?)（来自命名 Turukkha 的土耳其植物的香料）、一种希腊花香料〕。 ~ttiŋsati, 【阴】三十四。 ~ddasa,【形】十四。 ~ddisā, 【阴】四方（东南西北）。【形】 ~dvāra, 【形】有四个门的。 ~navuti, 【阴】九十四。 ~paccaya, 【阳】四件必需品，即：食物，衣服，药和寄宿处。 ~paṇṇāsā, ~paññāsā,【阴】五十四。 ~parisā,【阴】四重集会，即：比丘，比丘尼，优婆塞，优婆夷。 ~bhūmika, 【形】有四层的，有四阶段的。 ~madhura, 【中】四甜，即：酥油，蜂蜜，糖和麻油。 ~raṅgika, 【形】四区的，四组的。 ~raṅginī, 【阴】四军，即：象，战车，骑兵和步兵的军队。 ~raṅgula, 【形】四寸的。 ~rassa, 【形】四边形的。 ~raŋsa, 【形】有四边缘的。 ~rāsīti, 【阴】八十四。 ~vīsati,【阴】二十四。 ~saṭṭhi, 【阴】六十四。 ~sattati, 【阴】七十四。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Catubbidha: {'def': '【形】四重的。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(catu+vidha种类),【形】四种的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Catudhā: {'def': '【副】以四方式。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】以四方式。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Catukka: {'def': '【中】四个一组，交叉道路。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. catu=*catuka › *catukyaṁ] 1. a tetrad, a set of four, consisting of four parts: °pañcakajjhānā (pl.) the fourfold & the fivefold system of meditation DhsA.168; see cpds. -- 2. a place where four roads meet J.VI,389; Miln.330 (see also below); esp. in phrase catukke catukke kasāhi tāḷeti (or is it “in sets of four”? See Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 79) J.I,326; II,123; DhA.IV,52. -- 3. a square (in a village) Miln.1, 365; J.II,194; V,459; DhA 317.

--bhatta a meal for four bhikkhus Vin.II,77; III,160; --magga the 4 fold path Nett 113; --yañña (usually sabba catukka°) a sacrifice consisting of (all) the four parts J.III,44, 45; PvA.280; cp. J.I,335. (Or is it the “cross-road sacrifice”?) (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】四个一组，交叉道路。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [origin. “consisting only of one quarter”?] empty, shallow, little Nd² 415 (°pañña, with omakapañña, lāmaka-p°); J.IV,441 (nadī=tuccha Com.). (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Catuppada: {'def': '【阳】四脚动物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】四脚动物。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Catur: {'def': 'catu° in composition [Vedic catvārah (m.) catvāri (nt.) fr. *qǔetuor, *qǔetur=Gr. tέttares (hom. piζurQs), Lat. quattuor, Goth. fidwōr, Ohg. fior, Ags fēower, E. four; catasras (f.) fr. *qǔ(e)tru, cp. tisras. Also as adv. catur fr. *quetrus=Lat. quater & quadru°] base of numeral four; 1. As num. adj. Nom. & Acc. m. cattāro (Dh.109; J.III,51) and caturo (Sn.84, 188), f. catasso (Sn.1122), nt. cattāri (Sn. 227); Gen. m. catunnaṁ (Sn.p. 102), [f. catassannaṁ]; Instr. catubbhi (Sn.229), catūhi (Sn.231) & catuhi; Loc. catūsu (J.I,262) & catusu. -- 2. As num. adv., catu° catur° in cpds. catuddasa (14), also through elision & reduction cuddasa PvA.55, 283, etc., cp. also cātuddasī. Catuvīsati (24) Sn.457; catusaṭṭhi (64) J.I,50; II,193; PvA.74; caturāsīti (84) usually with vassa-sahassāni J.I,137; II,311; Pv IV.7⁷; DhA.II,58; PvA.9, 31, 254, etc. See also cattārīsa (40).

--(r)aṁsa (=caturassa, having four edges, four-edged Dhs.617; PvA.189 (read °sobhitāya); --(r)aṅga (consisting of) four limbs or divisions, fourfold M.I,77; J.I,390; II,190, 192; VI,169 (uposatha, cp. aṭṭhaṅga); Dpvs.I,6; Sdhp.64; --(r)aṅgika=prec. Dhs.147, 157, 397; KhA 85; Sdhp.58; --(r)aṅgin (adj.) comprising four parts, f. °inī, of an army consisting of elephants, chariots, cavalry & infantry D.II,190; J.II,102, 104; Vism.146; SnA 225, 353; DhA.IV,144; cp. J.VI,275; --(r)aṅgula (adj.) measuring 4 fingers, 4 fingers broad or wide, Vin.I,46; S.II,178; J.VI,534; Th.1, 1137; Vism.124. --(r)aṅgulika=prec. Th.2, 498 (-ThA, 290); --(r)anta see cāturQ; --(r)assa [catur+assa²] four-cornered, quadrangular, regular Vin.II,310 (Bdhgh); J.IV,46 (āvāṭa) 492 (sālā); V,49; Pv.II,1¹⁹. Cp. caturaṁsa & next; --(r)assara (see last) with 4 sharp sides (of a hammer; °muggara) DhA.I,126; --(r)âdhiṭṭhāna (adj.) one who has taken the four resolutions (see adhiṭṭhāna) M.III,239; --(r)âpassena (adj.) endowed with the four apassena: lit.: reclining on four A.V,29, 30; D.III,269, 270; --ussada (catussada) full of four, endowed with 4 things, rich in four attributes J.IV,309 (expld. p. 311 as having plenty of people, grain, wood & water); IV,422=461 “with four pillows” (p. 422 has caturassada for caturussada, which latter is also to be preferred to catussada, unless this is a haplology). In the same connection occurs satt-ussada (full of people) D.I,111 e. g. & Pv IV.1⁸ (see satta). The formation “cattussada” has probably been influenced by “sattussada”; --(k)kaṇṇa (& °ka) (a) with 4 corners Vin.II,137; J.III,255. -- (b) “between four ears,” i. e. secret, of manta (counsel) J.VI,391; --(k)kama walking with four (feet), quadruped Vv 64⁸; Pv.I,11³; --kuṇḍika on all fours M.I,79; A.III,188; D.III,6; Pv III,2⁷ (cp. PvA.181); --koṇa four cornered, crossed, in °raccha cross road PvA.24; --(k)khandha the four khandhas, viz. feeling, perception, synthesis & intellect (see khandha) DhsA.345; --(g)guṇa fourfold, quadruple D.II,135; S.I,27; J.I,213; VvA.186; Sdhp.Q40; --cakka with four wheels S.I,16=63 (said of the human body, see under cakka); --jāta of four sorts, viz. gandha (perfume) having four ingredients ThA.72 (see next) --jāti of four kinds J.I,265, V.79; (gandha). These 4 ingredients of perfume are saffron, jasmine, Turkish (tarukkha) & Greek incense (yavana); --jātiya (& °jātika) in °gandha prec. J.III,291; IV,377; PvA.127; Miln.354; J.I,178 (°ka); --(d)disā (pl.) the 4 quarters of the globe S.I,167=Sn.p. 79; D.I,251; may also be taken for Abl. sg. as adv.: in the 4 quarters Vin.I,16, cp. Acc. catuddisaṁ D.II,12; --(d)dīpika covering the 4 continents, of megha (a cloud) DhA.II,95; --dvāra with 4 gates, of a house D.I,102 (=DA.I,270); of Avīciniraya It.86; J.IV,3; Pv.I,10¹³; cp. Catudvāra Jātaka (No. 439; J.IV,1 sq.); --nahuta ninety-four J.I,25; VI,486; --paccaya the four requisites (see paccaya) J.III,273, °santosa contentment with °DhA.IV,111; --paṇṇasa fiftyfour DhA.I,4; --(p)patha a fourways J.IV,460; --(p)pada [Sk. caturpād, Gr. tetrάpous, Lat. quadrupes] a quadruped Vin.II,110; S.I,6; A.V,21; Sn.603, 964; It.87; J.I,152; III,82; --parivaṭṭa (cp. aṭṭha °adhideva-ñāṇadassana A.IV,304) fourfold circle S.III,59 sq. (pañcupādānakkhandhe). --parisā (f.) the fourfold assembly, scil. of male & female bhikkhus & upāsakas (cp. parisā) PvA.11; --pala fourfold Vism.339. --(p)pādaka (adj.) consisting of 4 padas, i. e. a sloka; f. °ikā (gāthā) a complete stanza or sloka Anvs p. 35; --pārisuddhasīla (nt.) the four precepts of purity J.III,291; DhA.IV,111; --(b)bidha (catur+vidha) fourfold ThA, 74; --(b)bipallāsa (catur+vipallāsa) the fourfold change (cp. Nett 85) Th+1, 1143; SnA 46; --byūha (catur+vyūha) arranged in 4 arrays (of hāra) Nett 3, 105; --bhāga the 4th part, a quarter Dh.108; --bhūmika having 4 stories or stages (of citta or dhamma) DhA.I,21; IV,72; DhsA.344, 345; cp. Vism.493 (of indriya); --madhura (nt.) sweetness (syrup) of 4 (ingredients) DA.I,136; ThA.68; --mahāpatha a crossing on a high-road Vism.235. --mahābhūtika consisting of the four great elements DhsA.403; --(m)mahārājika: see cātum°; --māsa 4 months, a season PvA.96; Dpvs.I,24, 37 (cā°); see under māsa; --sacca the four truths or facts (see ariyasacca) DhA.III,380; Miln.334; (s)sāla (nt.) [catur+sāla] a square formed by 4 houses, in phrasc catuhi gabbhehi paṭimaṇḍitaṁ catussālaṁ kāretvā VvA.220; DhA.III,291; --’ha (catuha & catūha) 4 days; catuhena within 4 days S.II,191; catūhapañcāha 4 or 5 days Vin.IV,280. -- See also cpds. with cātu°. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Catura: {'def': '【形】聪明的，熟练的，精明的。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Deriv. uncertain. Perhaps from tvar to move, that is quickly. Sk. catura] clever, skilled, shrewd J.III,266; VI,25. -- Der. f. abstr. caturatā cleverness Vbh.351 (=cāturiya). (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】聪明的，熟练的，精明的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Caturiya: {'def': 'at Vv 41² is to be read ca turiya, etc. Otherwise see cāturiya. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Catuttha: {'def': '【形】第四的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(num. ord.) [Vedic caturtha, Idg. *queturto=Gr. tέtratos, Lat. quartus, Ohg. fiordo] the fourth Sn.97, 99, 450; J.III,55; VI,367; °ṁ (adv.) for the fourth time DhA.III,174. -- f. catutthī Sn.436; Vism.338.-See also (s.v. Aḍḍha) aḍḍhuḍḍha.

--bhatta food eaten only every fourth day J.V,424. --magga “the fourth Path,” of Arahantship DhA.I,309; --mana (?) (nt.) name of the tongue, in so far as it forms the fourth vatthu (beside eyes, ears, nose) according to the gloss: J.V,155; extremely doubtful. (Page 261)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】第四的。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cavana: {'def': '(nt.) [from cavati] shifting, moving, passing away, only in °dhamma doomed to fall, destined to decease D.I,18, 19; III,31, 33; M.I,326; It.76; J.IV,484; VI,482 (°dhammatā). (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.改变(shifting)。2.背离(falling away)。3.死亡(death)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 改变。 2. 背离。 3. 死亡。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cavanatā: {'def': '(f) state of shifting, removal S.II,3≈(cuti+); M.I,49 (id.). (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cavati: {'def': '(cu+a), 背离(fall away)，改变(to shift)，从一生转到另一生。【过】cavi。【过分】cuta。【现分】cavanta, cavamāna。【独】cavitvā。AA.11.16./V,83~4.︰Uttari appaṭivijjhantoti mettāsamāpattito uttari arahattaṁ adhigantuṁ asakkonto ito cavitvā suttappabuddho viya brahmalokaṁ upapajjatīti.(未贯通上位︰由慈三摩钵地，不能达到上位的阿罗汉状态，从此生(结束如)睡熟，转生梵天界如睡醒。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic cyavate from cyu=Gr. seu/w; cp. Lat. cieo, cio, sollicitus, Gr. ki/w, kinέw, Goth. haitan=Ohg, heizan] to move, get into motion, shift, to fall away, decease, esp. to pass from one state of existence into another D.I,14 (sañsaranti c° upapajjanti, cp. DA.I,105); Kh VIII,4 (=KhA 220: apeti vigacchati acetano pi samāno puññakkhaya-vasena aññaṁ thānaṁ gacchati); It.99= Nd² 235² (satte cavamāne upapajjamāne); It.77 (devo deva-kāyā c. “the god falls from the assembly of gods”), Sn.1073 for bhavetha (=Nd² 238;) PvA.10. Caus. cāveti: inf. cāvetuṁ S.I,128 sq., 134 (°kāma.) -- pp. cuta (q. v.), see also cuti. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cu + a), 背离，改变，从一生转到另一生。【过】 cavi。【过分】 cuta。【现分】 cavanta, cavamāna。【独】 cavitvā。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Caviya: {'def': '从一生转到另一生(=cavitvā。DA.30./III,929.︰Caviyāti cavitvā)。caviya puna-r-idhāgato= cavitvā puna idhāgato =cavitvā punarāgato idha((命终)转生来此世)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Caya: {'def': '【阳】成堆，堆积，块(mass)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】成堆，堆积，质量。(p125)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[from cināti] piling, heaping; collection, mass Vin.II,117; DhsA.44; in building: a layer Vin.II,122, 152. As --° one who heaps up, a collector, hoarder M.I,452 (nikkha°, khetta°, etc.). See also ā°, apa°, upa°. (Page 262)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cañcala: {'def': '【形】不稳定，移动。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Intens. of cal=car, to move, with n instead of r in reduplication, cp. Sk. cañcūryate=carcarīti, cañcala (=*carcara)),【形】不稳定，移动(moving to & fro, trembling, unsteady)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Intens. of cal=car, to move, with n instead of r in reduplication, cp. Sk. cañcūryate=carcarīti, cañcala (=*carcara), Gr. gargalizw & gaggalizw to tickle; see also note on gala & cp. caṅkamati] moving to & fro, trembling, unsteady J.IV,498 (=calācala); Sdhp.317, 598. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṅgavāra: {'def': '【阳】牛奶过滤器(milkstrainer)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】牛奶过滤器。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Tamil caṅguvaḍa a dhoney, Anglo-Ind. ḍoni, a canoe hollowed from a log, see also doṇi] a hollow vessel, a bowl, cask M.I,142; J.V,186 (in similes). As °ka Miln.365 (trsl. Miln.II,278 by “straining cloth”). ‹-› Cp. cañcu “a box” Divy 131. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṅgoṭaka: {'def': '(cp. caṅgavāra),【阳】首饰盒，匣子(a casket, a box)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】首饰盒，匣子。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. caṅgavāra] a casket, a box J.I,65; IV,257; V,110, 303; VI,369, 534; DhA.II,116; III,101; VvA.33, 158; Mhvs.IV,106; Anvs p. 35 Vism.173. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṅkama: {'def': '[Sk. caṅkrama & caṅkramā, fr. caṅkamati] (a) walking up & down S.IV,104. -- (b) the place where one is walking, esp. a terraced walk, cloister Vin.I,15, 182; II,220; D.I,105; S.I,212; A.I,114; 183; III,29; IV,87; J.I,17; II,273; V,132 (cp. kattaradaṇḍa-passages). (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】caṅkamana,【中】经行(行禅，即：直来直去来回地行走在特定的距离上)。abbhokāse caṅkamāmi,我於露地经行。《南寄归内法传》卷第三〈二十三经行〉：「少病五天之地。道俗多作经行。直去直来唯遵一路。随时适性勿居闹处。一则痊痾。二能销食。禺中日昳即行时也。或可出寺长引。或於廊下徐行。若不为之身多病苦。遂令脚肿肚肿臂疼髆疼。但有痰[病-丙+阴]不销。并是端居所致。必若能行此事。实可资身长道。故鹫山觉树之下。鹿苑王城之内。及余圣迹皆有世尊经行之基耳。阔可二肘长十四五肘高二肘余。垒[专*瓦]作之。上乃石灰塑作莲花开势。高可二肘阔才一尺。有十四五表圣足迹。两头基上安小制底。量与人齐。或可内设尊容为释迦立像。若其右绕佛殿旋游制底。别为生福本欲虔恭。经行乃是销散之仪。意在养身疗病。旧云行道。或曰经行。则二事总包无分泾渭。遂使调适之事久阙东川。经云观树经行。亲在金刚座侧。但见真迹未睹圆基耳。」(T54.221.2 ~3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 caṅkamana, 【中】经行（行禅，即：来回地行走在特定的距离上）。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Caṅkamana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. caṅkamati] 1. walking up & down S.II,282; DhA.I,10. -- 2. a cloister walk (=caṅkama) VvA.188. Usually °-: Vin.I,139 (°sālā); J.III,85; IV,329; PvA.79 (°koṭi the far end of the cloister). (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṅkamati: {'def': '[Intens. of kamati, to kram=Sk. caṅkramīti; cp. kamati] to walk about, to walk up & down Vin.I,15, 182; II,193, 220; IV,18; S.I,107, 212; PvA.105. -- Caus. caṅkamāpeti J.III,9. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kam+ṁ-a, kam 重叠，前 k 被改变成 c), 经行，行禅。【过】caṅkami。【现分】caṅkamanta。【独】caṅkamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kam + ŋ-a, kam 重叠，前 k 被改变成 c), 经行，行禅。【过】caṅkami。【现分】 caṅkamanta。【独】 caṅkamitvā。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Caṅkamika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. caṅkama] one who has the habit of walking about Miln.216 (ṭhāna° standing & walking). (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṅkora: {'def': '[cp. cakora] the Greek partridge Vv 35⁸ (cp. VvA.163); J.VI,538. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṇaka: {'def': '【阳】鹰嘴豆（1. 亚洲的一种草本植物 (Cicer arietinum)，现广布于西半球，短荚具 1 粒或 2 粒种子，在风味上略象豌豆。2. 鹰嘴豆的种子，尤在欧洲南部和印度是重要的商品食物——亦称栗子豆 (chestnut bean)，鸡豆 (chickpea)，矮豆 (dwarf pea)，格巴恩韶豆 (garbanzo)，格拉瓦恩斯豆(garavance)，在印度亦称克豆 (gram)，或孟加拉克豆 (Bengal gram)）。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.鹰嘴豆(gram)(亚洲的一种草本植物(Cicer arietinum)，现广布於西半球，短荚具 1 粒或 2 粒种子，在风味上略像豌豆。2.鹰嘴豆的种子，尤在欧洲南部和印度是重要的商品食物——亦称栗子豆(chestnut bean)，鸡豆(chickpea)，矮豆(dwarf pea)，格巴恩韶豆 (garbanzo)，格拉瓦恩斯豆(garavance)，在印度亦称克豆(gram)，或孟加拉克豆(Bengal gram))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Caṇḍa: {'def': '【形】凶猛的，暴力的，充满热情的。 ~sota, 【阳】暴流。 ~hatthī,【阳】猛象。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. caṇḍa] fierce, violent; quick-tempered, uncontrolled, passionate Vin.II,194 (hatthī); D. I.90 (=māṇa-nissita-kopa-yutta DA.I,256); S.I,176; II,242; A.II,109=Pug.47 (sakagava°); J.I,450; II,210, 349; Vism.343, 279 (°sota, fierce current), (°hatthi); DhA.IV,9 (goṇa) 104; Sdhp.41, 590, 598. -- f. caṇḍī M.I,126; J.II,443; III,259; Pv.II,3⁴ (=kodhanā PvA.83). ‹-› Compar. caṇḍatara S.II,242. -- In cpds. caṇḍi°, see caṇḍikata & caṇḍitta. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. caṇḍa),【形】凶猛的，暴力的，打情骂俏的(ierce, violent; quick-tempered, uncontrolled, passionate)。caṇḍasota,【阳】暴ㄆㄨˋ流。caṇḍahatthī,【阳】猛象。caṇḍasota, 猛急的水流(fierce current), caṇḍahatthi, 凶猛的象。【阴】caṇḍī。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Caṇḍaka: {'def': '(adj.)=caṇḍa; f. caṇḍikā Pv.II,3⁵, & caṇḍiyā J.III,259 (=kodhaṇā). (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṇḍikata: {'def': '(cp. Caṇḍa) ,【形】生气(angry)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. caṇḍa] angry Vin.IV,310. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṇḍikka: {'def': '【中】凶猛，野蛮，残暴，暴行。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】激怒(ferocity anger)，粗暴、暴躁(churlishness)。acaṇḍikka,【中】不残暴，不暴躁。caṇḍikkalakkhaṇo﹐激怒相。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [*caṇḍikya, of caṇḍika › caṇḍaka] ferocity anger, churlishness Nd² 313, 576, Dhs.418, 1060, 1115, 1231; Vbh.357; DhA.II,227. Cp. caṇḍitta. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṇḍitta: {'def': '(nt.) anger Dhs.418; Pug.18=22. Cp. caṇḍikka. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṇḍāla: {'def': '² (nt.) a kind of amusement or trick D.I,6≈(=ayogulakīḷā play with an iron ball DA.I,84). (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】旃陀罗（印度被剥夺种姓者），贱民。 ~kula, 【中】旃陀罗家族，最低的印度世袭阶级。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】旃陀罗(印度被剥夺种姓者)，贱民。caṇḍālakula,【中】旃陀罗家族，最低的印度世袭阶级。Caṇḍālakumāra﹐旃陀罗子、贱民童子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic caṇḍāla] a man of a certain low tribe, one of the low classes, an outcaste; grouped with others under nīcā kulā (low born clans) as caṇḍālā nesādā veṇā rathakārā pukkusā at A.I,107=II.85=Pug.51. As caṇḍāla-pukkusā with the four recognized grades of society (see jāti & khattiya) at A.I,162. -- Vin.IV,6; M.II,152; S.V,168 sq. (°vaṁsa); A.III,214, 228 (brāhmaṇa°); IV,376; J.IV,303; PvA.175; Miln.200. -- f. caṇḍālī A.III,226; Pv III,1¹³; DhA.II,25. See also pukkusa. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Caṇḍālī: {'def': '【阴】旃陀罗女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】旃陀罗女。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Caṭaka: {'def': '【阳】麻雀(sparrow；Passer montanus)，台语︰厝鸟仔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】麻雀。(p124)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Caṭula: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. catura] clever, skilled Mhbv 148. See catura. (Page 260)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ce: {'def': '如果(conditional particle “if,” )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（条件虚词）如果。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic ced; ce=Lat. que in absque, ne-c, etc., Goth. h in ni-h. see also ca 3] conditional particle “if,” constructed either with Indicative (ito ce pi yojanasate, viharati even if he lived 100 y. from here D.I,117) or Conditional (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā D.I,3), or Potential (passe ce vipulaṁ sukhaṁ Dh.290). -- Always enclitic (like Lat. que) & as a rule placed after the emphasized word at the beginning of the sentence: puññañ ce puriso kayirā Dh.118; brāhmaṇo ce tvaṁ brūsi Sn.457. Usually added to pronouns or pron. adverbs: ahañ ce va kho pana ceteyyaṁ D.I,185; ettha ce te mano atthi S.I,116, or comb^d with other particles, as noce, yañce, sace (q. v.). Freq. also in combⁿ with other indef. interrog. or emphatic particles, as ce va kho pana if then, if now: ahañ ce va kho pana pañhaṁ puccheyyaṁ D.I,117; ahañ ce va kho pana abhivādeyyaṁ D.I,125; api (pi) ce even if: api ce vassasataṁ jīve mānavo Sn.589. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cecca: {'def': '=cicca (equal to sañcicca), ger. of cinteti, corresp. to either *cetya [cet] or *cintya [cint]; only in ster. def. jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā Vin.II,91; III,73, 112; IV,290. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cela: {'def': '【中】布料，衣服。celavitāna,【中】遮阳篷。celaukkhepa,【阳】挥动衣服(一个喝采的徵兆)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. cela] cloth, esp. clothes worn, garment, dress A.I,206; Pv.II,12⁷ (kañcanā° for kañcana°); III,9³ (for veḷa); dhāti° baby’s napkin J.III,539. In simile of one whose clothes are on fire (āditta°+ādittasīsa) S.V,440; A.II,93; III,307; IV,320. -- acela a naked ascetic D.I,161, 165≈; J.V,75; VI,222.

--aṇḍaka (v. l. aṇḍuka) a loincloth M.I,150; --ukkhepa waving of garments (as sign of applause), usually with sādhukāra J.I,54; II,253; III,285; V,67; DhA.II,43; SnA.II,225; VvA.132, 140; --paṭṭikā (not °pattika) a bandage of cloth, a turban Vin.II,128 (Bdhgh. celasandhara); M.II,93; DhA.III,136; --vitāna an awning J.I,178; II,289; IV,378; Mhbv 122; Vism.108. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】布料，衣服。 ~vitāna, 【中】遮阳篷。 ~ukkhepa, 【阳】挥动衣服（一个喝采的征兆）。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Celaka: {'def': '1. one who is clothed; acelaka without clothes D.I,166; M.I,77. -- 2. a standard-bearer [cp. Sk. ceḍaka P. ceṭa & in meaning E. knight › Ger. knecht; knave › knabe, knappe] D.I,51; DA.I,156; A.IV,107, 110; Miln.331. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Celakedu: {'def': '=cetakedu J.VI,538. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Celāpaka: {'def': '=celāvaka J.V,418. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Celāvaka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. chilla?] a kind of bird J.VI,538 (Com. celabaka; is it celā bakā?); J.V,416. See also celāpaka. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ceta: {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano 组), 心意，意图，意向。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】(mano-group), 心意，意图，意向。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Ceti, Cetiya m. チェーティ(Ceti), 支提 [十六大國之一]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Cetaka: {'def': 'a decoy-bird (Com. dīpaka-tittira, exciting partridge) J.III,357. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cetakedu: {'def': 'a kind of bird J.VI,538. See also cela°. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cetanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [see cetanā] connected with a thought or intention J.VI,304; usually in a° without a thought, unintentional J.II,375; VI,178; Vbh.419. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cetanā: {'def': '[f. abstr. fr. cet, see cinteti] state of ceto in action, thinking as active thought, intention, purpose, will. Defined as action (kamma: A iii.415; cp. KV. VIII,9, § 38 untraced quotation; cp. A.V,292). Often comb^d w. patthanā & paṇidhi (wish & aspiration), e. g. S.II,99, 154; A.I,32, 224; V 212; Nd² 112 (in def. of asucimanussā, people of ignoble action: asuciyā cetanāya, patthanāya, paṇidhinā samannāgatā). Also classed with these in a larger group in KV., e. g. 343, 380. -- Comb^d w. vedanā saññā c. citta phassa manasikāra in def. of nāmakāya (opp. rūpakāya) S.II,3 (without citta), Ps.I,183 (do.); Nett 77, 78. -- Enum^d under the four blessings of vatthu, paccaya, c., guṇātireka (-sampadā) & def. as “cetanāya somanassa-sahagatañāṇa-sampayutta-bhāvo” at DhA.III,94. -- C. is opposed to cetasika (i. e. ceto) in its determination of the 7 items of good conduct (see sīla) which refers to actions of the body (or are wilful, called cetanākamma Nett 43, 96; otherwise distinguished as kāya- & vacīkammantā A.V,292 sq.), whereas the 3 last items (sīla 8--10) refer to the behaviour of the mind (cetasikakamma Nett., mano-kammanta A), viz. the shrinking back from covetousness, malice, & wrong views. ‹-› Vin.III,112; S.III,60; A.II,232 (kaṇhassa kammassa pahānāya cetanā: intention to give up wrong-doing); VvA.72 (vadhaka-cetanā wilful murder); maraṇacetanā intention of death DhA.I,20; āhār’āsā cetanā intention consisting in deśire for food Vism.537. ‹-› PvA.8, 30 (pariccāga° intention to give); Pug.12; Miln.94; Sdhp.52, 72. -- In scholastic lgg. often expl^d as cetanā sañcetanā sañcetayitatta (viz. state or behaviour of volition) Dhs.5; Vbh.285. -- Cp. Dhs.58 (+citta); Vbh.401 (id.); Vbh.40, 403; Vism.463 (cetayatī ti cetanā; abhisandahatī ti attho). (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】意图。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹ceteti‹cit思),【阴】思、意图(intention)。A.6.63./III,415.：Cetanāhaṁ, bhikkhave, kammaṁ vadāmi. Cetayitvā kammaṁ karoti--kāyena vācāya manasā.(诸比丘！我说‘思’是业，思已而以身、语、意造业。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cetasa: {'def': '² (adj.) [orig. the Gen. of ceto used as nominative] only in --°: sucetasa of a good mind, good-hearted S.I,4=29, 46=52; paraphrased by Buddhaghosa as sundaracetasa; pāpa° of a wicked mind, evil-minded S.I,70=98; a° without mind S.I,198; sabba° allhearted, with all one’s mind or heart, in phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā sabbacetaso samannāharitva ohitasoto (of one paying careful & proper attention) S.I,112 sq.=189, 220; A.II,116; III,163, 402; IV,167. The editors have often misunderstood the phrase & we freq. find vv. ll. with sabbaṁ cetaso & sabbaṁ cetasā, -- appamāṇa° S.IV,186; avyāpanna° S.V,74. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 有目的的。pāpacetasa = 邪恶心意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ N. of a tree, perhaps the yellow Myrobalan J.V,420. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 有目的。 Pāpacetasa = 邪恶心意。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cetasika: {'def': '【形】心理的，智力的，心所。【中】心所的特性。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '心所;心的;心所有', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(belonging to ceto, mental (opp. kāyika physical)),【形】心理的(mental)。【中】心所 (a mental property, 心的因子、心的伴随物)。 Ekuppādanirodhā(eka(同)一 + uppāda生 + nirodha灭) ca, ekālambaṇavatthukā(eka+ ālambaṇa+ vatthuka)，. Cetoyuttā dvipaññāsa dhammā cetasikā matā. (被了知为五十二个心所法与心相应同生、同灭，同所缘、同所依。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) belonging to ceto, mental (opp. kāyika physical). Kāyikaṁ sukhaṁ › cetasikaṁ s. A.I,81; S.V,209; kāyikā darathā › c. d. M.III,287, 288; c. duk khaṁ D II 306; A.I,157; c. roga J.III,337. c. kamma is sīla 8--10 (see under cetanā) Nett 43. -- As n. comb^d with citta it is to be taken as supplementing it, viz. mind & all that belongs to it, mind and mental properties, adjuncts, co-efficients (cp. vitakka-vicāra & sach cpds. as phalâphala, bhavâbhava) D.I,213; see also citta. Occurring in the Nikāyas in sg. only, it came to be used in pl. and, as an ultimate category, the 52 cetasikas, with citta as bare consciousness, practically superseded in mental analysis, the 5 khandha-category. See Cpd. p. 1 and pt. II. Mrs. Rh. D., Bud. Psy. 6, 148, 175. --°cetasikā dhammā Ps.I,84; Vbh.421; Dhs.3, 18, etc. (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 6, 148). (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cetaso: {'def': '心的(Gen. sg. of ceto)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Gen. sg. of ceto, functioning as Gen. to citta (see citta & ceto). (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cetayati: {'def': '(cit + aya), 感知，想。【过】 cetayi。【过分】 cetayita。【独】 cetetvā,cetayitvā。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cit+aya), 感知(to perceive)，想(to think)。【过】cetayi。【过分】cetayita。【独】cetetvā, cetayitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cetayita: {'def': '[pp. of ceteti, see cinteti] intended A.V,187; Miln.62. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ceteti: {'def': 'see cinteti. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Cetayati。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=Cetayati), 感知(to perceive)，想(to think)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ceti: {'def': 'Cetiya, Ceta m. チェ一ティ(Ceti), 支提 [十六大國之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'Cetiya, Ceta m. チェ一ティ, 支提 [十六大国の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Cetiya: {'def': '【中】纪念碑，宝塔。 ~aṅgaṇa, 【中】宝塔周围的空间。 ~gabbha,【阳】宝塔的圆顶。 ~pabbata, 【阳】宝塔山（锡兰〔斯里兰卡〕的一座山的名字，现在的 Mihintale）。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cināti] 1. a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn, M.I,20; Dh.188; J.I,237; VI,173; SnA 194 (dhātu-gharaṁ katvā cetiyaṁ patiṭṭhāpesuṁ); KhA 221; DhA.III,29 (dhātu°); IV, 64; VvA.142; Sdhp.428, 430. Pre-Buddhistic cetiyas mentioned by name are Aggāḷava° Vin.II,172; S.I,185; Sn.p. 59; DhA.III,170; Ānanda° D.II,123, 126; Udena° D.II,102, 118; III,9; DhA.III,246; Gotama (ka)° ibid.; Cāpāla° D.II,102, 118; S.V,250; Ma- kuṭabandhana° D.II,160; Bahuputta° D.II,102, 118; III,10; S.II,220; A.IV,16; Sattambaka° D.II,102, 118; Sārandada D.II,118, 175; A.III,167; Supatiṭṭha° Vin.I,35.

--aṅgaṇa the open space round a Cetiya Miln.366; Vism.144, 188, 392; DA.I,191, 197; VvA.254. --vandanā Cetiya worship Vism.299. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cināti)﹐【中】纪念碑，塔，音译：窣堵波(a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn)。cetiyaṅgaṇa,【中】塔周围的空间。cetiyagabbha,【阳】塔的圆顶。cetiyapabbata,【阳】塔山(锡兰〔斯里兰卡〕的一座山的名字，现在的 Mihintale)。rukkhacetiya﹐树下之祠庙。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Ceti,Ceta m. チェーティ(Ceti), 支提 [十六大國之一]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Ceto: {'def': '〔是 ceta 在【合】中的词形〕。 ~khila, 【中】处于不被使用或不工作状态，浪费心意。 ~paṇidhi, 【阴】决议，热望。 ~pariyañāṇa, 【中】他心智（了解他人的想法）。 ~pasāda, 【阳】意悦，心喜悦。 ~vimutti,【阴】心解脱。 ~samatha, 【阳】心平静。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '心，是 ceta 在【合】中的词形。only the Gen. cetaso & the Instr. cetasā are in use。cetokhila,【中】处於不被使用或不工作状态，浪费心意。cetopaṇidhi,【阴】决议，热望。cetopariyañāṇa,【中】他心智(了解他人的想法)。cetopasāda,【阳】意悦，心喜悦。cetovimutti,【阴】心解脱。cetosamatha,【阳】心平静。cetaso Gen. sg.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. cetas]=citta, q. v. for detail concerning derivation, inflexion & meaning. Cp. also cinteti. ‹-› Only the Gen. cetaso & the Instr. cetasā are in use; besides these there is an adj. cetaso, der. from Nom. base cetas. Another adj.-form is the inflected Nom. ceto, occurring only in viceto S.V,447 (+ummatto, out of mind).

I. Ceto in its relation to similar terms: (a) with kāya & vācā: kāyena vācāya cetasā (with hand, speech & heart) Sn.232; Kh IX. kāya (vācā°, ceto°) --muni a saint in action, speech & thought A.I,273= Nd² 514. In this phrase the Nd has mano° for ceto°, which is also a v. l. at A-passage. -- (b) with paññā (see citta IV. b) in ceto-vimutti, paññā-vimutti (see below IV.). -- (c) with samādhi, pīti, sukha, etc.: see °pharaṇatā below.

II. Cetaso (Gen.) (a) heart. c° upakkilesa (stain of h.) D.III,49, 101; S.V,93. līnatta (attachment) S.V,64. appasāda (unfaith) S.I,179; ekodibhāva (singleness) D.III,78; S.IV,236 (see 2^nd jhāna); āvaraṇāni (hindrances) S 66. -- vimokkha (redemption) S.I,159. santi (tranquillity) Sn.584, 593. vūpasama (id.) A.I,4; S.V,65. vinibandha (freedom) D.III,238= A.III,249; IV,461 sq. -- (b) mind. c° vikkhepa (disturbance) A.III,448; V,149: uttrāsa (fear) Vbh.367. abhiniropanā (application) Dhs.7.-(c) thought. in c° parivitakko udapādi “there arose a reflection in me (Gen.)” S.I,139; II,273; III,96, 103.

III, Cetasā (Instr.) -- (a) heart. mettā-sahagatena c. (with a h. full of love) freq. in phrase ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā, etc. e. g. D.I,186, III,78, 223; S.IV,296; A.I,183; II,129; IV,390; V,299, 344; Vbh.272. ujubhūtena (upright) S.II,279; A.I,63; vivaṭena (open) D.III,223= S.V,263; A.IV,86. macchera-maḷa-pariyuṭṭhitena (in which has arisen the dirt of selfishness) S.IV,240; A.II,58. santim pappuyya c. S.I,212. taṇhādhipateyyena (standing under the sway of thirst) S.III,103. -- vippasannena (devout) S.I,32=57, 100; Dh.79; Pv.I,10¹⁰. muttena A.IV,244. vimariyādi-katena S.III,31. vigatâbhijjhena D.III,49. pathavī-āpo etc.-samena A.IV,375 sq. ākāsasamena A.III,315 sq. sabba° S.II,220. abhijjhā-sahagatena A.I,206. satārakkhena D.III,269; A.V,30. -- migabhūtena cetasā, with the heart of a wild creature M.I,450. -- acetasā without feeling, heartlessly J.IV,52, 57. -- (b) mind: in two phrases, viz. (a) c. anuvitakketi anuvicāreti “to ponder & think over in one’s mind” D.III,242; A.I,264; III,178; ‹-› (b) c. pajānāti (or manasikaroti) “to know in one’s mind,” in the foll. expressions: para-sattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto-paricca pajānāti “he knows in his mind the ways of thought (the state of heart) of other beings” (see ceto-paricca & °pariyāya) M.II,19; S.II,121, 213; V,265; A.I,255=III,17=280. puggalaṁ paduṭṭha-cittaṁ evaṁ c° ceto-paricca p. It.12, cp. 13. Arahanto . . . Bhagavanto c° cetoparicca viditā D.III,100. para-cittapariyāya kusalo evaṁ c° ceto‹-› paricca manasikaroti A.V,160. Bhagavā [brāhmaṇassa] c° ceto-parivitakkaṁ aññāya “perceiving in his mind the thought of [the b.]” S.I,178; D.III,6; A.III,374; Miln.10.

IV. Cpds. --khila fallowness, waste of heart or mind, usually as pañca c-khilā, viz. arising from doubt in the Master, the Norm, the Community, or the Teaching, or from anger against one’s fellow-disciples, D.III,237, 278; M.I,101; A.III,248=IV.460=V.17; J.III,291; Vbh.377; Vism.211. --paṇidhi resolution, intention, aspiration Vv 47¹² (=cittassa samma-d-eva ṭhapanaṁ VvA.203); Miln.129; --padosa corruption of the h., wickedness, A.I,8; It.12, 13 (opp. pasāda): --paricca “as regards the heart,” i. e. state of heart, ways of thought, character, mind (=pariyāya) in °ñāṇa Th.2, 71=227 (expl^d at ThA.76, 197 by cetopariyañāṇa) see phrase cetasā c-p. above (III, b.); --pariyāya the ways of the heart (=paricca), in para-ceto-pariyāya-kusalo “an expert in the ways of others’hearts” A.V,160; c.-p-kovido encompassing the heart of others S.I,146, 194=Th.1, 1248; I,196=Th.1, 1262. Also with syncope: °pariyañāṇa D.I,79; III,100; Vism.431; DA.I,223. --parivitakka reflecting, reasoning S.I,103, 178; --pharaṇatā the breaking forth or the effulgence of heart, as one of five ideals to be pursued, viz. samādhi, pīti-pharaṇatā, sukha°, ceto°, āloka° D.III,278; --vasippatta mastery over one’s h. A.II,6, 36, 185; IV,312; M.I,377; Vism.382; Miln.82, 85; --vimutti emancipation of h. (always w. paññā-vimutti), which follows out of the destruction of the intoxications of the heart (āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavā c.-v.) Vin.I,11 (akuppā); D.I,156, 167, 251; III,78, 108, 248 (muditā); S.II,265 (mettā); M.I,197 (akuppā), 205, 296; III,145 (appamāṇā, mahaggatā); A.I,124; II,6, 36; III,84; Sn.725, 727=It.106; It.20 (mettā), 75, 97; Pug.27, 62; Vbh.86 (mettā) Nett 81 (virāgā); DA.I,313 (=cittavimutti); --vivaraṇa setting the h. free A.IV,352; V,67. See also arahant II D. --samatha calm of h. Th.2, 118; --samādhi concentration of mind (=cittasamādhi DA.I,104) D.I,15; III, 30; S.IV,297; A.II,54; III,51; --samphassa contact with thought Dhs.3. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cetāpana: {'def': 'Cetāpanna, (cp. BSk. cetanika)﹐【中】等值，等值品(barter)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [see cetāpeti; cp. BSk. cetanika] barter Vin.III,216, see also Vin. Texts I.22 & KAcc. 322. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cetāpeti: {'def': '(ci+āpe), 交换，交易，等值(to get in exchange, to barter, buy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ci + āpe), 交换，物物交换。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of *cetati to ci, collect; see also Kern, Toev. s. v.] to get in exchange, to barter, buy Vin.III,216 (expl^d by parivatteti), 237; IV,250. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ceṭa: {'def': 'a servant, a boy J.III,478. See next. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'ceṭaka, 【阳】小男仆。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'ceṭaka,【阳】小男仆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ceṭaka: {'def': 'a servant, a slave, a (bad) fellow Vin.IV,66; ] II.176=DhA.IV,92 (duṭṭha° miserable fellow); III,281; IV,82 (bhātika-ceṭakā rascals of brothers); V,385; Miln.222. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ceṭikā: {'def': 'ceṭī,【阴】小女仆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'ceṭī, 【阴】小女仆。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ch: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第七个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 ch。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第七个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 ch。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cha: {'def': 'Chaḷ (Vedic sas & saṭ (saḍ=chaḷ)),【形】六。chakkhattuṁ,【副】六次。chacattāḷīsati,【阴】四十六。chadvārika,【形】六门的(感官六门，即：眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意)。chanavuti,【阴】九十六。chapaññāsā,【阴】五十六。chabbaggiya,【形】六个一群或六个一夥的。chabbaṇṇa,【形】由六个顔色所组成。chabbassika,【形】存在整个六年期间，六岁。chabbidha,【形】六倍的。chabbīsati,【阴】二十六。chasaṭṭhi，【阴】六十六。chasattati,【阴】七十六。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】六。 ~kkhattuŋ, 【副】六次。 ~cattāḷīsati, 【阴】四十六。 ~dvārika,【形】属于六门的（感官六门，即：眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意）。 ~navuti, 【阴】九十六。 ~paññāsā, 【阴】五十六。 ~bbaggiya, 【形】属于六个一群或六个一伙的。 ~bbaṇṇa, 【形】由六个颜色所组成。 ~bbassika,【形】存在整个六年期间，六岁。 ~bbidha, 【形】六倍的。 ~bbīsati, 【阴】二十六。 ~saṭṭhi，【阴】六十六。 ~sattati, 【阴】七十六。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Chaḷ (cha in composition effects gemination of consonant, e. g. chabbīsati=cha+vīsati, chabbaṇṇa= cha+vaṇṇa, chaḷ only before vowels in compⁿ: chaḷaṅga, chaḷ-abhiññā) [Vedic ṣaṣ & ṣaṭ (ṣaḍ=chaḷ), Gr. e(/c, Lat. sex, Goth, saihs) the number six.

Cases: Nom. cha, Gen. channaṁ, Instr. chahi (& chambhī (?) J.IV,310, which should be chambhi & prob. chabbhi=ṣaḍbhiḥ; see also chambhī), Loc. chasu (& chassu), num. ord. chaṭṭha the sixth. Cp. also saṭṭhi (60) soḷasa (16). Six is applied whenever a “major set” is concerned (see 2), as in the foll.: 6 munis are distinguished at Nd² 514 (in pairs of 3: see muni); 6 bhikkhus as a “clique” (see chabaggiya, cp. the Vestal virgins in Rome, 6 in number); 6 are the sciences of the Veda (see chaḷaṅga); there are 6 buddha-dhammā (Nd² 466); 6 viññāṇakāyā (see upadhi); 6 senses & sense-organs (see āyatana) -- cha dānasālā J.I,282; oraṁ chahi māsehi kālakiriyā bhavissati (l shall die in 6 months, i. e. not just yet, but very soon, after the “next” moon) Pv IV.3³⁵. Six bodily faults J.I,394 (viz. too long, too short, too thin, too fat, too black, too white). Six thousand Gandhabbas J.II,334.

--aṁsa six-cornered Dhs.617. --aṅga the set of six Vedāṅgas, disciplines of Vedic science, viz. 1. kappa, 2. vyākaraṇā, 3. nirutti, 4. sikkhā, 5. chando (viciti), 6. jotisattha (thus enum^d at VvA.265; at PvA.97 in sequence 4, 1, 3, 2, 6, 5): D.III,269; Vv 63¹⁶; Pv.II,6¹³; Miln.178, 236. With ref. to the upekkhās, one is called the “one of six parts” (chaḷ-aṅg’upekkhā) Vism.160. --abhiññā the 6 branches of higher knowledge Vin.II,161; Pug.14. See abhiññā. --âsīti eighty-six [i. e. twice that many in all directions: psychologically 6 X 80= 6 X (4 X 2)¹⁰], of people: an immense number, millions Pv.II,13⁷: of Petas PvA.212; of sufferings in Niraya Pv III,10⁶. --âhaṁ for six days J.III,471. --kaṇṇa heard by six ears, i. e. public (opp. catukaṇṇa) J.VI,392. --tiṁsa(ti) thirty-six A.II,3; It.15; Dh.339; DhA.III,211, 224 (°yojana-parimaṇḍala); IV,48. --danta having six tusks, in °daha N. of one of the Great Lakes of the Himavant (satta-mahā-sarā), lit. lake of the elephant with 6 tusks. cp. cha-visāṇa Vism.416. --dvārika entering through six doors (i. e. the senses) DhA.IV,221 (taṇhā). --dhātura (=dhātuya) consisting of six elements M.III,239. --pañca (chappañca) six or five Miln.292. --phass’āyatana having six seats of contact (i. e. the outer senses) M.III,239; Th.1, 755; PvA.52; cp. Sn.169. --baṇṇa (=vaṇṇa) consisting of six colours (of raṁsi, rays) J.V,40; DhA.I,249; II,41; IV,99. --baggiya (=vaggiya) forming a group of six, a set of (sinful) Bhikkhus taken as exemplification of trespassing the rules of the Vinaya (cp. Oldenberg, Buddha ⁷384). Their names are Assaji, Punabhasu, Paṇḍuka, Lohitaka, Mettiya, Bhummajaka Vin.II,1, 77, and passim; J.II,387; DhA.III,330. --bassāni (=vassāni) six years J.I,85; DhA.III,195. --bidha (=vidha) sixfold Vism.184. --bisāṇa (=visāṇa) having six (i. e. a “major set”) of tusks (of pre-eminent elephants) J.V,42 (Nāgarājā), 48 (kuñjara), cp. chaddanta. -- bīsati (=vīsati) twentysix DhA.IV,233 (devalokā). (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chabyāputta: {'def': '【阳】舍婆子(毒蛇名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chab°: {'def': 'see under cha. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chachakka-sutta: {'def': '六六経. M 148.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '六六經. M 148.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Chada: {'def': '(在【合】中) 【阳】任何东西的盖，面纱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(在【合】中) 【阳】任何东西的盖，面纱。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. chādeti chad=saṁvaraṇe Dhtp 586] anything that covers, protects or hides, viz. a cover, an awning D.I,7≈ (sa-uttara° but °chadana at D.II,194); -- a veil, in phrase vivaṭacchada “with the veil lifted” thus spelt only at Nd² 242, 593, DhA.I,106 (vivattha°, v. l. vaṭṭa°) & DA.I,251 (vivatta°), otherwise °chadda; -- shelter, clothing in phrase ghāsacchada Pug.51 (see ghāsa & cp. chāda); -- a hedge J.VI,60; -- a wing Th.1, I 108 (citra°). (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chadana: {'def': '(Vedic chad),【中】盖屋顶的材料，屋顶，盖。chadanapariyantasamīpa, 靠近屋顶边缘(屋檐)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】盖屋顶的材料，屋顶，盖。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic chad]=chada, viz. lit. 1. a cover, covering J.I,376; V,241. -- 2. a thatch, a roof Vin.II,154 (various kinds), 195; J.II,281; DhA.II,65 (°piṭṭha); IV,104 (°assa udaka-patana-ṭṭhāna), 178; PvA.55. ‹-› 3. a leaf, foliage J.I,87; Th.1, 527. -- 4. hair J.V,202. --fig. pretence, camouflage, counterfeiting Sn.89 (=paṭirūpaṁ katvā SnA 164); Dhs.1059=Vbh.361= Nd² 271^II. Dhs.reads chandanaṁ & Vbh.chādanaṁ.

--iṭṭhikā a tile DhA.IV,203. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chadda: {'def': '(nt.) [Dhtp 590 & Dhtm 820 explⁿ a root chadd by “vamane,” thus evidently taking it as an equivalent of chaḍḍ]=chada, only in phrase vivattacchadda (or vivaṭa°) D.I,89; Sn.372, 378, 1003, 1147; DA.I,251. Nd² however & DA. read °chada expl. by vivaṭa-rāgadosamoha-chadana SnA 365. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chaddanta: {'def': '【形】有六个牙的。【阳】六牙湖（湖名），六牙象（象名）。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有六个牙的。【阳】六牙湖(湖名)，六牙象(象名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaddhā: {'def': 'chadha, 【副】以六方式。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. ṣaṭśaḥ] sixfold Miln.2. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'chadha (Sk. saṭwah),【副】以六个方式(sixfold)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaddikā: {'def': '【阴】呕吐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】呕吐。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chakala: {'def': '[cp. Sk. chagala, from chāga heifer] a he-goat J.VI,237; °ka ibid. & Vin III 166. -- f. chakalī J.VI,559. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chakalaka: {'def': 'chagalaka,【阳】雄山羊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'chagalaka, 【阳】雄山羊。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chakana: {'def': 'chakanaka, 【中】兽粪。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Chakaṇa (Vedic wakrt & wakan),【中】兽粪(the dung of animals)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Chakaṇa (nt.) [Vedic śakṛt & śakan; Gr. kόpros; Sk. chagana is later, see Trenckner, Notes 62 n. 16] the dung of animals Vin.I,202; J.III,386 (ṇ); V,286; VI,392 (ṇ). (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chakaṇatī: {'def': '(f.)=chakana Nd² 199. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chakka: {'def': '【中】六品（六的一组）。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. cha] set of six Vism.242 (meda° & mutta°). (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. cha),【中】六品(六的一组)(set of six)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chakkhattuṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. ṣaṭkṛtvas] six times D.II,198; DhA.III,196. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Challi: {'def': '[Sk. challi] bark, bast DhA.II,165; Bdhgh on MV. VIII,29. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chambhati: {'def': '[see chambheti] to be frightened DhA.IV,52 (+vedhati). (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(see chambheti),恐惧(to be frightened)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chambheti: {'def': '(cp. Sk. skabhnāti & stabhnāti, skambh),稳固，刚硬(to be firm or rigid)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. skabhnāti & stabhnāti, skambh, and P. khambha, thambha & khambheti] to be firm or rigid, fig. to be stiff with fear, paralysed: see chambhin & chambhitatta, Cp. ūrukhambha (under khambha²). (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chambhin: {'def': '(adj.) [see chambheti] immovable, rigid; terrified, paralysed with fear S.I,219; M.I,19; J.IV,310 (v. l. jambhī, here with ref. to one who is bound (stiff) with ropes (pāsasatehi chambhī) which is however taken by com. as Instr. of cha & expl^d by chasu ṭhānesu, viz. on 4 limbs, body & neck; cp. cha). -- acchambhin firm, steady, undismayed S.I,220; Sn.42; J.I,71. -- See chambheti & chambhita. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】惊吓，惊呆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chambhita: {'def': '[pp. of chambheti]. Only in der. chambhitatta (nt.) the state of being stiff, paralysis, stupefaction, consternation, always comb^d with other expressions of fear, viz. uttāsa S.V,386; bhaya J.I,345 (where spelled chambhittaṁ); II,336 (where wrongly expl^d by sarīracalanaṁ), freq. in phrase bhaya ch. lomahaṁsa (fear, stupefaction & horripilation (“gooseflesh”) Vin.II,156; S.I,104; 118; 219; D.I,49 (expl^d at DA.I,50 wrongly by sakala-sarīra calanaṁ); Nd² 470; Miln.23; Vbh.367; Vism.187. -- In other connections at Nd² 1 (=Dhs.425, 1118, where thambhitatta instead of ch°); Dhs.965 (on which see Dhs.trsl. 242). (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chambhitatta: {'def': '【中】麻醉，麻木状态（昏迷），惊愕，惊惶失措。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】麻醉，麻木状态(昏迷)，惊愕，惊惶失措。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chambhī: {'def': '【形】惊吓，惊呆。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chamā: {'def': '【阴】地，土地。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [from kṣam, cp. khamati. It remains doubtful how the Dhtm (553, 555) came to define the root cham (=kṣam) as 1. hīḷane and 2. adane] the earth; only in oblique cases, used as adv. Instr. chamā on the ground, to the ground (=ved. kṣamā) M.I,387; D.III,6; J.III,232; IV,285; VI,89, 528; Vv 41⁴ (VvA.183; bhūmiyaṁ); Th.2, 17; 112 (ThA.116: chamāyaṁ); Pv IV.5³ (PvA.260: bhūmiyaṁ). -- Loc. chamāyaṁ Vin.I,118; A.I,215; Sn.401; Vism.18; ThA.116; chamāya Vin.II,214. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. ksam, cp. khamati),【阴】地，土地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chanda: {'def': '(mano-组), 【阳、中】韵律学，诗体论。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】冲动，意志，愿。 ~raga, 【阳】刺激的欲望，贪欲。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹chad欲)(cp. Vedic and Sk. chanda, and skandh to jump),【阳】冲动，意志，愿(impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will; desire for, wish for, delight in)。chandarāga,【阳】刺激的欲望，贪欲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mano-group),【阳】【中】韵律学，诗体论。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic and Sk. chanda, and skandh to jump]. 1. impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will; desire for, wish for, delight in (c. Loc.). Expl^d at Vism.466 as “kattu-kāmatāy” adhivacanaṁ; by Dhtp 587 & Dhtm 821 as chand=icchāyaṁ. -- A. As virtue: dhammapadesu ch. striving after righteousness S.I,202; tibba° ardent desire, zeal A.I,229; IV,15; kusaladhamma° A.III,441. Often comb^d with other good qualities, e. g. ch. vāyāma ussāha ussoḷhi A.IV,320; ch. viriya citta vīmaṁsā in set of samādhis (cp. iddhipāda) D.III,77 (see below), & in cpd. °âdhipateyya. -- kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati viriyaṁ ārabhati, etc., see citta V. 1 db. ‹-› M.II,174; A.I,174 (ch. vā vāyāmo vā); III,50 (chandasā Instr.); Sn.1026 (+viriya); Vv 24¹² (=kusala° VvA.116); J.VI,72; DhA.I,14. -- B. As vice: (a) kinds & character of ch. -- With similar expressions: (kāya-) ch. sneha anvayatā M.I,500. -- ch. dosa moha bhaya D.III,182; Nd² 337² (See also below chandâgati). Its nearest analogue in this sense is rāga (lust), e. g. ch. rāga dosa paṭigha D.I,25 (cp. DA.I,116); rūpesu uppajjati ch. vā rāgo S.IV,195. See below °rāga. In this bad sense it is nearly the same as kāma (see kāma & kāmachanda: sensual desire, cp. DhsA.370, Vism.466 & Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs.trsl. 292) & the combⁿ kāmachanda is only an enlarged term of kāma. Kāye chanda “delight in the body” M.I,500; Sn.203. bhave ch. (pleasure in existence) Th.2, 14 (cp. bhavachanda); lokasmiṁ ch. (hankering after the world) Sn.866; methunasmiṁ (sexual desire) Sn.835 (expl. by ch. vā rāgo vā peman Nd¹ 181). -- Ch. in this quality is one of the roots of misery: cittass’upakkileso S.III,232 sq.; V,92; mūlaṁ dukkhassa J.IV,328 sq. -- Other passages illustrating ch. are e. g. vyāpāda° & vihiṁsā° S.II,151; rūpa-dhātuyā° S.III,10; IV,72; yaṁ aniccaṁ, etc. . . . tattha° S.III,122, 177; IV,145 sq.; asmī ti ch. S.III,130; atilīno ch. S.V,277 sq., cp. also D.II,277. -- (b) the emancipation from ch. as necessary for the attainment of Arahantship. -- vigata° (free from excitement) and a° S.I,111; III,7, 107, 190; IV,387; A.II,173 sq.; D.III,238; ettha chandaṁ virājetvā Sn.171=S.I,16. Kāye chandaṁ virājaye Sn.203. (a)vīta° A.IV,461 sq. °ṁ vineti S.I,22, 197; °ṁ vinodeti S.I,186; ch. suppaṭivinīta S.II,283. na tamhi °ṁ kayirātha Dh.117. ‹-› 2. (in the monastic law) consent, declaration of consent (to an official act: kamma) by an absentee Vin.I,121, 122. dhammikānaṁ kammānaṁ chandaṁ datvā having given (his) consent to valid proceedings Vin.IV,151, 152; cp. °dāyaka II.94. -- Note. The commentaries follow the canonical usage of the word without adding any precision to its connotation. See Nd² s. v.; DhsA.370; DhA.I,14, J.VI,72, VvA.77.

--âgati in °gamana the wrong way (of behaviour, consisting) in excitement, one of the four agatigamanāni, viz. ch°, dosa°, moha°, bhaya° D.III,133, 228; Vbh.376 (see above); --âdhipateyya (adj.) standing under the dominant influence of impulse Dhs.269, 359, 529; Vbh.288 (+viriya°, citta°, vīmaṁsā°); --ânunīta led according to one’s own desire S.IV,71; Sn.781; --âraha (adj.) fit to give one’s consent Vin.II,93; V,221; --ja sprung from desire (dukkha) S.I,22; --nānatta the diversity or various ways of impulse or desire S.II,143 sq.; D.III,289; Vbh.425; --pahāna the giving up of wrong desire S.V,273; --mūlaka (adj.) having its root in excitement A.IV,339; V,107; --rāga exciting desire (cp. kāmachanda) D.II,58, 60; III,289; S.I,198; II,283; III, 232 sq. (cakkhusmiṁ, etc.); IV,7 sq. 164 (Bhagavato ch-r. n’atthi), 233; A.I,264 (atīte ch-r-ṭṭhānīyā dhammā); II,71; III,73; Nd² 413; DhA.I,334; --samādhi the (right) concentration of good effort, classed under the 4 iddhipādā with viriya°; citta° vīmaṁsā° D.III,77; S.V,268; A.I,39; Vbh.216 sq.; Nett 15; --sampadā the blessing of zeal S.V,30. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chandaka: {'def': 'a voluntary collection (of alms for the Saṅgha), usually as °ṁ saṁharati to make a vol. coll. Vin.IV,250; J.I,422; II,45, 85 (saṁharitvā v. l. BB; text saṅkaḍḍhitvā), 196, 248; III,288 (nava°, a new kind of donation); Cp. BSk. chandaka-bhikṣana AvŚ vol. II.227. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】投票，自愿托钵(给僧团)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】投票，自愿托钵（给僧团）。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chandasā: {'def': '(f.) [see chando] metrics, prosody Miln.3. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chandatā: {'def': '【阴】 (在【合】中) 推动，渴望。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】(在【合】中) 推动，渴望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [see chanda] (strong) impulse, will, desire Nd² 394; Vbh.350, 370. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chandavantatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to adj. chandavant, chanda+ vant]=chandatā VvA.319. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chandika: {'def': '(adj.) [see chanda] having zeal, endeavouring usually as a° without (right) effort, & always comb^d w. anādara & assaddha Pug.13; Vbh.341; PvA.54 (v. l.), 175. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】乐欲(having zeal, endeavouring)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chando: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic chandas, from skandh, cp. in meaning Sk. pada; Gr. i]/ambos] metre, metrics, prosody, esp. applied to the Vedas Vin.II,139 (chandaso buddhavacanaṁ āropeti to recite in metrical form, or Acc. to Bdhgh. in the dialect of the Vedas cp. Vin. Texts III,15Q); S.I,38; Sn.568 (Sāvittī chandaso mukhaṁ: the best of Vedic metres).

--viciti prosody VvA.265 (enum^d as one of the 6 disciplines dealing with the Vedas: see chaḷaṅga). (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chandāgati: {'def': '【阴】在冲动下而犯的错误行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】在冲动下而犯的错误行为。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chandāgārika: {'def': 'm.［BSk. Saṇṇāgarika］六城部，密林山部［十八部派の一］', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Chandīkata: {'def': '(adj.) & chandīkatā (f.) (with) right effort, zealous, zeal (adj.) Th.1, 1029 (chandi°) (n.) Vbh.208. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】& chandīkatā,【阴】志欲的，热心的((with) right effort, zealous, zeal)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Channa: {'def': '【形】适当的。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of chad, see chādeti¹] 1. covered J.IV, 293 (vāri°); VI,432 (padara°, ceiling); ThA.257. ‹-› 2. thatched (of a hut) Sn.18. -- 3. concealed, hidden, secret J.II,58; IV,58. -- nt. channaṁ a secret place Vin.IV,220. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[chādeti盖﹑遮] 的【过分】盖﹑遮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（比库名）阐那，（古音译：）车匿，阐铎迦', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '(chādeti 的【过分】)。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [pp. to chad (chand), chandayati, see chādeti²] fit, suitable, proper Vin.II,124 (+paṭirūpa); III,128; D.I,91 (+paṭirūpa); S.I,9; M.I,360; J.III,315; V,307; VI,572; Pv.II,12¹⁵ (=yutta PvA.159). (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (pp. to chad (chand), chandayati, see chādeti2) ,【形】适当的(fit, suitable, proper)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (pp. of chad, see chādeti1),1.盖(covered J.IV, 293 (vārichanna); VI,432 (padarachanna, ceiling)。2. thatched (of a hut) Sn.18. -- 3. concealed, hidden, secret J.II,58; IV,58. -- nt. channaṁ a secret place Vin.IV,220.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chapaka: {'def': 'name of a low-class tribe Vin.IV,203 (=caṇḍāla Bdhgh. on Sekh. 69 at Vin.IV,364), f. °ī ib. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '一贱民的族群(name of a low-class tribe Vin.IV,203 (=caṇḍāla Bdhgh. on Sekh. 69 at Vin.IV,364), f. chapakī ib.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chappada: {'def': '【阳】蜜蜂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蜜蜂。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chappañca: {'def': '[cha+pañca] six or five Miln.292. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cha+pañca), 五或六(six or five)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chatta: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [late Vedic chattra=*chad-tra, covering to chad, see chādati] a sunshade (“parasol” would be misleading. The handle of a chatta is affixed at the circumference, not at the centre as it is in a parasol), a canopy Vin.I,152; II,114; D.I,7≈; II,15 (seta°, under which Gotama is seated); J.I,267 (seta°); IV,16; V,383; VI,370; Sn.688, 689; Miln.355; DhA.I,380 sq.; DA.I,89; PvA.47. -- Esp. as seta° the royal canopy, one of the 5 insignia regis (setachatta-pamukhaṁ pañcavidhaṁ rāja-kakudhabhaṇḍaṁ PvA.74), see kakudhabhaṇḍa. J.VI,4, 223, 389; °ṁ ussāpeti to unfold the r. canopy PvA.75; DhA.I,161, 167. See also paṇṇa°.

--daṇḍa the handle of a sunshade DhA.III,212; --nāḷi the tube or shaft (of reeds or bamboo) used for the making of sunshades M.II,116; --maṅgala the coronation festival J.III,407; DhA.III,307; VvA.66. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (cp. Sk. chātra, one who carries his master’s sunshade), 学生(a pupil, a student)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】伞，遮阳伞，王室天篷。 ~kāra, 【阳】制伞者。 ~gāhaka, 【阳】携带主人的伞者。 ~nāḷi, 【阴】 ~daṇḍa, 【阳】伞柄。 ~pāṇī, 【阳】携带伞者。 ~maṅgala, 【中】加冕典礼，为宝塔顶安置小尖塔的典礼。~ussapana, 【中】升起王室天篷，即：占领王座。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. chātra, one who carries his master’s sunshade] a pupil, a student J.II,428. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1,【中】伞，遮阳伞(a sunshade)，王室天篷。chattakāra,【阳】制伞者。chattagāhaka,【阳】携带主人的伞者。chattanāḷi,【阴】chattadaṇḍa,【阳】伞柄。chattapāṇī,【阳】携带伞者。chattamaṅgala,【中】加冕典礼，为宝塔顶安置小尖塔的典礼。chattussapana,【中】升起王室天篷，即：占领王座。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chattaka: {'def': '【中】1.伞(a sun-shade)。2. (ahichattaka “snake’s sun-shade,” N. for a mushroom: toadstool)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) 1. a sun-shade J.VI,252; Th.2, 23 (=ThA.29 as nickname of sun-shade makers). See also paṇṇa°. -- 2. ahi° “snake’s sun-shade,” N. for a mushroom: toadstool D.III,87; J.II,95; a mushroom, toadstool J.II,95. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chattiŋsā: {'def': 'chattiŋsati, 【阴】三十六。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chattiṁsakkhattuṁ: {'def': '(adv.) thirty-six times It.15. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chattiṁsā: {'def': 'chattiṁsati,【阴】三十六。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chattupāhana: {'def': '(chatta+upāhana n.), 伞与凉鞋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chava: {'def': '【阳】尸体。【形】低的，悲惨的。 ~kuṭikā, 【阴】藏骸所，停尸房。 ~ṭṭhika, 【中】脱离骨骼的骨头。 ~ḍāhaka, 【阳】职务上烧尸的人。 ~alāta, 【中】来自火葬的污火。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】屍体(a corpse)。【形】低的，悲惨的。chavakuṭikā,【阴】藏骸所，停屍房。chavaṭṭhika,【中】脱离骨骼的骨头。chavaḍāhaka,【阳】职务上烧屍的人。chavālāta,【中】来自火葬的污木。Seyyathāpi…chavālātam ubhato padittam majjhe gūthagataṁ neva gāme kaṭṭhattam pharati nāraññe katthaṭṭam pharati.(犹如火葬之薪，两端被烧过，中间有粪，在村既然不能充当薪木，在林间也不能充当薪木。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Derivation doubtful. Vedic śava] 1. a corpse Vin.II,115 (°sīsassa patta a bowl made out of a skull). See cpds. -- 2. (adj.) vile, low, miserable, wretched Vin.II,112, 188; S.I,66; M.I,374; A.II,57; J.IV,263.

--aṭṭhika bones of a corpes, a skeleton C III,15, 1 (?); --âlāta a torch from a pyre S.III,93=A.II,95=It.90= J.I,482; Vism.54, 299 (°ûpama). --kuṭikā a charnelhouse, morgue, Vin.I,152; --dāhaka one who (officially) burns the dead, an “undertaker” Vin.I,152; DhA.I,68 (f. °ikā); Vism.230; Miln.331. --dussa a miserable garment D.I,166≈A.I,240; II,206. --sarīra a corpse Vism.178 sq. --sitta a water pot (see above 1) Th.1, 127. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chavaka: {'def': '1. a corpse J.V,449. -- 2. wretched Miln.156, 200; (°caṇḍāla, see explⁿ at J.V,450). (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chavi: {'def': '【阴】外皮，皮肤。 ~kalyāṇa, 【中】肤色的美。 ~vaṇṇa, 【阳】皮肤的颜色，肤色。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [*(s)qeu to cover. Vedic chavi, skuṇāti; cp. Gr. sku_lon; Lat. ob-scurus; Ohg. skūra (Nhg. scheuer); Ags scēo›E. sky also Goth. skōhs›E. shoe] the (outer, thin) skin, tegument S.II,256; A.IV,129; Sn.194; J.II,92. Distinguished from camma, the hide (under-skin, corium) S.II,238 (see camma); also in combⁿ ch-cammamaṁsa Vism.235; DhA.IV,56.

--kalyāṇa beauty of complexion, one of the 5 beauties (see kalyāṇa 2d) DhA.I,387; --dos’-ābādha a skin disease, cutaneous irritation Vin.I,206; --roga skin disease DhA.III,295; --vaṇṇa the colour of the skin, the complexion, esp. beautiful compl., beauty Vin.I,8; J.III,126; DhA.IV,72; PvA.14 (vaṇṇadhātu), 70, 71 (=vaṇṇa). (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】外皮，皮肤(the (outer, thin) skin, tegument)。chavikalyāṇa,【中】肤色的美。chavivaṇṇa,【阳】肤色，皮肤的顔色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaḍḍaka: {'def': '【形】掷者，移转者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】掷者，移转者。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) throwing away, removing, in puppha° a flower-rubbish remover (see pukkusa) Th.1, 620; Vism.194; -- f. chaḍḍikā see kacavara°. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chaḍḍana: {'def': '(nt.) throwing away, rejecting J.I,290; Dhtp 571. --ī (f.) a shovel, dust-pan DhA.III,7. See kacavara°. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】丢弃，排斥。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】丢弃，排斥。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaḍḍeti: {'def': '[Vedic chardayati & chṛṇatti to vomit; cp. also avaskara excrements & karīsa dung. From *sqer to eliminate, separate, throw out (Gr. kri/nw, Lat. ex‹-› (s)cerno), cp. Gr. skώs, Lat. mus(s)cerda, Ags. scearn] to spit out, to vomit, throw away; abandon, leave, reject Vin 214 sq.; IV,265; M.I,207; S.I,169 (chaṭṭehi wrongly for chaḍḍehi)=Sn.p. 15; J.I,61, 254, 265, 292; V,427; Pug.33; DhA.I,95 (uṇhaṁ lohitaṁ ch. to kill oneself); II,101; III,171; VvA.126; PvA.43, 63, 174, 211; 255; Miln.15. -- ger. chaḍḍūna Th.2, 469 (=chaḍḍetvā ThA.284); grd. chaḍḍetabba Vin.I,48; J.II,2; chaḍḍanīya Miln.252; chaḍḍiya (to be set aside) M.I,12 sq. -- Pass. chaḍḍīyati PvA.174. -- Caus. chaḍḍāpeti to cause to be vomited, to cast off, to evacuate, to cause to be deserted Vin.IV,265; J.I,137; IV,139; VI,185, 534; Vism.182. -- pp. chaḍḍita (q. v.). -- See also kacavara° (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(chaḍḍ + e), 丢弃，放弃，拒绝，离开。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 chaḍḍenta。【独】 chaḍḍetvā。【潜】 chaḍḍetabba。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(chaḍḍ丢弃+e), 丢弃，放弃，拒绝，离开(to spit out, to vomit, throw away; abandon, leave, reject)。【过】chaḍḍesi。【现分】chaḍḍenta。【独】chaḍḍetvā。【义】chaḍḍetabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaḍḍita: {'def': '(chaḍḍeti 的【过分】)。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of chaddeti] thrown out. vomited; cast away, rejected, left behind S.III,143; J.I,91, 478; Pv.II,2³ (=ucchiṭṭhaṁ vantan ti attho PvA.80); VvA.100; PvA.78, 185. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐[chaḍḍeti丢弃] 的【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaḍḍiya: {'def': '【形】被拒绝的，被丢弃的。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】被拒绝的，被丢弃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaḍḍāpeti: {'def': '(chaḍḍeti‘丢弃’的【使】),【过】chaḍḍāpesi。【过分】chaḍḍāpita。【独】chaḍḍāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(chaḍḍeti 的【使】), 【过】 ~esi。【过分】 chaḍḍāpita。【独】chaḍḍāpetvā。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chaḍḍīya: {'def': '【形】可以丢弃的。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chaḍḍīyati: {'def': '﹐[chaḍḍeti丢弃] 的【被】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(chaḍḍeti 的【被】)。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chaḷabhiñña: {'def': '【形】有六神通的。 ~ñā, 【阴】六神通。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有六神通的。chaḷabhiññā,【阴】六神通。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaḷaŋsa: {'def': '【形】有六边的，有六角的。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chaḷaṁsa: {'def': '【形】有六边的，有六角的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaḷaṅga: {'def': '【形】由六个部份所组成。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】由六个部份所组成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chaṇa: {'def': '【阳】节日。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】节日(a festival)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'a festival J.I,423, 489 (surā°), 499; II,48 (maṅgala°), 143, III,287, 446, 538; IV,115 (surā°); V,212; VI,221; 399 (°bheri); DhA.III,100 (surā°), 443 (°vesa); IV,195; VvA.173. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chaṇaka: {'def': '[=akkhaṇa? Kern; cp. Sk. *ākhaṇa] the Chaṇaka plant Miln.352; cp. akkhaṇa. (Page 274)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chaṭṭha: {'def': '【形】第六的。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】第六的。chaṭṭhama, Sn.101, 103; J.III,280.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'the sixth Sn.171, 437; DhA.III,200: SnA 364. Also as chaṭṭhama Sn.101, 103; J.III,280. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chaṭṭhī: {'def': '【阴】(巴利语法)第六格，即：领属格。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】（巴利语法）第六格，即：领属格。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cheda: {'def': '【阳】切断(cutting, destruction, loss)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[see chindati] cutting, destruction, loss Sn.367 (°bandhana); J.I,419; 485; sīsa° decapitation DhA.II,204; PvA.5; aṇḍa° castration J.IV,364; -- bhatta °ṁ karoti to put on short rations J.I,156. pada° separation of words SnA 150. --°gāmin (adj.) liable to break, fragile A.II,81; J.V,453. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】切断。 ~ka, 【阳】切断者，破坏者。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chedaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. cheda] cutting; in aṇḍa° one who castrates J.IV,366. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】切断者，破坏者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chedana: {'def': '【中】切断。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [see chindati] cutting, severing, destroying D.I,5; (=DA.I,80 hattha°-ādi); III,176; Vin.II,133; A.II,209; V,206; S.IV,169 (nakha°); V,473; Miln.86; Vism.102 (°vadha-bandana, etc.). (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】切断。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chedanaka: {'def': '【形】切断者(one who tears or cuts off )。【中】切断的过程(the process of getting cut)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1. (adj.) one who tears or cuts off PvA.7. ‹-› 2. (nt.) the process of getting cut (a cert. penance for offences: in combⁿ with āpattiyo & pācittiyaṁ) Vin.II,307; IV,168, 170, 171, 279; V,133, 146 (cha ch. āpattiyo). (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chedāpeti: {'def': '(chindati 的【使】), 令切断，令打破。【过】chedāpesi。【过分】chedāpita。【独】chedāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(chindati 的【使】), 令切断，令打破。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 chedāpita。【独】 chedāpetva。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chejja: {'def': '【形】可以被切断的，易打破的。【中】断肢刑(切断四肢的处罚)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可以被切断的，易打破的。【中】断肢刑（切断四肢的处罚）。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1. see chindati. -- 2. one of the 7 notes in the gamut VvA.139. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cheka: {'def': '【形】聪明的，有技术的。 ~tā, 【阴】聪明，技术。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】聪明的，有技术的。chekatā,【阴】聪明，技术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) 1. clever, skilful, shrewd; skilled in (c. Loc.) Vin.II,96; M.I,509; J.I,290 (aṅga-vijjāya); II,161, 403; V,216, 366 (°pāpaka good & bad); VI,294 (id.); Miln.293.; DA.I,90; VvA.36, 215; DhA.I,178. -- 2. genuine Vism.437 (opp. kūṭa). (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chekatā: {'def': '(f.) [cheka+tā] skill VvA.131. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cheppā: {'def': '(Sk. sépa),【阴】尾，尾部(tail)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. sépa] tail Vin.I,191; III,21. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chepāpana: {'def': '【中】使切断，使打破。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】使切断，使打破。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cheta: {'def': 'an animal living in mountain cliffs, a sort of leopard S.I,198. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chettabba: {'def': '【潜】应该被切断。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【义】应该被切断。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chettar: {'def': '(Sk. chettr, n-agent to chindati),【阳】切断的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. chettṛ, n-agent to chindati] cutter, destroyer Sn.343; J.VI,226. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chettu: {'def': '【阳】切断的人。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chetvā: {'def': 'chetvāna, 【独】已切开，已切断。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'chetvāna,【独】已切开，已切断。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chida: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 打破，切断，破坏，Bandhanacchida = 打破或切断联结的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(always --°) (adj.) breaking, cutting, destroying M.I,386; S.I,191=Th.1, 1234; Th.1, 521; 1143; Sn.87 (kaṅkha°) 491, 1021, 1101 (taṇha°); VvA.82 (id.). (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 打破，切断，破坏，Bandhanacchida = 打破或切断联结的人。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chidda: {'def': '【中】洞，裂缝，过失，缺点。【形】有裂缝的，穿孔的，有过失的。chiddaka,【形】有洞的，有毛孔的。chiddagavesī,【形】找寻他人的过失或弱点的。chiddavacchiddaka,【形】千疮百孔、坑坑洞洞。chiddābhimukha﹐洞口。0', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】洞，裂缝，过失，缺点。【形】有裂缝的，穿孔的，有过失的。 ~ka, 【形】有洞的，有毛孔的。 ~gavesī, 【形】找寻他人的过失或弱点的。 ~avacchiddaka, 【形】充满着裂口和洞的。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Ohg. scetar. For suffix °ra, cp. rudhira, etc. Vedic chid+ra. Cp. Sk. chidra] 1. (adj.) having rents or fissures, perforated S.IV,316; J.I,419; (fig.) faulty, defective, Vin.I,290. -- 2. (nt.) a cutting, slit, hole, aperture, S.I,43; J.I,170 (eka°), 172, 419, 503; II,244, 261; (kaṇṇa°); Vism.171, 172 (bhitti°), 174 (tāḷa°); SnA 248 (akkhi°); DhA.III,42; VvA.100 (bhitti°); PvA.180 (kaṇṇa°), 253 (read chidde for chinde); fig. a fault, defect, flaw Dh.229 (acchidda-vutti faultless conduct) Miln.94.

--âvachidda full of breaches and holes J.III,491; Vism.252; DhA.I,122, 284 (cp. °vichidda); III,151. --kārin inconsistent A.II,187; --vichidda=°âvachidda J.I,419; V,163 (sarīraṁ chiddavichiddaṁ karoti to perforate a body). (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chiddaka: {'def': '(adj.) having holes or meshes (of a net) D.I,45. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chiddatā: {'def': '(f.) perforation, being perforated J.I,419. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chiddavant: {'def': '(adj.) having faults, full of defects M.I,272. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chiddita: {'def': '【形】穿孔的，开洞的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】穿孔的，开洞的。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chiggala: {'def': '【中】洞。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】洞。一孔之轭(ekachiggala-yuga M.III,169)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chiggaḷa: {'def': '[cp. chidda] a hole, in eka°-yuga M.III,169≈; tāḷa° key hole S.IV,290; Vism.394. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chijjati: {'def': '(chindati 的【被】), 被切割，被打破，被切断。【过】 chijji。【现分】 chijjanta, chijjamāna。【独】 chijjitvā, chijjiya。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(chindati 的【被】), 被切割，被打破，被切断。【过】chijji。【现分】chijjanta, chijjamāna。【独】chijjitvā, chijjiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chindanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. chindati] breaking, see pari°. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chindati: {'def': '(chid + ŋ-a), 切（割、削），切断，破坏。【过】 chindi。【过分】chinna。【现分】 chindanta, chindamāna。【独】 chinditvā, chindiya。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic chid in 3 forms viz. 1. (Perf.) base chid; 2. Act. (pres.) base w. nasal infix. chind; 3. Med. (denom). base w. guṇa ched. Cp. the analagous formations of cit under cinteti. -- Idg.* sk(h)eid, Gr. sxi/zw (E. schism); Lat. scindo (E. scissors); Ohg. scīzan; Ags. scītan; cp. also Goth. skaidan, Ohg. sceidan. Root chid is defined at Dhtp 382, 406 as “dvedhākaraṇa”] to cut off, to destroy, to remove, both lit. (bandhanaṁ, pāsaṁ, pasibbakaṁ, jīvaṁ, gīvaṁ, sīsaṁ, hatthapāde, etc.) and fig. (taṇhaṁ, mohaṁ, āsavā, saṁyojanāni, vicikicchaṁ, vanathaṁ, etc.) Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 88. -- Forms: (1) chid: aor. acchidā Sn.357, as acchidaṁ M.II,35, acchidda Dh.351 (cp. agamā); Pass. pres. chijjati (Sk. chidyate) Dh.284; It.70; J.I,167; Th.1, 1055=Miln.395; Miln.40; aor. chijji J.III,181 (dvidhā ch. broke in two). -- fut. chijjissati J.I,336; -- ger. chijjitvā J.I,202; IV,120; -- pp. chijjita J.III,389; see also chida, chidda, chinna. ‹-› (2) chind: Act. pres. chindati S.I,149=A.V,174= Sn.657; PvA.4, 114; VvA.123; -- imper. chinda Sn.346; J.II,153; chindatha Dh.283; -- pot. chinde Dh.370; -- ppr. chindamāna J.I,70, 233. -- fut. chindissati DhA.II,258. -- aor. acchindi Vin.I,88 & chindi J.I,140. -- ger. chinditvā J.I,222, 254, 326; II,155. ‹-› inf. chindituṁ Vin.I,206; PvA.253. -- grd. chindiya J.II,139 (duc°). -- Caus. chindāpeti J.II,104, 106; Vism.190 (rājāno core ch.). -- (3) ched: fut. checchati (Sk. chetsyati) M.I,434; Dh.350; Miln.391. -- aor. acchecchi (Sk. acchaitsīt) S.I,12; A.II,249; Sn.355=Th.1, 1275; J.VI,261. acchejji (v. l. of acchecchi) is read at S.IV,205, 207, 399; V,441; A.III,246, 444; It.47. -- inf. chetuṁ J.IV,208; Pv IV.3²⁸, & chettuṁ Sn.28. -- ger. chetvā Sn.66, 545, 622; Dh.283, 369; J.I,255; Nd² 245, & chetvāna Sn.44; Dh.346; J.III,396. -- grd. chetabba Vin.II,110, & chejja (often comb^d w. bhejja, torture & maiming, as punishments) Vin.III,47 (+bh°); J.V,444 (id.) VI,536; Miln.83, 359. Also chejja in neg. acchejja S VI,226. -- Caus. chedeti Vin.I,50, & chedāpeti ib.; J.IV,154. See also cheda, chedana. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(chid切断+ṁ-a), 切(割、削)，切断，破坏。【过】chindi。【过分】chinna。【现分】chindanta, chindamāna。【独】chinditvā, chindiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chindiya: {'def': '【形】易破的东西。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】易破的东西。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chinna: {'def': '[pp. of chindati] cut off, destroyed Vin.I,71 (acchinna-kesa with unshaven hair); M.I,430; D.II,8 (°papañca); J.I,255; II,155; IV,138; Dh.338; Pv.I,11² (v. l. for bhinna), 11⁶; DhA.IV,48. Very often in punishments of decapitation (sīsa°) or mutilation (hatthapāda°, etc.) e. g. Vin.I,91; III,28; Pv.II,2⁴ (ghāna-sīsa°); Miln.5. Cp. sañ°. As first part of cpd., chinna° very frequently is to be rendered by “without,” e. g.

--āsa without hope J.II,230; PvA.22, 174; --iriyāpatha unable to walk, i. e. a cripple Vin.I,91; --kaṇṇa without ears PvA.151; --gantha untrammelled, unfettered Sn.219; --pilotika with torn rags, or without rags S.II,28; PvA.171 (+bhinna°); --bhatta without food i. e. famished, starved J.I,84; V,382; DhA.III,106=VvA.76; --saṁsaya without doubt Sn.1112; It.96, 97, 123; Nd² 244. --sāṭaka a torn garment Vism.51. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(chindati 的【过分】), chinnāsa, 【形】没有希望的。 ~nāsa, 【形】鼻子被切掉的。 ~bhatta, 【形】极饥饿的，挨饿的。 ~vattha, 【形】衣服被强行拿掉的。 ~hattha, 【形】手被切断的。 ~iriyāpatha, 【形】不能走路的，跛子。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(chindati 的【过分】), chinnāsa,【形】没有希望的。chinnāsa,【形】鼻子被切掉的。chinnabhatta,【形】极饥饿的，挨饿的。chinnavattha,【形】衣服被强行拿掉的。chinnahattha,【形】手被切断的。chinniriyāpatha,【形】不能走路的，跛子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chinnaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. chinna] cut; a° uncut (of cloth) Vin.I,297. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chinnikā: {'def': '(f.) deceitful, fraudulent, sly, only in combⁿ w. dhuttā (dhuttikā) & only appl^d to women Vin.III,128; IV,61; J.II,114; Miln.122. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chubhati: {'def': 'given as root chubh (for khubh) with def. “nicchubhe” at Dhtm 550. See khobha. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chuddha: {'def': '[Sk. kṣubdha (?) kṣubh, perhaps better ṣṭīv, pp. ṣṭyūta (see niṭṭhubhati), cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 66, 120, & Trenckner Notes p. 75. See also khipita] thrown away, removed, rejected, contemptible Dh.41=Th.2, 468 (spelled chuṭṭha); J.V,302. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已丢弃，已拒绝，已卑鄙。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已丢弃，已拒绝，已卑鄙。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chupana: {'def': '【中】触，碰。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) touching Vin.III,121; J.VI,387. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】触碰(touching)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chupati: {'def': '(chup+a), 触及，触摸。【过】chupi。【独】chupitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Dhtp 480=samphasse] to touch Vin.I,191; III,37, 121; J.IV,82; VI,166; Vism.249; DhA.I,166 (mā chupi). -- pp. chupita. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(chup + a), 触及，触摸。【过】 chupi。【独】 chupitvā。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chupita: {'def': '[pp. of chupati] touched Vin.III,37; J.VI,218. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Churikā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. kṣurikā to kṣura see khura, cp. chārikā› khara] a knife, a dagger, kreese Th.2, 302; J.III,370; Miln.339; cp. Miln.trsln. II.227; ThA.227; DhA.III,19. Churita: see vi°. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chādana: {'def': '【中】chādanā,【阴】盖，遮，衣服，隐匿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】盖，遮，衣服，隐匿。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [to chādeti] covering. clothing, often comb^d with ghāsa° food & clothing (q. v.) J.II,79 (vattha°); Pv.I,10⁷ (bhojana°); II,1⁷ (vattha°); PvA.50 (=vattha); DhA.IV,7. -- As adj. J.VI,354 (of the thatch of a house). (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chādanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. chādeti] covering, concealment Pug.19, 23. Cp. pari°. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chādanīya: {'def': 'chādetabba,【义】可以隐蔽的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'chādetabba, 【潜】可以隐蔽的。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chādeti: {'def': '² [for chandeti, cp. Sk. chandati & chadayati; to khyā?] (a) to seem good, to please, to give pleasure S.II,110; A.III,54; DhA.III,285 (bhattaṁ me na ch.). ‹-› (b) to be pleased with, to delight in, to approve of (c Acc.) esp. in phrase bhattaṁ chādeti to appreciate the meal Vin.II,138; D.I,72 (=rucceyya); V,31 (chādayamāna), 33 (chādamana), 463; Th.2, 409; Pv.I,11⁸ (nacchādimhamhase), pp. channa². (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of chad, Sk. chādayati] (a) to cover, to conceal Vin.II,211 (Pass. chādīyati); Sn.1022 (mukhaṁ jivhāya ch.); Dh.252; Pv III,4³. -- (b) (of sound) to penetrate, to fill J.II,253; VI,195. -- pp. channa¹ (q. v.). (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(chad + e), 盖，遮，隐藏，用茅草苫盖（屋顶），给快乐，品尝。【过】~esi。【过分】 chādita。【现分】 chādenta, chādayamāna。【独】 chādetvā,chādiya。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 (for chandeti, cp. Sk. chandati & chadayati), 愉快(to seem good, to please, to give pleasure)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (chad遮盖+e)(Caus. of chad, Sk. chādayati), 盖，遮，隐藏，用茅草苫盖(屋顶)，给快乐，品尝。【过】chādesi。【过分】chādita, channa。【现分】chādenta, chādayamāna。【独】chādetvā, chādiya。Pass. chādīyati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chādi: {'def': '(f.) [chādeti¹] shade J.IV,351. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chādiya: {'def': '(nt.) covering (of a house or hut), thatch, straw, hay (for eating) J.VI,354 (=gehacchādana-tiṇa). (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chāha: {'def': '【中】六天。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】六天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chāpa: {'def': '& °ka [Sk. śāva] the young of an animal M.I,384 (°ka); S.II,269 (bhiṅka°); J.I,460; II,439 (sakuṇa°); Miln.402; --f. chāpī J.VI,192 (maṇḍūka°). (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'chāpaka, 【阳】崽（幼小的动物）。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'chāpaka,【阳】幼小的动物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chārikā: {'def': '【阴】灰烬。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Cp. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāra burning; Gr. chrόs dry, Lat. serenus dry, clear. See also khāra & bhasma.] Ashes Vin.I,210; II,220; D.II,164=Ud.93; A.I,209; IV,103; J.III,447; IV,88; V,144; DhA.I,256; II,68; VvA.67; PvA.80 (chārikaṅgāra). (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Cp. ksāyati to burn, ksāra burning),【阴】灰烬(ashes)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chāta: {'def': '(cp. Sk. psāta from bhas),【形】饥饿的。chātajjhatta,【形】饥饿的。chātatā,【阴】饥饿的情况。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. psāta from bhas (*bhsā), Gr. yw/xw; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sabulum & cp. bhasman, probably Non-Aryan] hungry J.I,338; II,301; V,69; Pv.II,1¹³ (=bubhukkhita, khudāya abhibhūta PvA.72) II.9³⁶ (jighacchita PvA.126); PvA.62; VvA.76; Miln.253; Mhvs VII.24. Cp. pari°.

--ajjhatta with hungry insides J.I,345; II,203; V,338, 359; DhA.I,125; DhA.I,367 (chātak’); III,33, 40. --kāla time of being hungry. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】饥饿的。 ~jjhatta, 【形】饥饿的。 ~tā, 【阴】饥饿的情况。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chātaka: {'def': '【中】饿，饥荒。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. prec.] 1. adj. hungry J.I,245, 266. -- 2. (nt.) hunger, famine J.I,266; II,124, 149, 367; VI,487; DhA.I,170. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】饿，饥荒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Chātatā: {'def': '[f. abstr. fr. chāta] hunger (lit. hungriness) DhA.I,170. (Page 275)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Chāyā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic chāyā, light & shade, *skei (cp. (s)qait in ketu), cp. Sk. śyāva; Gr. skiά & skoiόs; Goth. skeinan. See note on kāla, vol. II. p. 38²] shade, shadow S.I,72, 93; M.II,235; III,164; A.II,114; Sn.1014; Dh.2; J.II,302; IV,304; V,445; Miln.90, 298; DhA.I,35; PvA.12, 32, 45, 81, etc. -- Yakkhas have none; J.V,34; VI,337. chāyā is frequent in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87. (Page 276)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】荫(台语：ng2)，影子(台语：iann2)。chāyāmāna,【中】影子的测定。chāyārūpa,【中】肖像。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】荫，影子。 ~māna, 【中】影子的测定。 ~rūpa, 【中】相片，肖像。(p131)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Chūrikā: {'def': '【阴】匕首(dagger)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】匕首。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ci: {'def': '不定疑问虚词，例： koci = 任何人，无论谁。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cid in Sandhi) [Vedic cid Nom. nt. to interr. base *qǔi (as in Gr. tiζ, Lat. quis, Goth. hvi-leiks, see ki°, cp. ka°, ku°), = Gr. ti/(d), Lat. quid & quid(d)em, Av. ciṭ (cp. tad, yad, kad beside taṁ, yaṁ, kiṁ)] indef. interr. particle (always --°), in koci (= Sk. kaścid) whoever, kiñci (kincid-eva) whatever, kadāci at some time or any time, etc. (q. v.), see also ca, cana, ce. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cicciṭāyana: {'def': '(nt.) fizzing Vism.408 (°sadda). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cicciṭāyati: {'def': '【拟】发出嘘声，嘶嘶响，发出吱吱声。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[onomat. cp. ciṭiciṭāyati] to hiss, fizz, sizzle (always comb^d with ciṭiciṭāyati) Vin.I,225; S.I,169; Sn.p. 15; Pug.36; Miln.258 sq. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【拟】发出嘘声，嘶嘶响，发出吱吱声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cihaciha: {'def': '﹐(=Vihaviha)﹐(for vihaga)一种鸟(a sort of bird)(Th.1,49.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cikicchati: {'def': '[Sk. cikitsati, Desid. of cit, cinteti. Cp. vicikicchā], usually tikicchati to reflect, think over, intend, aim at. pp. cikicchita KhA 188 (in explⁿ of vicikicchita q. v.). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cikkhalla: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. cikkaṇa & cikkala, slippery+ya] mud, mire, swamp; often with udaka°. Vin.I,253; II,120, 159, 291: III,41; A.III,394; J.I,196; Miln.286, 311, 397; PvA.102, 189, 215. -- (adj.) Vin.II,221; IV,312; Pv IV.1¹⁶; Miln.286. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】泥沼，泥，沼泽。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】泥沼，泥，沼泽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cikkhallavant: {'def': '(adj.) muddy PvA.225. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cikkhassati: {'def': '[Desid. of kṣar=Sk. cikṣariṣati] to wish to drop, to ooze out Miln.152 (°ssanto), see Kern. Toev. II.139 & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 87. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cikkhati: {'def': '(cikkhanā, etc.) [Freq. of khyā, Dhtp 19: cikkh= vacane] to tell, to announce: see ā° & paṭisaṁ°. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cilimikā: {'def': '(f.) [Der. fr. cīra] as cimilikā at Vin.II,150; IV,40 a kind of cloth or carpeting, made from palmleaves, bark, etc. Also at PvA.144 (doubtful reading). (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cillaka: {'def': '[kilaka or khīlaka, q. v.] a peg, post, pillar, in dāruka° Th.2, 390 (cp. ThA.257). Not with Kern (Toev.) “a wooden puppet,” as der. fr. citta.¹ (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cimilikā: {'def': '【阴】套，例：枕头等的套。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) see cilimikā Vin.II,150; IV,40; Cp. Vin. Texts III,167; J.P.T.S. 1885, 39. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】套，例：枕头等的套。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cina: {'def': '支那，至那，震旦，振旦，真丹', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Cintaka: {'def': 'cintanaka, 【形】考虑周到的，深思的。【阳】思想者。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. cintin] one who thinks out or invents, in akkhara° the grammarian PvA.120, nīti° the lawgiver ib. 130; cp. Divy 212, 451, “overseer.” (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'cintanaka,【形】考虑周到的，深思的。【阳】思想者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cintana: {'def': '(nt.)=cintā Th.1, 695; Miln.233. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cintanaka: {'def': '(adj.) thoughtful, considerate J.I,222. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cintetabba: {'def': '【潜】可以思考的。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【义】可以思考的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cinteti: {'def': '& ceteti [Sk. cetati to appear, perceive, & cintayati to think, cit (see citta²) in two forms: (a) Act, base with nasal infix cint (cp. muñc, yuñj, siñc, etc.); (b) Med. base (denom.) with guṇa cet (cp. moc, yoj, sec, etc, & the analogous formations of chid, chind, ched under chindati) to *(s)qait: see citta¹, with which further cp. caksu, cikita, ciketi, cikitsati, & in meaning passati (he sees=he knows), Gr. oi)da=vidi, E. view=thought, Ger. anschauung] -- Forms: (a) cint: pres. cinteti. pot. cinteyya; ppr. cintento & cintayanto (Sn.834); -- aor. cintesi, 3rd pl. cintesuṁ (J.I,149), acintayuṁ (Sn.258); -- ger. cintetvā (J.I,279) & cintiya (Mhvs VII.17, 32); -- grd. cinteyya & cintetabba; pp. cintita (q. v.). Cp. also cintana, cintin. -- (b) cet: pres. ceteti & cetayati (S.I,121), pot. cetaye (Pv.II,9⁷= cinteyya PvA.116); ppr. cetayāna (J.V,339); fut. cetessati (Vin.III,19); -- aor. acetayi (Pv.I,6⁶=cetesi PvA.34); -- ger cecca (Vin.III,112; IV,290); also cicca: see sañ°. -- grd. cetabba (for *cetetabba only at J.IV,157, v. l. ceteyya, expl. by cintetabba); -- pp. cetayita (q. v.). Cp. also cetanā.

Note. The relation in the use of the two forms is that cet is the older & less understood form, since it is usually expl^d by cint, whereas cint is never expl^d by cet & therefore appears to be the more frequent & familiar form.

Meaning: (a) (intr.) to think, to reflect, to be of opinion, Grouped with (phuṭṭho) vedeti, ceteti, sañjānāti he has the feeling, the awareness (of the feeling), the consciousness S.IV,68. Its seat is freq. mentioned with manasā (in the heart), viz. manasā diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Sn.834; na pāpaṁ manasā pi cetaye Pv.II,9⁷; J.I,279; PvA.13 (he thought it over), ib. (evaṁ c. you think so); Sdhp.289 (īdisaṁ c. id.) Mhvs VII.18, 32; Miln.233 (cintayati), 406 (cintayitabba). -- Prohibitive: mā cintayi don’t think about it, don’t worry, don’t be afraid, never mind J.I,50, 292, 424; III,289; VI,176; pl. mā cintayittha J.I,457; IV,414; VI,344; Vism.426; DhA.I,12; III,196; also mā cintesi J.III,535. -- (b) (with Acc.) to ponder, think over, imagine, think out, design, scheme, intend, plan. In this sense grouped with (ceteti) pakappeti anuseti to intend, to start to perform, to carry out S.II,65. maraṇaṁ ākaṅkhati cetayati (ponders over) S.I,121; acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni A.II,80; cetabba-rūpa (a fit object of thought, a good thought) J.IV,157 (=cintetabba); loka-cintaṁ c. S.V,447; ajjhattarūpe, etc. ceteti Vin.III,113; maṅgalāni acintayuṁ Sn.258; diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Sn.834; kiṁ cintesi J.I,221; sokavinayan’--upāyaṁ c. to devise a means of dispelling the grief PvA.39. -- Esp. with pāpaṁ & pāpakaṁ to intend evil, to have ill-will against (c. Dat.): mā pāpakaṁ akusalaṁ cittaṁ cinteyyātha S.V,418; na p. cetaye manasā pi Pv.II,9⁷ (=cinteyya, piheyya PvA.116); p. na cintetabba PvA.114; tassā p. acetayi Pv.I,6⁶ (=cetesi PvA.34); kiṁ amhākaṁ cintesi what do you intend against us? J.I,211. -- (c) (with Dat.) (restricted to ceteti) to set one’s heart on, to think upon, strive after, desire: āgatipunabbhavāya c. to desire a future rebirth S.IV,201; vimokkhāya c. to strive after emancipation S.III,121; attavyābadhāya c. M.III,23=A.I,157=S.IV,339; pabbajjāya c. It.75; rakkhāya me tvaṁ vihito . . . udāhu me cetayase vadhāya J.III,146 -- acinteyya that which must not or cannot be thought A.II,80 (cattāri °āni four reflections to be avoided); VvA.323 (a. buddhânubhāva unimaginable majesty of a B.). (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cint + e), 思考，反省，考虑。【过】 cintesi。【现分】 cintenta,cintayamāna。【独】 cintetvā, cintiya。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cint+e), 思考，反省，考虑。【过】cintesi。【现分】cintenta, cintayamāna。【独】cintetvā, cintiya。cinteyyaṁ, fpp. n.Acc.sg.。cintaye, Opt.3sg.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cinteyya: {'def': '【形】应该考虑的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】应该考虑的。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cintin: {'def': '[adj. to cintā] only --°: thinking of, having one’s thoughts on A.I,102 (duccintita° & su°); Sn.174 (ajjhatta°; v. l. B. °saññin) 388; J.III,306=IV.453= V.176=V.478; Miln.92. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cintita: {'def': '[pp. of cinteti, cp. also cintaka] (a) (adj.) thought out, invented, devised S.I,137 (dhammo asuddho samalehi c.); III,151 (caraṇaṁ nāma cittaṁ citten’eva c.); Pv.II,6¹³ (mantaṁ brahma°, expl. PvA.97 by kathitaṁ). -- (b) (nt.) a thought, intention, in duc° & su° (bad & good) A.I,102; ThA.76; --matta as much a, a thought, Loc. cintita-matte (yeva) at the mere thoughts just as he thought it DhA.I,326 (=cintita kkhaṇe in the moment of thinking it, p. 329). (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cinteti 的【过分】), 已想出，已发明，已设计。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cinteti 的【过分】), 已想出，已发明，已设计。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cintā: {'def': '【阴】 Cintana, 【中】思想，思考，考虑。 ~maṇi, 【阳】如意珠宝。~maya, 【形】由想法所组成的，心造的。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】Cintana,【中】思想，思考，考虑。cintāmaṇi,【阳】如意珠宝。cintāmaya,【形】由想法所组成的，心造的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[to cit, cinteti] “the act of thinking” (cp. citti), thought S.I,57; Pug.25; Dhs.16, 20, 292; Sdhp.165, 216. -- loka° thinking over the world, philosophy S.V,447; A.II,80.

--kavi “thought-poetry,” i. e. original poetry (see kavi) A.II,230; --maṇi the jewel of thought, the true philosopher’s stone VvA.32; N. of a science J.III,504; --maya consisting of pure thought, metaphysical D.III,219; J.IV,270; Vbh.324; Nett 8, 50, 60 (°mayin, of paññā); Vism.439 (id.). (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cintī: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 思考。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 思考。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cināti: {'def': '(ci+nā), 堆积，收集，累积。【过】cini,【过分】cita。【现分】cinanta, cinamana。【独】cinitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ci + nā), 堆积，收集，累积。【过】 cini, 【过分】cita。【现分】 cinanta, cinamana。【独】 cinitvā。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. cinoti & cayati, ci, to which also kāya, q. v. See also caya, cita] to heap up, to collect, to accumulate. Inf. cinituṁ Vin.II,152; pp. cita (q. v.). Pass. cīyati J.V,7. Caus. cināpeti to construct, to build J.VI,204; Miln.81. -- Note cināti at J.II,302 (to weave) is to be corr. to vināti (see Kern, Toev. s. v.). -- Cp. ā°, pa°, vi°.-Note. cināti also occurs as cinati in pa°. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cipiṭa: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. to cip (?) see next: cp. Sk. cipiṭa grain flattened after boiling] pressed flat, flattened VvA.222. To be read also at J.VI,185 for vippita. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cippiyamāna: {'def': '[ppr. Pass. of cip, see cipiṭa] crushed flat (Rh. D.; cp. also Kern Toev.) Miln.261. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cira: {'def': '【形】持久的。 ~kālaŋ, 【副】长久。 ~ṭṭhitika, 【形】持久的，永久的。 ~taraŋ,【副】更长久。 ~nivāsī,【形】长久居民。 ~pabbajita, ~dikkhita,【形】出家长久的。 ~ppavāsī, 【形】离家长久的人。 ~rattaŋ, 【副】长久。 ~rattāya, 【副】有很长的一段时间，以长久地。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'cima﹐【形】持久的。cirakālaṁ,【副】长久。ciraṭṭhitika,【形】持久的，永久的。cirataraṁ,【副】更长久。ciranivāsin,【形】长久居民。cirapabbajita, ciradikkhita,【形】出家长久的。cirappavāsī,【形】离家长久的人。cirarattaṁ,【副】长久。cirarattāya,【副】有很长的一段时间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic. cira, perhaps to *queịe to rest, cp. Lat. quiēs, civis; Goth. hveila; Ohg. wīlōn; E. while] long (of time), usually in cpds. & as adv. Either ciraṁ (Acc.) for a long time Sn.678, 730, 1029; Dh.248; Kh VII.5; J.II,110; IV,3; Pv.II,3³³ or cirena (Instr.) after a long time Vin.IV,86; DhsA.239; or cirāya (Dat.) for long Dh.342. cirassa (Gen.) see cirassaṁ. -- cirataraṁ (compar.) for a (comparatively) long time, rather long A.III,58; Pv.II,8⁷. cir-â-ciraṁ continually Vin.IV,261; J.V,233. -- acira not long (ago) lately, newly: °arahattappatta S.I,196; °pabbajita S.I,185; °parinibbute Bhagavati shortly after the death of the Bhagavant D.I,204, etc.; Sn.p. 59.

--kālaṁ (adv.) a long time freq. e. g. PvA.19, 45, 60, 109; --ṭṭhitika perpetual, lasting long A.IV,339 (opp. pariyāpajjati); Vv 80¹; Pug.32, 33; Vism.37, 175; DA.I,3. --dikkhita (not °dakkhita) having long since been initiated S.I,226=J.V,138 (=cirapabbajita); --nivāsin dwelling (there) for a long time S.II,227; --paṭika [cp. Sk. ciraṁ prati] long since, adj. constr. in conformity w. the subject Vin.I,33; D.II,270= S.III,120; --pabbajita having long since become a wanderer A.III,114; Sn.p. 92; DA.I,143; --ppavāsin (adj.) long absent Dh.219 (=cirappavuttha DhA.III,293). --rattaṁ (adv.) for a long time Sn.665, 670; J.IV,371; and --rattāya id. J.II,340; Pv.I,9⁴. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cirassaŋ: {'def': '【副】很长久地，最后。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cirassaṁ: {'def': '【副】很长久地，最后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [origin. Gen. of cira=cirasya] at last Vin.II,195; D.I,179; S.I,142; J.II,439; III,315; IV,446 (read cirassa passāmi); V,328; Th.1, 868; ThA.217; PvA.60. -- na cirass’eva shortly after D.III,11; J.IV,2; DhA.III,176; PvA.32. -- sucirass’eva after a very long while S.I,193. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ciraŋ: {'def': '【副】（以）长久地。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ciraṁ: {'def': 'cimaṁ﹐【副】(以)长久地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cirena: {'def': '【副】在长久之后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】在长久之后。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cirāya: {'def': '【副】以长久地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】以长久地。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cirāyati: {'def': '(cira 的【派】), 逗留，延迟。【过】cirāyi。【过分】cirāyita。【现分】cirāyanta。【独】cirāyitva。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cira 的【派】), 逗留，延迟。【过】 cirāyi。【过分】 cirāyita。【现分】 cirāyanta。【独】 cirāyitva。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. cirayati, v. denom. fr. cira] to be long, to tarry, to delay, DhA.I,16; VvA.64, 208; cp. ciraṁ karoti id. J.II,443. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cirīṭa: {'def': '[Sk. ciri, cp. kīra] a parrot J.V,202 (in compⁿ cirīti°). (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cita: {'def': '[pp. of cināti] heaped; lined or faced with (cp. citaka²) pokkharaṇiyo iṭṭhakāhi citā D.II,178, cp. Vin.II,123.

--antaraṁsa “one whose shoulder-hole is heaped up,” one who has the shoulders well filled out (Ep. of a Mahāpurisa) D.II,18; III,144, 164. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cināti 的【过分】), 已堆积，已排列，已覆以一层不同的东西。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cināti 的【过分】), 已堆积，已排列，已覆以一层不同的东西。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Citaka: {'def': '【阳】火葬用柴木。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】火葬用柴木。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Citakā (f.) [from ci, cināti to heap up].- 1. a heap, a pile, esp. a funeral pile; a tumulus D.II,163; cp, II.10¹⁴. J.I,255; V,488; VI,559, 576; DA.I,6; DhA.I,69; II,240; VvA.234; PvA.39. -- 2. (adj.) inlaid: suvaṇṇa°, with gold J.VI,218 (=°khacita). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Citi: {'def': '【阴】堆，石堆纪念碑，石塚，堆石界标。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [From ci, cināti, to heap up] a heap, made of bricks J.VI,204 (city-avayata-piṭṭhikā). See also cetiya. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】堆，石堆纪念碑，石冢，堆石界标。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Citra: {'def': '【形】杂色的，多样化的，美丽的。参考 Citta 2。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Citta 2。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '=citta³, the month Chaitra, KhA 192 (°māsa). (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Citta: {'def': '【中】心，想法。【阳】制多月（月份名，大约在三月至四月之间）。~kkhepa, 【阳】发狂，思想扰乱。 ~passaddhi, 【阴】心轻安，心平静。~mudutā,【阴】心柔软性，心的可塑性。 ~vikkhepa,【阳】疯狂。 ~santāpa,【阳】悲伤。~samatha, 【阳】心镇定。 ~anupassanā, 【阴】心评论。~ābhoga, 【阳】考虑。 ~ujjukatā, 【阴】心正直性。 ~uttrāsa, 【阳】恐怖，恐惧。 ~uppāda, 【阳】心生起。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1﹐Citra,【形】杂色的，多样化的，多种形式的，美丽的。【中】画，照片。cittakata,【形】装饰的，心造的。cittakathika, cittakathī,【形】有才气的演说者，雄辩家。cittakamma,【中】绘画，画的艺术，装饰品。cittakāra,【阳】画家，装饰者。cittatara,【形】更不同的，更多元化的。cittāgāra,【中】画廊。cittaniyāma,【阳】心的定律(Mohavicchedanī断除愚痴(CS:p.78)：Yathāvuttena bhavaṅgāvajjanādikiccakkameneva cittappavatti cittaniyāmo nāma.(有分、转向等作用，以心生起的方式进行，称为「心的定律」。) Dhs.#11.：Katamā tasmiṁ samaye cittassekaggatā hoti? Yā tasmiṁ samaye cittassa 1ṭhiti 2saṇṭhiti 3avaṭṭhiti 4avisāhāro 5avikkhepo 6avisāhaṭamānasatā 7samatho 8samādhindriyaṁ 9samādhibalaṁ 10sammāsamādhi--ayaṁ tasmiṁ samaye cittassekaggatā hoti.(《法集论》：在此时什么是‘心一境性’？此时是凡是心1住、2等住、3坚住、4不散、5不乱、6不散乱性、7奢摩他、8定根、9定力、10正定--即此时是心一境性)。)) 《法集论注释》(殊胜义)(CS:DhsA.pg.188)：「‘一境性’之义，住於所缘上，不能动摇，为‘住’。」(Ekaggatāniddese acalabhāvena ārammaṇe tiṭṭhatīti ṭhiti.)「此外，相应法所缘上，已组合之后而住立，为‘等住’。」(Apica sampayuttadhamme ārammaṇamhi sampiṇḍetvā tiṭṭhatīti saṇṭhiti.)「於所缘上，已潜入，已进入，为‘坚住’。」(ārammaṇaṁ ogāhetvā anupavisitvā tiṭṭhatīti avaṭṭhiti.)「生起掉举、疑，心烦意乱的相反，为‘不散’。处於掉举、疑、扰乱已离去的心。」(Uddhacca-vicikicchā-vasena pavattassa visāhārassa paṭipakkhato avisāhāro. Uddhaccavicikicchāvaseneva gacchantaṁ cittaṁ vikkhipati nāma.)「处於掉举、疑、扰乱已离去的心。如此，这种不扰乱，为‘不乱’。」(Uddhaccavicikicchāvaseneva gacchantaṁ cittaṁ vikkhipati nāma. Ayaṁ pana tathāvidho vikkhepo na hotīti avikkhepo.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. caitra, the first month of the year: MarchApril, orig. N. of the star Spica (in Virgo); see E. Plunket, Ancient Calendars, etc., pp. 134 sq., 171 sq.] N. of the month Chaitra PvA.135. Cp. Citra-māsa KhA 192. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ & Citra (adj.) [to cetati; *(s)qait to shine, to be bright, cp. Sk. citra, Sk. P. ketu, Av. ciprō, Lat. caelum, Ags. hador, Ohg. heitar, see also citta²] variegated, manifold, beautiful; tasty, sweet, spiced (of cakes), J.IV,30 (geṇḍuka); Dh.171 (rājaratha); Vv 47⁹; Pv.II,11² (aneka°); IV,3¹³ (pūvā=madhurā PvA.251). Citta (nt.) painting Th.1, 674. -- Sn.50 (kāmā=Nd² 240 nānāvaṇṇā), 251 (gāthā); J.V,196 (geṇḍuka), 241 VI,218. -- sucitta gaily coloured or dressed S.I,226 (b); Dh.151 (rājaratha); Pv.I,10⁹ (vimāna). --akkhara (adj.) with beautiful vowels S.II,267 (Cp. °vyañjana); --attharaka a variegated carpet DA.I,256; --āgāra a painted house, i. e. furnished with pictures; a picture gallery Vin.IV,298; --upāhana a gaily coloured sandal D.I,7≈; --kata adorned, dressed up M.II,64= Dh.147=Th.1, 769; DhA.III,109 (=vicitta); --katha (adj.) =next S.I,199 (+bahussuta); --kathin a brilliant speaker, a wise speaker, an orator, preacher. Freq. comb^d w. bahussuta (of wide knowledge, learned), e. g. paṇḍita . . . medhāvin kalyāṇapaṭibhāna S.IV,375, samaṇa bahussuta c. uḷāra Vv 84²⁶. -- A.III,58; J.I,148; Miln.1, 21; --kathika=°kathin A.I,24; Th.2, 449 (+bahussuta), expl^d at ThA.281 by cittadhammakatha; --kamma decoration, ornamentation, painting J.IV,408; VI,333; Miln.278; Vism.306; PvA.147; DhsA.334; (m.) a painter J.VI,481; --kāra a painter, a decorator (cp. rajaka) S.II,101=III,152; Th.2, 256; J.VI,333; --chatta at J.VI,540 to be changed into °patta; --patta (adj.) having variegated wings J.VI,540, 590; --pāṭalī (f.) N. of a plant (the “pied” trumpet-flower) in the world of Asuras J.I,202; DhA.I,280; --pekhuna having coloured wings J.I,207; VI,539; --bimba (-mukhi) (a woman whose face is) like a painted image J.V,452 (cp cittakata); --miga the spotted antelope J.VI,538; --rūpa (nt.) a wonder, something wonderful J.VI,512; as adv. °ṁ (to citta²?) easily Vin.II,78=III,161; IV,177, 232; --latā the plant Rubia Munjista J.VI,278; °vana the R.M. grove, one of Indra’s gardens [Sk. caitraratha] J.I,52, 104; II,188; VI,590, etc.; --vitāna a bright canopy DhA.IV,14; --vyañjana (adj.) with beautiful consonants (cp. °akkhara) S.II,267=A.I,73=III,107; --sāṇī variegated cloth J.II,290; DhA.IV,14; --sālā a painted room or picture gallery DA.I,253; --sibbana with fine sewing; a cover of various embroidery Sn.304= J.IV,395; J.VI,218. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '心。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '3﹐【阳】制多月(月份名，大约在三月至四月之间，农历2月16至3月15)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [Sk. citta, orig. pp. of cinteti, cit, cp. yutta› yuñjati, mutta›muñcati. On etym. from cit. see cinteti].

I. Meaning: the heart (psychologically), i. e. the centre & focus of man’s emotional nature as well as that intellectual element which inheres in & accompanies its manifestations; i. e. thought. In this wise citta denotes both the agent & that which is enacted (see kamma II. introd.), for in Indian Psychology citta is the seat & organ of thought (cetasā cinteti; cp. Gr. frήn, although on the whole it corresponds more to the Homeric qumόs). As in the verb (cinteti) there are two stems closely allied and almost inseparable in meaning (see § III,), viz. cit & cet (citta & cetas); cp. ye should restrain, curb, subdue citta by ceto, M.I,120, 242 (cp. attanā coday’attānaṁ Dhp 379 f.); cetasā cittaṁ samannesati S.I,194 (cp. cetasā cittaṁ samannesati S.I,194). In their general use there is no distinction to be made between the two (see § III,). -- The meaning of citta is best understood when explaining it by expressions familiar to us, as: with all my heart; heart and soul; I have no heart to do it; blessed are the pure in heart; singleness of heart (cp. ekagga); all of which emphasize the emotional & conative side or “thought” more than its mental & rational side (for which see manas & viññāṇa). It may therefore be rendered by intention, impulse, design; mood, disposition, state of mind, reaction to impressions. It is only in later scholastic lgg. that we are justified in applying the term “thought” in its technical sense. It needs to be pointed out, as complementary to this view, that citta nearly always occurs in the singular (=heart), & out of 150 cases in the Nikāyas only 3 times in the plural (=thoughts). The substantiality of citta (cetas) is also evident from its connection with kamma (heart as source of action), kāma & the senses in general. ‹-› On the whole subject see Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. Eth. introd. & Bud. Psy. ch. II.

II. Cases of citta (cetas), their relation & frequency (enum^d for gram. purposes). -- The paradigma is (numbers denoting %, not including cpds.): Nom. cittaṁ; Gen. (Dat.) cetaso (44) & cittassa (9); Instr. cetasā (42) & cittena (3); Loc. citte (2) & cittamhi (2). -- Nom. cittaṁ (see below). Gen. cittassa only (of older passages) in c° upakkileso S.III,232; V,92; A.I,207; c° damatho Dh.35 & c° vasena M.I,214; III,156. Instr. cittena only in S.I, viz. cittena nīyati loko p. 39; upakkiliṭṭha° p. 179; asallīnena c° p. 159. Loc. citte only as Loc. abs. in samāhite citte (see below) & in citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi v. hoti A.I,162; cittamhi only S.I,129 & cittasmiṁ only S.I,132. -- Plural only in Nom. cittāni in one phrase: āsavehi cittāni (vi) mucciṁsu “they purified their hearts from intoxications” Vin.I,35; S.III,132; IV,20; Sn.p. 149; besides this in scholastic works=thoughts, e. g. Vbh.403 (satta cittāni).

III, Citta & cetas in promiscuous application. There is no cogent evidence of a clear separation of their respective fields of meaning; a few cases indicate the rôle of cetas as seat of citta, whereas most of them show no distinction. There are cpds. having both citta° & ceto° in identical meanings (see e. g. citta-samādhi & ceto°), others show a preference for either one or the other, as ceto is preferred in ceto-khila & ceto-vimutti (but: vimutta-citta), whereas citta is restricted to combⁿ w. upakkilesa, etc. The foll. sentences will illustrate this. Vivaṭena cetasā sappabhāsaṁ cittaṁ bhāveti “with open heart he contemplates a radiant thought” S.V,263=D.III,223=A.IV,86; cetasā cittaṁ samannesati vippamuttaṁ “with his heart he scrutinizes their pure mind” S.I,194; vigatâbhijjhena cetasā is followed by abhijjāya cittaṁ parisodheti D.III,49; anupārambhacitto bhabbo cetaso vikkhepaṁ pahātuṁ A.V,149; cetaso vūpasamo foll. by vūpasanta-citto A.I,4; samāhite citte foll. by ceto-samādhi D.I,13≈; cittaṁ paduṭṭhaṁ foll. by ceto-padosa A.I,8; cp. It. 12, 13; cetaso tato cittaṁ nivāraye “a desire of his heart he shall exclude from this” S.IV,195.

IV. Citta in its relation to other terms referring to mental processes.

1. citta≈hadaya, the heart as incorporating man’s personality: hadayaṁ phaleyya, cittavikkhepaṁ pāpuṇeyya (break his heart, upset his reason) S.I,126; cittaṁ te khipissāmi hadayan te phālessāmi id. S.I,207, 214; Sn.p. 32; kāmarāgena cittaṁ me pariḍayhati S.I,188›nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṁ Miln.318 (“my heart is on fire”); cp. abhinibbutatto Sn.343=apariḍayhamāna-citto SnA 347; cittaṁ adhiṭṭhahati to set one’s heart on, to wish DhA.I,327.

2. c. as mental status, contrasted to (a) physical status: citta›kāya, e. g. kilanta° weary in body & mind D.I,20=III,32; ātura° S.III,2--5; nikaṭṭha° A.II,137; ṭhita° steadfast in body & soul (cp. ṭhitatta) S.V,74; °passaddhi quiet of body & soul S.V,66. The Commentators distinguish those six pairs of the saṅkhārākkhandha, or the cetasikas: citta-kāya-passaddhi, --lahutā, etc. as quiet, buoyancy, etc., of (a) the viññāṇakkhandha (consciousness), (b) the other 3 mental khandhas, making up the nāma-kāya (DhsA.150 on Dhs. 62: Compendium of Phil. 96, n. 3); passaddha° D.III,241, 288. -- (b) intellectual status: citta›manas & viññāṇa (mind›thought & understanding). These three constitute the invisible energizer of the body, alias mind in its manifestations: yañ ca vuccati cittan ti vā mano ti vā viññāṇan ti vā: (a) ayaṁ attā nicco dhuvo, etc., D.I,21; (b) tatr’assutavā puthujjano n’âlaṁ nibbindituṁ, etc. S.II,94; (g) taṁ rattiyā ca divasassa ca añña-d-eva uppajjati aññaṁ nirujjhati S.II,95, cf. ThA. 1 on 125. -- Under ādesanā-pāṭihāriya (thought reading): evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṁ (thus is your thought & thus your mind, i. e. habit of thinking) D.I,213=III,103; A.I,170. -- niccaṁ idaṁ c. niccaṁ idaṁ mano S.I,53; cittena niyyati loko “by thoughts the world is led” S.I,39=A.II,177 (cp. KS 55); apatiṭṭhita-citto ādīna-manaso avyāpaṇnacetaso S.V,74; vyāpanna-citto paduṭṭha-manasaṅkappo S.III,93; paduṭṭha-citto=paduṭṭha-manaso PvA.34, 43. 3. c. as emotional habitus: (a) active=intention, contrasted or compared with: (a) will, c. as one of the four samādhis, viz. chanda, viriya, c., vīmaṁsā D.III,77; S.V,268; Vbh.288. -- (b) action, c. as the source of kamma: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṁ hoti “when the intention is evil, the deed is evil as well” A.I,262; cittaṁ appamāṇaṁ . . . yaṁ kiñci pamāṇakataṁ kammaṁ, etc. A.V,299. -- Esp. in contrast to kāya & vācā, in triad kāyena vācāya cittena (in deed & speech & will otherwise as k. v. manasā, see under kāya III,) S.II,231, 271=IV.112. Similarly taṁ vācaṁ appahāya (cittaṁ°, diṭṭhiṁ°) S.IV,319=D.III,13, 15; & under the constituents of the dakkhiṇeyyasampatti as khetta-sampatti, citta°, payoga° (the recipient of the gift, the good-will, the means) VvA.30, 32. -- (b) passive=mood, feelings, emotion, ranging with kāya & paññā under the (3) bhāvanā D.III,219; S.IV,111; A.III,106; cp. M.I,237; Nett 91; classed with kāya vedanā dhammā under the (4) satipaṭṭhānas D.II,95, 100, 299 sq.; S.V,114, etc. (see kāya cpds.). As part of the sīlakkhandha (with sīla ethics, paññā understanding) in adhisīla, etc. Vin.V,181; Ps.II,243; Vbh.325; cp. tisso sampadā, scil. sīla, citta, diṭṭhi (see sīla & cp. cetanā, cetasika) A.I,269. -- citta & paññā are frequently grouped together, e. g. S.I,13 = 165; D.III,269; Th.I,125 sq. As feeling citta is contrasted with intellection in the group saññā c. diṭṭhi A.II,52; Ps.II,80; Vbh.376.

4. Definitions of citta (direct or implied): cittan ti viññāṇaṁ bhūmikavatthu-ārammaṇa-kiriyādi-cittatāya pan’etaṁ cittan ti vuttaṁ DhA.I,228; cittan ti mano mānasaṁ KhA 153; cittaṁ manoviññāṇaṁ ti cittassa etaṁ vevacanaṁ Nett 54. yaṁ cittaṁ mano mānasaṁ hadayaṁ paṇḍaraṁ, etc. Dhs.6=111 (same for def. of manindriya, under § 17; see Buddh. Psych.). As rūpâvacara citta at Vism.376.

V. Citta in its range of semantical applications: (1) heart, will, intention, etc. (see I.).

(a) heart as general status of sensory-emotional being; its relation to the senses (indriyāni). A steadfast & constrained heart is the sign of healthy emotional equilibrium, this presupposes the control over the senses; samādahaṁsu cittaṁ attano ujukaṁ akaṁsu, sārathī va nettāni gahetvā indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā S.I,26; ujugato-citto ariyasāvako A.III,285; ṭhita c. S.I,159≈; A.III,377=IV.404 (+ānejjappatta); c. na kampati Sn.268; na vikampate S.IV,71; opp. capalaṁ c. Dh.33; khitta° a heart unbalanced A.II,52 (+visaññin); opp.: avikkhitta° A.V,149; PvA.26; c. rakkhitaṁ mahato atthāya saṁvattati a guarded heart turns to great profit A.I,7; similarly: c. dantaṁ, guttaṁ, saṁvutaṁ ibid. -- cittaṁ rakkhetha medhāvī cittaṁ guttaṁ sukhāvahaṁ Dh.36; cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutassa viharato cittaṁ vyāsiñcati . . . rūpesu S.IV,78; ye cittaṁ saññamessanti mokkhanti Mārabandhanā “from the fetters of Māra those are released who control their heart” Dh.37; pāpā cittaṁ nivāraye Dh.116; bhikkhuno c. kulesu na sajjati, gayhati, bajjhati S.II,198 (cp. Schiller: “Nicht an die Güter hänge dein Herz”).

(b) Contact with kāma & rāga: a lustful, worldly, craving heart. -- (a) kāmā: kāmā mathenti cittaṁ Sn.50; S.IV,210; kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi S.I,188; kāme nâpekkhate cittaṁ Sn.435; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṁ Dh.371; manussakehi kāmehi cittaṁ vuṭṭhapetvā S.V,409; na uḷāresu kāmaguṇesu bhogāya cittaṁ namati A.IV,392; S.I,92; kāmāsavā pi cittaṁ vimuccati A.II,211, etc.; kāmesu c. na pakkhandati na ppasīdati na sanṭiṭṭhati (my h. does not leap, sit or stand in cravings) D.III,239; kāmesu tibbasārāgo vyāpannacitto S.III,93; kāmāmise laggacitto (divide thus!) PvA.107. -- (b) rāgā: rāgo cittaṁ anuddhaṁseti (defilement harasses his heart) S.I,185; II,231=271; A.II,126; III,393; rāga-pariyuṭṭhitaṁ c. hoti A.III,285; sārattacitto S.IV,73; viratta° S.IV,74; Sn.235; PvA.168. ‹-› (g) various: patibaddha -- c. (fettered in the bonds of °) A.IV,60; Sn.37, 65; PvA.46, 151, etc. -- pariyādinna° (grasping, greedy), usually comb^d w. lābhena abhi‹-› bhūta: S.II,226, 228; IV,125; A.IV,160; D.III,249. -- upakkiliṭṭha° (etc.) (defiled) S.I,179; III,151, 232 sq.; V,92 (kāmacchando cittassa upakkileso); A.I,207; V,93 sq. -- otiṇṇa° fallen in love A.III,67; SnA 322.

(c) A heart, composed, concentrated, settled, selfcontrolled, mastered, constrained. -- (a) c. pasīdati (pasanna-°c) (a heart full of grace, settled in faith) S.I,98; A.I,207; III,248; Sn.434; pasanna°: A.IV,209, 213; Sn.316, 403, 690, cp. c. pakkhandati pasīdati S.III,133; A.III,245; also vippasanna°: S.V,144; Sn.506; cp. vippasannena cetasā Pv.I,10¹⁰. -- (b) c. santiṭṭhati in set s. sannisīdati, ekodihoti, samādhiyati (cp. cetaso ekodibhāva) S.II,273; IV,263; A.II,94, 157. -- (g) c. samādhiyati (samāhita-c°, cp. ceto-samadhi quiescence) D.I,13=III,30, 108; S.I,120, 129, 188; IV,78=351; A.I,164; II,211; III,17, 280; IV,177; Vbh.227; Vism.376, etc.-(d) supatiṭṭhita-c° always in formula catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu-s-c°: S.III,93; V,154; 301; D.III,101; A.V,195. -- (e) susaṇṭhita c. S.V,74. -- vasībhūta c. S.I,132; A.I,165. -- danta c. Dh.35. -- (d) “with purpose of heart,” a heart set on, striving after, endeavouring, etc. -- (a) cittaṁ namati (inclines his h. on, with dat: appossukkatāya S.I,137); nekkhamma-ninna S.III,233; viveka° D.III,283; A.IV,233; V,175. -- (b) cittaṁ padahati (pa+dhā: pro-ti/qhti) in phrase chandaṁ janeti vāyamati viriyaṁ ārabbhati c° ṁ paggaṇhāti padahati D.III,221; A.II,15=IV.462; S.V,269; Nd² 97; Nett 18. In the same ṣense pa-ni-dahati (in paṇidhi, paṇihita bent down on) (cp. ceto-paṇidhi) S.I,133 (tattha) IV.309 (dup°); V,157; Dh.42=Ud.39; Dh.43 (sammā°).

(e) An evil heart (“out of heart proceed evil thoughts” Mk. 7, 21) -- (a) paduṭṭha-c° (cp. ceto-padosa) D.I,20= III,32; A.I,8 (opp. pasanna-c°); IV,92; It.12, 13; Pv A 33, 43, etc. -- (b) vyāpanna-c°: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṁ hoti A.I,262. Opp. a°: S.IV,322; A.II,220. -- (g) samoha-c° (+sarāga, etc.) D.I,79; II,299; III,281; Vism.410, & passim.

(f) “blessed are the pure in heart,” a pure, clean, purified (cp. Ger. geläutert), emancipated, free, detached heart. (a) mutta-c°, vimutta-c°, etc. (cp. cetaso vimokkho, ceto-vimutti, muttena cetasā), āsavehi cittāni mucciṁsu S.III,132, etc.; vi° Sn.p. 149. -- vimutta: S.I,28 (+subhāvita), 29, 46=52; III,45 (+viratta), 90; IV,236 (rāgā); Sn.23 (+sudanta); Nd² 587. -- suvimutta: S.I,126, 141, 233; IV,164; A.III,245; V,29; Sn.975 (+satimā). -- (b) cittaṁ parisodheti M.I,347; A.II,211; S.IV,104. -- (g) alīna c. (unstained) S.I,159; A.V,149; Sn.68; 717; Nd² 97 (cp. cetaso līnatta).

(g) good-will, a loving thought, kindliness, tenderheartedness, love (“love the Lord with all your heart”). -- (a) metta-c° usually in phrase mettacittaṁ bhāveti “to nourish the heart with loving thought,” to produce good-will D.I,167; S.II,264; A.I,10; V,81; Sn.507 (cp. mettā-sahagatena cetasā). -- (b) bhāvita-c° “keep thy heart with all diligence” (Prov. 4, 23) S.I,188 (+susamāhita); IV,294; V,369 (saddhā-paribhāvita); A.I,6 (+bahulīkata, etc.); Sn.134 (=S.I,188); Dh.89=S.V,29; PvA.139.

(h) a heart calmed, allayed, passionless (santa° upasanta°) D.III,49; S.I,141; Sn.746.

(i) a wieldy heart, a heart ready & prepared for truth, an open & receptive mind: kalla°, mudu°, udagga°, pasanna° A.IV,186; kalla° PvA.38 (sanctified); lahu° S.I,201; udagga° Sn.689, 1028; S.I,190 (+mudita); mudu° PvA.54.

(k) Various phrases. Abbhuta-cittajātā “while wonder filled their hearts” S.I,178; evaṁcitto “in this state of mind” S.II,199; Sn.985; cittam me Gotamo jānāti (G. knows my heart) S.I,178; theyya-citto intending to steal Vin.III,58; āraddha-citto of determined mind M.I,414; S.II,21, cp. 107; Sn.p. 102; aññācittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti S.II,267; nānā° of varying mind J.I,295; nihīnacitto low-minded PvA.107; nikaṭṭha° A.II,137; āhata° A.IV,460=V.18; supahata° S.I,238 (cp. Miln.26); visaṅkhāragata° Dh.154; sampanna° Sn.164; vibbhanta° S.I,61=A.I,70=II.30=III,391. (2) thought: mā pāpakaṁ akusalaṁ cittaṁ cinteyyātha (do not think any evil thought) S.V,418; na cittamattam pi (not even one thought) PvA.3; mama cittaṁ bhaveyya (I should think) PvA.40. For further instances see Dhs.& Vbh.Indexes & cp. cpds. See also remarks above (under I.). Citta likened to a monkey Vism.425.

--âdhipati the influence of thought (adj. °pateyya) Nett 16; Dhs.269, 359; DhsA.213. Commentators define c. here as javanacittuppāda, our “thought” in its specialized sense, Compendium of Phil. 177, n. 2. --ânuparivattin consecutive to thought Dhs.671, 772, 1522; --ânupassanā the critique of heart, adj. °ânupassin D.II,299; III,221, 281; M.I,59 & passim (cp. kāy°); --āvila disturbance of mind Nd² 576 (°karaṇa); --ujjukatā rectitude of mind Dhs.51, 277, etc.; --uppāda the rise of a thought, i. e. intention, desire as theyya °ṁ uppādesi he had the intention to steal (a thought of theft) Vin.III,56; -- M.I,43; III,45; J.II,374; --ekaggatā “one-pointedness of mind,” concentration Nett 15, 16; Vism.84, 137, 158; DhA.III,425; ThA.75; cp. ekagga-citto A.III,175; --kali a witch of a heart, a witch-like heart Th.1, 356; --kallatā readiness of heart, preparedness of mind VvA.330; --kilesa stain of h. Dh.88 (DhA.II,162=pañca nīvaraṇā); --kelisā pastime of the mind Th.1, 1010; --kkhepa derangement of the mind, madness Vin.V,189=193 (ummāda+); A.III,219 (ummāda+); DhA.III,70 (=ummāda); PvA.39; Dh.138; cp. °vikkhepa; --cetasika belonging to heart & thought, i. e. mental state, thought, mind D.I,213; Dhs.1022 (-dhammā, Mrs. Rh. D.: emotional, perceptual & synthetic states as well as those of intellect applied to sense-impressions), 1282; Ps.I,84; Miln.87; Vism.61, 84, 129, 337; --dubbhaka a rogue of a heart, a rogue-like heart Th.1, 214; --pakopana shaking or upsetting the mind It.84 (dosa); --pamaddin crushing the h. Th.2, 357 (=ThA.243; v. l. pamāthin & pamādin); --pariyāya the ways (i. e. behaviour) of the h. A.V,160 (cp. ceto-paricca); --passaddhi calm of h., serenity of mind (cp. kāya°) S.V,66; Dhs.62; --bhāvanā cultivation of the h. M.III,149; --mala stain of h. PvA.17; --mudutā plasticity of mind (or thought) Dhs.62, 277, 325; --rucita after the heart’s liking J.I,207; --rūpaṁ according to intention, as much as expected Vin.I,222; II,78; III,161; IV,177, 232; --lahutā buoyancy of thought Dhs.62, 323, 1283; Vism.465; --vikkhepa (cp. °kkhepa) madness S.I,126 (+ummāda); Nett 27; Vism.34; --vippayutta disconnected with thought Dhs.1192, 1515; --visaṁsaṭṭha detached fr. thought Dhs.1194, 1517; --vūpasama allayment of one’s h. S.I,46; --saṅkilesa (adj.) with impure heart (opp. c.-vodāna) S.III,151; --saññatti conviction Miln.256; --santāpa “heart-burn,” sorrow PvA.18 (=soka); --samādhi (cp. ceto-samādhi) concentration of mind, collectedness of thought, self-possession S.IV,350; V,269; Vbh.218; --samodhāna adjustment, calming of thoughts ThA.45; --sampīḷana (adj.) h.‹-› crushing (cp. °pamaddin & °pakopana) Nett 29 (domanassa). --sahabhū arising together with thought Dhs.670, 769, 1520. --hetuka (adj.) caused by thought Dhs.667, 767. (Page 266)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】杂色的，多样化的，多种形式的，美丽的。【中】画，照片。~kata, 【形】装饰的，心造的。 ~kathika, ~kathī, 【形】有才气的演说者，雄辩家。 ~kamma, 【中】绘画，画的艺术，装饰品。 ~kāra, 【阳】画家，装饰者。 ~tara, 【形】更不同的，更多元化的。~āgāra, 【中】画廊。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2(‹cit思；Sk. citta, orig. pp. of cinteti, cit),【中】【阳】心( the heart (psychologically))，想法。Nom. cittaṁ; Gen. (Dat.) cetaso (44) & cittassa (9); Instr. cetasā (42) & cittena (3); Loc. citte (2) & cittamhi (2). -- Nom. cittaṁ. Gen. cittassa only (of older passages) in c° upakkileso S III.232; V.92; A I.207; c° damatho & c° vasena. Instr. cittena (cittena nīyati loko). Loc. citte(samāhite citte); cittamhi only S I.129 & cittasmiṁ. -- Plural only in Nom. cittāni (āsavehi cittāni (vi) mucciṁsu；they purified their hearts from intoxications”。cittakkhepa,【阳】发狂，思想扰乱。cittajaṭṭhamakarūpa﹐【中】心生八法聚。cittapassaddhi,【阴】心轻安，心平静。cittamudutā,【阴】心柔软性，心的可塑性。cittavikkhepa,【阳】疯狂。cittasantāpa,【阳】悲伤。cittasamatha,【阳】心镇定。cittanupassanā,【阴】心评论。cittābhoga,【阳】考虑。cittujjukatā,【阴】心(citta)的正直性。cittuttrāsa,【阳】恐怖，恐惧。cittuppāda,【阳】心生起。cittakāgata(梵cittaikāgrata)心一境性。SA.4.25.：Suvimuttacittoti arahattaphalavimuttiyā suṭṭhu vimuttacitto.(心得善解脱：阿罗汉果解脱是善心解脱)。DhsA.CS:p.92：Cintanaṭṭhena cittā, vicittaṭṭhena vā cittā.(以思想之义，为‘心’；以考虑之义，为‘心’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（居士名）吉答，（古音译：）质多罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '心', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Citta-lahutā: {'def': '-mudūta ,-kammaññatā ,-pāguññatā ,-ujukatā , s. lahutā .', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Cittaka: {'def': '【中】纹身，纹在额上的一个宗派标志。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】纹身，纹在额上的一个宗派标志。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² : see acittaka. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nt.) [to citta¹] a sectarian mark on the forehead in °dhara-kumma a tortoise bearing this mark, a landtortoise Miln.364, 408, cp. Miln.trsl. II.352. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(^a) & Citraka(^b) 1. (adj.)(^a) coloured J.IV,464. ‹-› 2. (m.)(^b) the spotted antelope J.VI,538. -- 3. (nt.) a (coloured) mark (on the forehead) Miln.408 (°dharakumma). -- f. cittakā a counterpane of many colours (DA.I,86 cittikā: vāna [read nāna°] citra-uṇṇā-may’attharaṇaṁ) Vin.I,192; II,163, 169; D.I,7; A.I,181≈. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cittakammaññatā: {'def': '﹐【阴】心适业性，去除心(citta)的不适业性(akammaññabhāva)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittakkhaṇa: {'def': '﹐心识刹那(心识生uppāda、住ṭhiti、灭bhaṅga的时间)，非常短暂的；在弹指间，即有数百亿个心识刹那(SA.12.61./II,99.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittalahutā: {'def': '﹐【阴】心轻快性，去除心(citta)的沉重(garubhāva)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittalapabbata: {'def': '【阳】结旦罗山，羯但罗山，庄严山(斯里兰卡的一座著名佛寺)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittamudutā: {'def': '﹐【阴】心柔软性，去除心(citta)的僵硬性(thambha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittapaguññatā: {'def': '﹐【阴】心练达性，使心健全。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittapassaddhi: {'def': '﹐【阴】心轻安，平静心(citta)的不安(daratha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittasamuṭṭhānarūpa: {'def': '﹐【中】心生色(或心等起色)，从结生心(paṭisandhi)之后的第一个有分心的「生时」(uppāda)开始产生心生色。结生心不能产生心生色，在投生时只有业生色(kammasamuṭṭhānarūpa)生起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittasaṅkhāra: {'def': '﹐【阳】心行。S.41.6./IV,294.作：“Saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajjantassa kho, gahapati, bhikkhuno vacīsaṅkhāro paṭhamaṁ nirujjhati, tato kāyasaṅkhāro, tato cittasaṅkhāro”ti.(居士！入想受灭定之比丘，先灭语行，然后灭身行，再灭心行。) SA.41.6./III,93.：Cittappaṭibaddhattā cittena saṅkharīyati nibbattīyatīti cittasaṅkhāro. (以心与心连接令行，令产生，为‘心行’。) SA.41.6./III,94.：ekūnatiṁsacetanāpi, saññā ca vedanā cāti ime dve dhammāpi cittasaṅkhārotveva vuccanti.(包括二十九心(12不善心，8大善心，5色界心，4无色界心)，及想、受这二法称为‘心行’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittatara: {'def': 'compar. of citta¹, more various, more varied. S.III,151 sq. -- a punning passage, thus: by the pro‹-› cedure (caraṇa) of mind (in the past) the present mind (citta) is still more varied. Cp. SA in loco: Asl. 66; Expositor 88. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cittatta: {'def': '(n.) = cittatā S.V,158. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cittatā: {'def': '[f. abstr. to citta²] “being of such a heart or mind,” state of mind, character S.III,152; IV,142 (vimutta°); V,158 (id.); A.V,145 sq. (upārambha°); Vbh.372 (id.); Vbh.359 (amudu°); PvA.13 (visuddhi°, noble character); paṭibaddha° (in love with) PvA.145, 147, 270. In S.III,152 l cittitā q. v. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】上色，彩色，(在【合】中) 如此的心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】上色，彩色，(在【合】中) 如此的心。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[f. abstr. to citta¹] SA on S.III,151 sq. (bhūmicittatāya dvāracittatāya ārammaṇacittatāya kammanānatta). (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cittavīthi: {'def': '﹐【阴】心路过程，六根缘取六境时，所产生识知的过程。心路过程之外的心，即：结生心、有分心、死亡心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Citti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. cit, cp. citta, cintā, cinteti, formation like mutti›muc, sitti›sic] “giving thought or heart” only in combⁿ w. kar: cittikaroti to honour, to esteem. Ger. cittikatvā M.III,24; A.III,172; Pv.II,9⁵⁵ (cittiṁ k.=pūjetvā PvA.135); Dpvs.I,2; -- acittikatvā M.III,22; A.IV,392. -- pp. cittikata thought (much) of Vin.IV,6 (& a°); Vbh.2. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cittikāra: {'def': '[see citti] respect, consideration VvA.178 (garu°), 242; PvA.26; Vbh.371 (a°); Vism.123 (cittī°), 188. (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cittita: {'def': '[pp. of citteti, denom. fr. citta¹] painted, variegated, varied, coloured or resplendent with (-°) S.III,152 (sic l. for cittatā) So SA, which, on p. 151, reads citten’eva cittitaṁ for cintitaṁ. Th.1, 736; 2, 390 (su°); Vv 36⁷; 40². (Page 268)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cittā: {'def': '【阴】角宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】角宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cittīkāra: {'def': '【阳】尊敬，考虑。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】尊敬，考虑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ciñcā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. ciñcā & tintiḍikā] the tamarind tree J.V,38 (°vana); SnA 78. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】罗望子(tamarind﹐豆科常绿乔木 (Tamarindus indica)；罗望子果，酸荚〔做清凉饮料等用〕马来文：pokok asam jawa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】罗望子（豆科常绿乔木 (Tamarindus indica)；罗望子果，酸荚〔做清凉饮料等用〕马来文：pokok asam jawa）。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ciṅgulaka: {'def': '【中】一个用棕榈叶等制的飞轮。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】一个用棕榈叶等制的飞轮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& °ika) (m. nt.) 1. a kind of plant Sn.239 (=kaṇavīra-pupphasaṇṭhāna-sīsa SnA 283). -- 2. a toy windmill, made of palm-leaves, etc. (DA.I,86: tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṁ vātappahārena paribbhamana-cakkaṁ) Vin.II,10; D.I,6 M.I,266; A.V,203; Miln.229. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ciṅgulāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. cingula] to twirl round, to revolve like a windmill A.I,112. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ciṅgula 的【派】), 旋转。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ciṅgula 的【派】), 旋转。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ciṇṇa: {'def': '(cināti 的【过分】), 已熟练，已经常做。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of carati] travelled over, resorted to, made a habit of; done, performed, practised J.III,541; Miln.360. -- su° well performed, accomplished S.I,42=214=Sn.181; Pv III,5⁶. -- Cp. ā°, pari°, vi°.

--ṭṭhāna the place where one is wont to go J.II,159; --mānatta one who performs the Mānatta Vin.IV,242; --vasin one who has reached mastership in (c. Loc.) ThA.74; Vism.154, 158, 164, 169, 331 sq., 376; der. --vāsibhāva DhsA.167 (read vasī°). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cināti 的【过分】), 已熟练，已经常做。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ciṇṇatta: {'def': '(nt.) [Der. fr. ciṇṇa] custom, habit Miln.57, 105. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ciṭ: {'def': 'i-ciṭi [redupl. interj.] fizz DA.I,137. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ciṭiciṭāyati: {'def': 'see cicciṭāyati; Vin.I,225; cp. Divy 606. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Coca: {'def': '【阳】香蕉。 ~pāna, 【中】香蕉饮料。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】香蕉(banana)。cocapāna,【中】香蕉饮料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Both derivation & meaning uncertain. The word is certainly not Aryan. See the note at Vinaya Texts II.132] the cocoa-nut or banana, or cinnamon J.V,420 (°vana); --°pāna a sweet drink of banana or cocoa-nut milk Vin.I,246. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Codaka: {'def': '【阳】原告(plaintiff)，指责的人，控诉者，难诘者。A.5.167./III,196.(cf. Vin.Cv.II,249.、Pari.V,161.)：舍利弗尊者说：难诘比丘若欲难诘他人，须於内心想起五法，方可谏诲(劝诫)他人。1.kālena vakkhāmi, no akālena(我须适时而语，非非时)。2.bhūtena vakkhāmi, no abhūtena(我须以真实而语，非以非真实)。3.saṇhena vakkhāmi, no pharusena(我须以柔软而语，非麤硬)。4.atthasaṁhitena vakkhāmi, no anatthasaṁhitena(我须为利益而语，非为无利益)。5.mettacitto vakkhāmi, no dosantaro(我须以慈心而语，非怀瞋)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】原告，指责的人，控诉者。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [to codeti] one who rebukes; exhorting, reproving Vin.I,173; II 248 sq.; V,158, 159 etc.; S.I,63; M.I,95 sq.; D.III,236; A.I,53; III,196; IV,193 sq.; DA.I,40. (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Codanā: {'def': '【阴】谴责，控告，诉苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [see codeti] reproof, exhortation D.I,230; III,218; A.III,352; Vin.V,158, 159; Vism.276. -- As ttg. in codan’atthe nipāto an exhortative particle J.VI,211 (for iṅgha); VvA.237 (id.); PvA.88 v. l. (for handa). (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】谴责，控告，诉苦。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Codetar: {'def': '[n. ag. to codeti] one who reproves, one who exacts blame, etc. Vin.V,184. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Codeti: {'def': '[Vedic codati & codayati, from cud] aor. acodayi (J.V,112), inf. codetuṁ, grd. codetabba; Pass. cujjati & codiyati; pp. cudita & codita (q. v.): Caus. codāpeti (Vin. III,165) to urge, incite, exhort; to reprove, reprimand, to call forth, to question; in spec. sense to demand payment of a debt (J.VI,69 iṇaṁ codetvā; 245; Sn.120 iṇaṁ cujjamāna being pressed to pay up; PvA.3 iṇayikehi codiyamāna) D.I,230; Vin.I,43 (āpattiyā c. to reprove for an offence), 114, 170 sq., 322 sq.; II,2 sq., 80 sq.; III,164, etc.; J.V,112; Dh.379; PvA.39, 74. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cud+e), 责备，数落，鼓动，敦促，刺激。【过】codesi。【现分】codenta, codayamāna。【独】codetvā, codiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cud + e), 刺激，责备，鼓动。【过】 codesi。【现分】 codenta,codayamāna。【独】 codetvā, codiya。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Codetu: {'def': '【阳】原告、控诉者。参考 Codaka。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】参考 Codaka。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Codita: {'def': '(codeti的【过分】) 敦促，难诘，责备，鼓动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of codeti, q. v.] urged, exhorted, incited; questioned Sn.819; J.VI,256; Pv.II,9⁶⁶; Vv 16¹; PvA.152; Sdhp.309. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cokkha: {'def': '(adj.) [Cp. Sk. cokṣa] clean J.III,21; °bhāva cleanliness M.I,39 (=visuddhibhāva; to be read for T mokkha°? See Trenckner’s note on p. 530). (Page 272)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cola: {'def': '(& coḷa) [Cp. Sk. coḍa] a piece of cloth, a rag S.I,34; J.IV,380; Miln.169; PvA.73; Sdhp.396. --bhisi a mat spread with a piece of cloth (as a seat) Vin.IV,40. ‹-› duccola clad in rags, badly dressed Vin.I,109; III,263. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Colaka: {'def': '(& coḷaka)=cola Vin.I,48, 296; II,113, 151, 174, 208, 225; Pv.II,1⁷; Miln.53 (bark for tinder?); DhA.II,173. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Copana: {'def': '(nt.) [cup, copati to stir, rel. to kup, see kuppati] moving, stirring DhA.IV,85;DhsA.92, 240, 323. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】搅拌，搅动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】搅拌，搅动。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cora: {'def': '[cur, corayati to steal; Dhtp 530=theyye] a thief, a robber Vin.I,74, 75, 88, 149; S.II,100, 128=A.II,240; S.II,188 (gāmaghāta, etc.); IV,173; M.II,74=Th.1, 786; A.I,48; II,121 sq.; IV,92, 278; Sn.135, 616, 652; J.I,264 (°rājā, the robber king); II,104; III,84; Miln.20; Vism.180 (sah’oḍḍha c.), 314 (in simile), 489 (rāja-puris’ânubandha°, in comparison), 569 (andhakāre corassa hattha-pasāraṇaṁ viya); DhA.II,30; PvA.3, 54, 274. -- mahā° a great robber Vin.III,89; D.III,203; A.I,153; III,128; IV,339; Miln.185. -- Often used in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87.

--âṭavi wood of robbers Vism.190; --upaddava an attack from robbers J.I,267; --kathā talk about thieves (one of the forbidden pastimes, see kathā) D.I,7=Vin.I,188≈; --ghātaka an executioner A.II,207; J.III,178; IV,447; V,303; PvA.5. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】小偷，强盗。 ~ghātaka, 【阳】强盗的刽子手。 ~upaddava, 【阳】来自强盗的攻击。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】小偷，强盗。coraghātaka,【阳】强盗的刽子手。corupaddava,【阳】来自强盗的攻击。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Coraka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. coraka] a plant used for the preparation of perfume J.VI,537. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Corikā: {'def': '【阴】窃盗。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'f. thieving, theft Vin.I,208; J.III,508; Miln.158; PvA.4, 86, 192; VvA.72 (=theyyā). (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】窃盗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Corovassikaṁ: {'def': 'at Nd² 40 (p. 85) read terovassikaṁ (as S.IV,185). (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Corī: {'def': '【阴】女小偷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) a female thief Vin.IV,276; J.II,363; (adj.) thievish, deceitful J.I,295. -- dāraka° a female kidnapper J.VI,337. (Page 273)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】女小偷。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Coḷa: {'def': '【阳】布料。coḷaraṭṭha,【中】矬拉国(Coḷa 的国家在印度南部)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '= Coḍa, m. チョーラ(Coḷa) [南印度Damilas人之國].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '= Coḍa, m. チョ一ラ [南印度ダミラ人の国].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】布料。 ~raṭṭha, 【中】矬拉国（Coḷa 的国家在印度南部）。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Coḷaka: {'def': '【中】布料，碎布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】布料，碎布。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Coḷiya: {'def': '【形】矬拉国的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】属于矬拉国的。(p130)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cubuka: {'def': '【中】下巴(chin)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】下巴。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cuddasa: {'def': '[contracted fr. catuddasa, Sk. caturdaśa, cp. catur] fourteen J.I,71; VI,8; Miln.12; DhA.III,120, 186. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】十四。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】十四。cuddasamaṁ﹐第十四。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cudita: {'def': '(codeti 的【过分】)。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of codati] being urged, receiving blame, being reproved Vin.I,173; II,250; II,250, 251; M.I,95 sq.; A.III,196 sq. --°ka id. Vin.V,115, 158, 161, 164. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(codeti 的【过分】)已刺激，已责备，已鼓动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cuditaka: {'def': '【阳】被告。【形】被责备的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】被告。【形】被责备的。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Culla: {'def': '& cūḷa (adj.) [Sk. kṣulla=kṣudra (P. khudda, see khuddaka), with c: k=cuṇṇa: kṣud] small, minor (opp. mahā great, major), often in conn. with names & titles of books, e. g. c° Anāthapiṇḍika=A jr. J.II,287, cp. Anglo-Indian chota sahīb the younger gentleman (Hind. chhota=culla); or Culla-vagga, the minor section (Vin.II,) as subordinate to Mahā-vagga (Vin.I,), Culla-niddesa the minor exposition (following upon Mahā-niddesa); culla-sīla the si ‘ple precepts of ethics (opp. mahā° the detailed sīla) D.I,5, etc. Otherwise only in cpds.:

--aṅgulī little finger DhA.II,86. --ûpaṭṭhāka a “lesser” follower, i. e. a personal attendant (of a thera) J.I,108 (cūl°); II,325 (cull°; DhA.I,135; II,260; cūḷ); --pitā an uncle (“lesser” father=sort of father, cp. Lat. matertera, patruus, Ger. Vetter=father jun.) J.II,5; III,456 (v. l. petteyya); PvA.107; DhA.I,221 (cūḷa°). (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '& cūḷa (Sk. ksulla=ksudra),【形】小的，未成年人(small, minor)。cullantevāsika,【阳】页。cullapitu,【阳】叔父(an uncle (“lesser” father=sort of father,)。cullupaṭṭhāka,【阳】私人随从，侍童。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】小的，未成年人。 ~antevāsika, 【阳】页。 ~pitu, 【阳】叔父。 ~upaṭṭhāka, 【阳】私人随从，侍童。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Culla-niddesa: {'def': '= Cūḷaniddesa 小義釈 [大義釈と共に小部経の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '= Cūḷaniddesa 小義釋 [跟大義釋合為義釋經,小部經之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Culla-vagga: {'def': '= Cūḷavagga 小品 [跟大品合為犍度部].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '= Cūḷavagga小品 [大品と共に犍度部をなす].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Culla-vaṃsa: {'def': '= Cūḷavaṃsa 小史, 小王統史 [大史と共にセイロン王統史].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '= Cūḷavaṃsa 小史, 小王統史 [跟大史合為獅子國(錫蘭)王統史].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Cullapanthaka: {'def': '= Cūḷapanthaka 朱利槃特, 周利槃特 [愚鈍の比丘, 仏弟子].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '= Cūḷapanthaka 朱利槃特, 周利槃特 [愚鈍的比丘, 佛弟子].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Cullāsīti: {'def': '[=caturāsīti] eighty-four J.VI,226 (mahākappe as duration of Saṁsāra); PvA.254 (id.). Also as cūḷāsīti q. v. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cumbati: {'def': '(cumb吻+a), 吻(台语：唚cim)。【过】cumbi。【过分】cumbita。【现分】cumbanta, cumbamāna。【独】cumbitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. cumbati. Dhtp 197 defines as “vadanasaṁyoge”] to kiss J.II,193; V,328; VI,291, 344; VvA.260. Cp. pari°. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cumb + a), 吻。【过】 cumbi。【过分】 cumbita。【现分】 cumbanta,cumbamāna。【独】 cumbitvā。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cumbaṭa: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Prk. cumbhala] (a) a coil; a pad of cloth, a pillow J.I,53 (dukūla°); II,21 (id.); VvA.73. -- (b) a wreath J.III,87. Cp. next. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'cumbaṭaka, 【中】垫，卷。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'cumbaṭaka,【中】垫，卷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cumbaṭaka: {'def': '(nt.) cumbaṭa, viz. (a) a pillow DhA.I,139; VvA.33, 165.-(b) a wreath J.IV,231 (puppha°); SnA 137; DhA.I,72 (mālā°). (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cunda: {'def': '（比库名）准达，（古音译：）纯陀，准陀', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'm. チュンダ, 純陀, 周那 [① 舎利弗の弟. ② 釈尊に最後の供食をした鍛工子].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. チュンダ(Cunda), 純陀, 周那 [① 舍利弗之弟. ② 對釋尊做最後供食的鍛工子].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'an artist who works in ivory J.VI,261 (Com: dantakāra); Miln.331. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cundakāra: {'def': '【阳】车床工。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'a turner J.VI,339. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】车床工。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cuta: {'def': '(cavati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cavati 的【过分】)。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of cavati; Sk. cyuta] 1. (adj.) shifted, disappeared, deceased, passed from one existence to another Vin.IV,216; Sn.774, 899; It.19, 99; J.I,139, 205; Pug.17. -- --accuta permanent. not under the sway of Death, Ep. of Nibbāna Dh.225. -- 2. (n.) in cpd. cutûpapāta disappearance & reappearance, transmigration, Saṁsāra (see cuti) S.II,67 (āgatigatiyā sati c° hoti); A.III,420; IV,178; DhA.I,259; usually in phrase sattānaṁ cutûpapāta-ñāṇa the discerning of the saṁsāra of beings D.I,82=M.I,248; D.III,111. As cutuppāta at A.II,183. Cp. jātisaṁsāra-ñāṇa. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cuti: {'def': '(梵cyuti, to cavati),【阴】改变(shifting)，死(passing away)，消失(vanishing)，脱离。D.22./II,305.︰“Katamañca, bhikkhave, maraṇaṁ? Yaṁ tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhā tamhā sattanikāyā 1cuti 2cavanatā 3bhedo 4antaradhānaṁ 5maccu 6maraṇaṁ 7kālaṅkiriyā 8khandhānaṁ bhedo 9kaḷevarassa nikkhepo 10jīvitindriyassupacchedo, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, maraṇaṁ.(复次，诸比丘！什么是‘死’呢？凡是各种有情(sattānaṁ已执著者)，於各种有情部类之1脱离(cuti f.)、2脱离状态(cavanatā f.)、3迸裂(bhedo m.)、4消失(antaradhānaṁ n.)、5死(maccu m.)、6死亡(maraṇaṁ n.)、7死期到(kālakiriyā f.)、8诸蕴之迸裂(khandhānaṁ bhedo m.)、9身躯的抛下(kaḷevarassa nikkhepo m.)、10命根全断(jīvitindriyassupacchedo m.)，这被叫做‘死’(idaṁ vuccati maraṇaṁ)。) S.22.95./III,143.︰“Imañca kāyaṁ ārabbha, bhūripaññena desitaṁ; Pahānaṁ tiṇṇaṁ dhammānaṁ, rūpaṁ passatha chaḍḍitaṁ. “āyu usmā ca viññāṇaṁ, yadā kāyaṁ jahantimaṁ; Apaviddho tadā seti, parabhattaṁ acetanaṁ. (此身之依存，广慧者所说，若了断三法，当视为弃物；当寿暖及识，若离此身时，永远遗弃卧，不思食他物。)【反】upapatti(显现﹑往生)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】改变，过世，消失。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. cyuti, to cavati] vanishing, passing away, decease, shifting out of existence (opp. upapatti, cp. also gati & āgati) D.I,162; S.II,3=42; III,53; M.I,49; Sn.643; Dh.419; J.I,19, 434; Vism.292, 460, 554; DhA.IV,228. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cuticitta: {'def': '﹐死心(脱离心)，死亡前最后一颗刹那心识。《阿毘达摩义广释》(Vibhv.)(CS:p.125)：Nibbattabhavato parigaḷhanaṁ cutikiccaṁ.(从已生的状态，进入不存在，为‘死心作用’。) maraṇāsannavīthi(maraṇa死+āsanna接近+vīthi心路过程), 临死心路过程。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cuṇṇa: {'def': '【中】粉，石膏（主要的成分是哪一生石灰和沙子；主要地被用于建筑物，但是也适用于皮肤当做一种肥皂—在沭浴方面搽粉于），肥皂粉。~vicuṇṇa, 【形】压碎，粉碎。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】粉，石膏(主要的成分是哪一生石灰和沙子；主要地被用於建筑物，但是也适用於皮肤当做一种肥皂—在沐浴方面搽粉於)，肥皂粉。cuṇṇavicuṇṇa,【形】压碎，粉碎。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. cūrṇa, pp. of carvati, to chew, to *sqer to cut, break up, as in Lat. caro, Sk. kṛṇāti (cp. kaṭu); cp Lit. kirwis axe, Lat. scrūpus sharp stone, scrupulus, scortum. See also calaka² & cp. Sk. kṣunna of kṣud to grind, to which prob. P. kuḍḍa] 1. pp. broken up, powdered; only in cpd. °vicuṇṇa crushed to bits, smashed up, piecemeal J.I,73; II,120, 159, 216; III,74. -- 2. (nt.) (a) any hard substance ground into a powder; dust, sand J.I,216; VvA.65 (paṁsu°); Pv III,3³ (suvaṇṇa° gold-dust; PvA.189=vālikā); DA.I,245 (id.); DhsA.12. -- (b) esp. “chunam” (Anglo-Ind.) i. e. a plaster, of which quicklime & sand are the chief ingredients & which is largely used in building, but also applied to the skin as a sort of soap-powder in bathing. Often comb^d with mattikā clay, in distinction of which c. is for delicate use (tender skin), whereas m. for rougher purposes (see Vin.I,202); cuṇṇāni bhesajjāni an application of c. Vin.I,202. -- Vin.I,47=52; II,220, 224 sq.; A.I,208; III,25; J.V,89. cuṇṇa-tela-vālaṇḍupaka Vism.142 (where Asl 115 reads cuṇṇaṁ vā telaṁ vā leḍḍūpaka). -- nahāniya° D.I,74=M.III,92; PvA.46; na- hāna° J.II,403, 404. -- gandha --cuṇṇa aromatic (bath) powder J.I,87, 290; III,276; candana° id. Miln.13, 18. -- iṭṭhaka° plaster (which is rubbed on the head of one to be executed) PvA.4, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X, beginning (stanza 5) “piṣṭa-cūrṇâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ‘haṁ paśūkṛtaḥ.”

--cālanī a mortar for the preparation of chunam Vin.I,202; --piṇḍa a lump of ch. Vin.III,260; IV,154 sq. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cuṇṇaka: {'def': '【中】香粉。 ~jāta。【形】变成粉的。 ~cālanī, 【阴】筛子。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】香粉。cuṇṇakajāta。【形】变成粉的。cuṇṇakacālanī,【阴】筛子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. cuṇṇa] (a) a preparation of chunam, paint (for the face, mukha°) D.I,7; M.II,64=Th.1, 771; J.V,302. -- (b) powder; cuṇṇakajātāni reduced to powder M.III,92 (aṭṭhikāni). -- f. °ikā in cuṇṇikamaṁsa mince meat J.I,243. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cuṇṇeti: {'def': '(cuṇṇ+e), 磨，使成粉末，压破。【过】cuṇṇesi。【现分】cuṇṇenta。【独】cuṇṇetvā。【过分】cuṇṇīyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. of cuṇṇa] to grind to powder, to crush; to powder or paint w. chunam Vin.II,107 (mukhaṁ); J.IV,457. -- ppr. pass cuṇṇiyamāna being ground J.VI,185. (Page 270)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cuṇṇ + e), 磨，使成粉末，压破。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 cuṇṇenta。【独】 cuṇṇetvā。【过分】 cuṇṇīyati。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cuṇṇita: {'def': '(Cuṇṇeti的【过分】) 磨(粉)，压破。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāga: {'def': '【阳】礼物，放弃，慷慨，舍。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(from cajati, to give up; Sk. tyāga‹ tyāj抛弃),【阳】舍施(台语sia2 si3)，放弃(abondoning)，舍(giving up)，抛弃(台语：扌穴掬hiat kak8)，捐弃(说文解字︰「捐」弃也)。cāgādhiṭṭhāna, 舍决意(the resolution of generosity, D.33./III,229。cāgānussati, 舍施随念。cāgakathā, 舍论(talk about munificence。cāgadhana, 舍财(七圣财之一，另外六个︰saddhādhana, sīladhana, hiridhana, ottappadhana, sutadhana, paññādhana。cāgasampadā (&cāgasampanna舍成就)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[from cajati, to give up, Vedic tyaj. Cp. Sk. tyāga] (a) abandoning, giving up, renunciation Vin.I,10; S.III,13, 26, 158; M.I,486; A.I,299. More freq. as: (b) liberality, generosity, munificence (n.) generous, munificent (adj.): sīlasampanno saddho purisapuggalo sabbe maccharino loke cāgena atirocati “he who is virtuous & religious excels all stingy people in generosity” A.III,34. In freq. comb^ns e. g. sacca dama dhiti c. Sn.188=S.I,215; sacca dama c. khanti Sn.189= S.I,215; mutta° (adj.) liberal, munificent, S.V,351=392. °paribhāvita citta “a heart bent on giving” S.V,309. In this sense cāga forms one of the (3, 4, 5 or 7) noble treasures of a man (cp. the Catholic treasure of grace & see °dhana below), viz. (as 5) saddhā, sīla, suta, cāga, paññā (faith, virtue, right knowledge, liberality, wisdom) S.I,232; A.I,210; III,80=S.IV,250; M.III,99; D.III,164, 165; cp. A.I,152=III,44; (as 4: the last minus suta) S.V,395; A.II,62 (sama°); (as 3) saddhā, sīla, cāga J.II,112; (as 7) ajjhesanā, tapo, sīla, sacca, cāga, sati, mati J.II,327; cp. śīla-śruta-tyāga Itm 31¹. -- PvA.30, 120; Sdhp.214, 323. See also anussati & anussarati.

--âdhiṭṭhāna the resolution of generosity, as one of the 4: paññā°, sacca°, c°., upasama° D.III,229; --ânussati generosity A.I,30; V,331; D.III,250, 280; Vism.197; --kathā talk about munificence A.III,181; --dhana the treasure of the good gift, as one of the 7 riches or blessings, the ariyadhanāni, viz. saddhā, sīla, hiri, ottappa, suta, c., paññā D.III,163, 251,; A.IV,5; VvA.113; as one of 5 (see above) A.III,53; --sampadā (& sampanna) the blessing of (or blessed with) the virtue of munificence A.I,62; II,66; III,53; IV,221, etc. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāgavant: {'def': '(adj.) generous A.III,183; IV,217, 220; Pug.24. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāgin: {'def': '(adj.) giving up, sacrificing, resigning Sn.719 (kāma°). (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. tyāgin),【阳】放弃的人，捐赠者，舍者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāgānussati: {'def': '(Sk. tyāgānusmrti),【阴】舍施随念。A.6.10./III,286.︰ariyasāvako attano cāgaṁ anussarati-- ‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me! Yohaṁ maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitāya pajāya vigatamalamaccherena cetasā agāraṁ ajjhāvasāmi 1muttacāgo 2payatapāṇi 3vossaggarato 4yācayogo 5dānasaṁvibhāgarato’ti.(圣弟子随念自己的施舍：「哇！我得利。哇！我有善利。我於悭.垢所缠众中，心离悭.垢而住家，(1)开放施施，(2)舒手施，(3)乐弃舍，(4)有求必应，(5)乐分配施。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】舍随念（慷慨的回想）。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cāgī: {'def': '【阳】放弃的人，捐赠者，舍者。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cāla: {'def': '【阳】震惊，突然激动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】震惊，突然激动。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[From calati] shaking, a shock, only in bhūmi° earthquake. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cālanī: {'def': '(f.) [to cālana of calaka²] a pestle, a mortar Vin.I,202 (in cuṇṇa° & dussa°, cp. saṇha). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(to cālana of calaka2) ,【阴】(捣研用的)杵，碾槌，研钵(a pestle, a mortar Vin.I,202 (in cuṇṇacālanī & dussacālanī, cp. saṇha))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāleti: {'def': '[caus. of calati] to move, to shake J.V,40; to scatter J.I,71 (tiṇāni); to sift Vin.I,202. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(calati 的【使】), 摇动，激动。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 cālita。【现分】cālenta, cālayamāna。【独】 cāletvā。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(calati 的【使】), 使动摇，使摇动，使激动。【过】cālesi。【过分】cālita。【现分】cālenta, cālayamāna。【独】cāletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāmara: {'def': '(nt.) [from camara] a chowrie, the tail of bos grunniens used as a whisk Sn.688; Vv 64³; J.VI,510; VvA.271, 276. Cpd. cāmarī-gāhaka J.VI,218 (aṅka) a hook holding the whisk. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】蝇掸，蝇拂，拂尘(柄端紮犁牛尾的用具)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】蝇掸，蝇拂，拂尘（柄端扎犁牛尾的用具）。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cāmikara: {'def': '(nt.). [Deriv. unknown. Sk. cāmīkara] gold VvA.12, 13, 166. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāmīkara: {'def': '【中】黄金。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】黄金。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāpa: {'def': '【阳】弓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [Sk. cāpa, from *qēp tremble, cp. capala wavering, quivering] a bow M.I,429 (opposed to kodaṇḍa); Dh.156 (°âtikhīṇa shot from the bow, cp. DhA.III,132), 320 (Abl. cāpāto metri causa); J.IV,272; V,400; Miln.105 (daḷha°), 352.

--koṭi the end of a bow VvA.261; nāḷi (f.) a bow-case J.II,88; --lasuṇa (nt.) a kind of garlic Vin.IV,259. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】弓。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cāpalla: {'def': '【中】变幻无常。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Der. fr. capala, Sk. cāpalya] fickleness D.I,115 (=DA.I,286). Also as cāpalya M.I,470; Vbh.351; Vism.106. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Cāpalya, (fr. capala, Sk. cāpalya),【中】变幻无常(fickleness)，轻佻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāra: {'def': '[fr. car carati to move about] motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process Miln.162 (+vihāra); Dhs.8=85 (=vicāra); DhsA.167. Usually --° (n. & adj.): kāma° going at will J.IV,261; pamāda° a slothful life J.I,9; piṇḍa° alms-begging Sn.414, 708; sabbaratti° wandering all night S.I,201; samavattha° A.III,257. See also carati I^b.

--vihāra doing & behaving, i. e. good conduct J.II,232; Dpvs. VI,38; cp. Miln.162 (above). (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】运动，行动，推移，去。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹car carati to move about),【阳】运动，行动，推移，去(motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process)。kāmacāra, 欲行(going at will)。pamādacāra, 放逸行(a slothful life)。piṇḍacāra, 乞食行(alms-begging) sabbaratticāro,(wandering all night, S.9.9./I,201)。anavatthacārikaṁ, 无目的游行(A.5.221./III,257.)。cāravihāra,行止(doing & behaving, i. e. good conduct)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāraka: {'def': '(cārika) ,【形】(wandering about, living, going, behaving, always --°, like ākāsa°, niketa°, pure° (see pubbaṅgama), vana°, -- f. cārikā journey, wandering, esp. as cārikaṁ carati to go on alms-pilgrimage (see carati Ib); °ñ pakkamati to set out wandering.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】使移动的人，使行动的人。【阳】监狱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】使移动的人，使行动的人。【阳】监狱。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cārika) (adj.) wandering about, living, going, behaving, always --°, like ākāsa°, niketa°, pure° (see pubbaṅgama), vana°, -- f. cārikā journey, wandering, esp. as cārikaṁ carati to go on alms-pilgrimage (see carati I^b) Vin.I,83; J.I,82; II,286; Dh.326; Miln.14, 22; °ñ pakkamati to set out wandering J.I,87; Miln.16. ‹-› S.I,199; M.I,117; A.III,257; DA.I,239 sq. (in detail on two cārikā); VvA.165; EnA 295 (unchā°). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāraṇa: {'def': '(adj.)=cāraka Sn.162 (saṁsuddha°). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=cāraka),【中】【形】使移动，使行动，管理。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】使移动，使行动，管理。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cāraṇika: {'def': 'v.v. vāraṇika Th.I,1129? a little play, masque, cp. Sk cāraṇa & Mrs. Rh. D. Pss of the Brethren, 419. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāreti: {'def': '(carati 的【使】), 出发，放牧，感官享受。【过】cāresi。【过分】cārita。【现分】cārenta。【独】cāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(carati 的【使】), 出发，放牧，感官享受。【过】 cāresi。【过分】 cārita。【现分】 cārenta。【独】 cāretvā。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. cara; cp. carati] to set going, to pasture, feed, preserve: indriyāni c. to feast one’s senses (cp. Ger. “augenweide”) PvA.58; khantiṁ c. to feed meekness DA.I,277; olambakaṁ cārento drooping J.I,174; Pass. ppr. cāriyamāna being handed round J.IV,2 (not vā°)--pp. carita. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cārikā: {'def': '【阴】旅程，游荡。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】旅程，游行，游荡。A.5.221./III,257.︰“Pañcime bhikkhave, ādīnavā dīghacārikaṁ anavatthacārikaṁ anuyuttassa viharato. Katame pañca? Assutaṁ na suṇāti, sutaṁ na pariyodāpeti, sutenekaccena avisārado hoti, gāḷhaṁ rogātaṅkaṁ phusati, na ca mittavā hoti.(诸比丘！这五种是屡次作长游行、无目的游行者之过失。以何为五？即：不闻未闻；已闻(心)不净化；於已闻的那一部分无自信；受重病患；及没有朋友。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cārin: {'def': '(only --°) (adj.) walking, living, experiencing; behaving, acting, practising. (a) lit. asaṅga° S.I,199; akāla° Sn.386; ambu° Sn.62; vihaṅgapatha° Sdhp.241; sapadāna° M.I,30; Sn.65; pariyanta° Sn.904. ‹-› (b) fig. anudhamma° Sn.69; āgu° A.II,240; A.III,163; dhamma° Miln.19; brahma° Sn.695; manāpa° Vv 31⁴; yata° Sn.971; sama° Miln.19. See all s. v. & cp. caṭu. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāritta: {'def': '【中】习惯，行为，练习，号召。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [From car] practice, proceeding, manner of acting, conduct J.I,90, 367; II,277 (loka°); V,285 (vaṅka°); Miln.133; VvA.31. -- cārittaṁ āpajjati to mix with, to call on, to have intercourse with (c. Loc.) M.I,470; S.II,270 (kulesu); M.I,287=III,40 (kāmesu); J.III,46 (rakkhita-gopitesu).

--vāritta manner of acting & avoiding J.III,195, cp. Th.1. 591; Vism.10. See on their mutual relation Vism.11; --sīla code of morality VvA.37. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】习惯，行为，练习，号召。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cāru: {'def': '【形】迷人的，美丽的，愉快的。cārudassana,【形】视为可爱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic cāru & cāyu to *qe -- *qā, as in kāma, Lat. carus, etc., see under kāma] charming, desirable, pleasant, beautiful J.VI,481; Miln.201; Sdhp.428, 512; VvA.36 (=vaggu), sucāru S.I,181; Pv.II,12¹² (=suṭṭhumanorama).

--dassana lovely to behold Sn.548; J.VI,449 (expl. on p. 450 as: cāru vuccati suvaṇṇaṁ=suvaṇṇadassana); VI,579; f. --ī Pv III,6¹⁴. (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】迷人的，美丽的，愉快的。 ~dassana, 【形】视为可爱的。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cārī: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 演戏，实习，生活，举止。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 演戏，实习，生活，举止。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cātaka: {'def': '【阳】(亚洲南部的)犀鸟(hornbill，亚洲共拥有31种犀鸟)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】犀鸟。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cātuddasī: {'def': '【阴】(阴历)半个月的第 14 日。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】一个半月的第 14 日。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cātuddisa: {'def': '【形】属于四方的。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】四方的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cātuddīpaka: {'def': '【形】包含四大洲的，广泛于整个地球的。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】包含的四大洲，广泛於整个地球的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cātummahābhūtika: {'def': '【形】四大，四大元素（地、水、火、风）。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】四大(种)，四大元素(巴cattāri mahābhūtāni四大种，梵catvāri mahābhūtāni。包括：地大(巴paṭhavi-mahābhūta，梵prthivī-mahādhātu)、水大(巴āpo-mahābhūta，梵ab-mahādhātu)、火大(梵巴同tejo-mahābhūta)、风大(巴vāyo-mahābhūta，梵vāyu-mahādhātu)。四大所造色(catunnaṁ mahābhūtānaṁ upādāya rūpaṁ)为四大的衍生物，包括颜色(vaṇṇa)、声音(sadda)、气味(gandha)、味道(rasa)等。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cātummahāpatha: {'def': '【阳】四条道路的交叉处，十字路口。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】四条道路的交叉处，十字路口。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cātummahārājika: {'def': '【形】四大王天的。cātummahārājika devā, 四大王天。四王天各镇护一天下，护世四天王。(一)多罗吒(巴Dhata-raṭṭha；梵Dhritarāsṭra)，又称持国天，统领乾闼婆与毘舍闍神将，镇护东方。(二)毘琉璃(巴Virūḷhaka；梵Virūḍhaka)，又称增长天，统领鸠盘荼与薜荔神，镇护南方(即吾人所居之赡部洲)。(三)毘留博叉(梵Virūpāksa)，又称广目天，统领一切诸龙，镇护西方。(四)毘沙门(巴Vessavaṇa；梵Vaiwravaṇa)，又称多闻天，统领夜叉、罗刹等，镇护北方。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm.四天王. -parisā四天王祭［八祭の一］. -bhavana四天王宫.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '【形】属于四大王天的。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '四大王天，六欲天中最低的天界。此天界为四大天王及其眷属所居，故名。
四大天王分别守护着四方。他们是：
1.持国天王（Dhataraṭṭha），守护东方，统领甘塔拔；
2.增长天王（Virūḷhaka），守护南方，统领瓮睾鬼；
3.广目天王（Virūpakkha），守护西方，统领诸龙；
4.韦沙瓦纳天王（Vessavaṇa），守护北方，统领亚卡。
此四大天王既守护四方，也保护佛陀及佛弟子们。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Cāturiya: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. catura+iya] skill, cleverness, shrewdness J.III,267; VI,410; ThA, 227; Vbh.551; Vism.104; Dāvs.V,30. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】技术，精明。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】技术，精明。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cātur°: {'def': '(and cātu°) [see catur] consisting of four. Only in cpds. viz.

--(r)anta (adj.) “of four ends,” i. e. covering or belonging to the 4 points of the compass, all-encircling, Ep. of the earth: J.II,343 (paṭhavī); IV,309 (mahī) --(n-m.) one who rules over the 4 points; i. e. over the whole world (of a Cakkavattin) D.I,88 (cp. DA.I,249); II,16; Sn.552. See also Sp. AvS.II,111, n. 2; --kummāsa sour gruel with four ingredients VvA.308; --(d)dasī (f.) [to catuddasa fourteen] the 14^th day of the lunar half month A.I,144. PvA.55; VvA.71, 99, 129. With pancadasī, aṭṭhamī & pāṭihāriyapakkha at Sn.402; Vv 15⁵. °dasika belonging to the 14^th day at Vin.IV,315; --(d)disa (adj.) belonging to, or comprising the four quarters, appl^d to a man of humanitarian mind Sn.42 (“showing universal love,” see Nd² 239); cp. RV X.136. Esp. appl^d to the bhikkhu-saṅgha “the universal congregation of bhikkhus” Vin I 305; II,147; D.I,145; J.I,93; Pv.II,2⁸; III,2¹⁴ (expl^d PvA.185 by catūhi disāhi āgata-bhikkhu-saṅgha). Cp. AvŚ I.266; II,109; --(d)dīpa of four continents: rājā Th.2, 486; cp. M Vastu I.108, 114; --(d)dīpaka sweeping over the whole earth (of a storm) Vin.I,290, cp. J.IV,314 & AvŚ I.258; --(b)bedā (pl.) the four Vedas Miln.3; --māsin of 4 months; f. °inī Vin.I,155; D.I,47; M.III,79; DA.I,139, cp. komudī; --(m)mahāpatha the place where 4 roads cross, a crossroad D.I,102, 194=243; M.I,124; III,91; cp. catu°. --(m)mahābhūtika consisting of the 4 great elements (of kāya) D.I,34, 55, 186, 195; S.II,94 sq.; Miln.379; cp. Av.Ś II.191 & Sk. cāṭurbhautika; --(m)mahārājikā (pl.) (sc. devā) the retinue of the Four Kings, inhabiting the lowest of the 6 devalokas Vin.I,12; III,18; D.I,215; Nd² 307 (under devā); J.II,311 (deva-loka); --yāma (saṁvara) fourfold restraint (see yāma) D.I,57, 58 (cp. DA.I,167); III,48 sq.; S.I,66; M.I,377; Vism.410. Cp. Dial. I.75 n¹. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāvanā: {'def': '【阴】使改变。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】使改变(moving, shifting, disappearance)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) moving, shifting, disappearance Vin.III,112 (ṭhānato); Sdhp.61 (id.). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāvati: {'def': '[fr. ci] to honour, only in cpd. --apacāyati (q. v.). The Dhtp (237) defines the root cāy by pūjā. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāveti: {'def': '[caus. of cavati] to bring to fall, move, drive away; disturb, distract A.IV,343 (samādhimhā); J.I,60 (inf. cāvetu-kāma); II,329 (jhānā, Abl.). Aor. acāvayi (prohib.) Sn.442 (ṭhānā). (Page 265)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cavati 的【使】), 使倒下，驱赶，使分心。【过】~esi。【过分】 cāvita。【现分】 cāventa。【独】 cāvetvā。(p127)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cavati‘脱离’的【使】), 使脱离，驱赶，使分心(to bring to fall, move, drive away; disturb, distract)。【过】cāvesi。【过分】cāvita。【现分】cāventa。【独】cāvetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāveyya: {'def': '(‹cavati‘脱离’),【祈】使…脱离。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāyaṁ: {'def': '(ca+ayaṁ)﹐这和…。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāṭi: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Hindī cāṭā] 1. a jar, vessel, pot J.I,199; 302 (pānīya°); III,277 (madhu° honey jar); DhA.I,394 (tela° oil tank); VvA.76 (sālibhatta° holding a meal of rice).‹-› 2. a measure of capacity J.II,404; IV,343. -- 3. a large vessel of the tank type used for living in Vin.I,153.

--pañjara a cage made of, or of the form of a large earthen jar, wherein a man could lie in ambush J.V,372, 385; --pāla (nt.) an earthenware shield (?) J.V,373 (=kīṭa). (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】广口瓶，壶。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】广口瓶(jar)，壶(pot)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cāṭu: {'def': '[cp. cāru] pleasant, polite in °kammatā politeness, flattery Miln.370 (cp. Sk. cāṭukāra); cāṭu-kamyatā Vbh.246; Vism.17, 23, 27; KhA 236. (Page 264)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cāṭukamyatā: {'def': '【阴】谄媚(flattery)，台语︰thiam2 bi7。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】谄媚。(p126)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cīnaka: {'def': '(m. nt.) a kind of bean Sn.239 (=aṭavi-pabbatapadesu āropita-jāta-cīna-mugga SnA 283); J.V,405. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cīnapiṭṭha: {'def': '【中】铅丹(四氧化三铅 Pb3O4)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】铅丹（四氧化三铅 Pb3O4）。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) red lead DA.I,40; DhsA.14. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cīnaraṭṭha: {'def': '【中】（大陆）中国。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】中国(China)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cīra: {'def': 'cīraka,【中】纤维，长条，树皮衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. cīra, cp. cīvara] 1. bark, fibre D.I,167 (kusa°, vāka°, phalaka°); Vin.III,34; A.I,295; Pug.55. -- a bark dress Vin.I,305; J.VI,500 (cp. cīraka). -- 2. a strip (orig. of bark), in suvaṇṇa°-khacita gold-brocaded VvA.280 (see also next). Cp. ocīraka (under odīraka). (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'cīraka, 【中】纤维，长条，树皮衣。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cīraka: {'def': '[cp. cīra] 1. bark (see cpds.) -- 2. a strip, in suvaṇṇa° gold brocade (dress) J.V,197.

--vāsika (nt.) bark-dress (a punishment) M.I,87= A.I,48=Miln.197. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cīriya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. cīra] like or of bark, in cpd. dāru° (as Np.) “wood-barker” DhA.II,35. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cīriḷikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. cīrī & jhillikā a cricket, cīrilli a sort of large fish] a cricket A.III,397 (v. l. cīrikā). Cp. on word-formation pipiḷikā & Mod. Gr. tsi/tsikos cricket. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cīrī: {'def': '【阴】蟋蟀。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】蟋蟀(cricket)。cīrīḷikāsadda,蟋蟀声(《中阿含经》作：支离弥梨虫声)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cīvara: {'def': '(nt.) [*Sk. cīvara, prob.=cīra, appl^d orig. to a dress of bark] the (upper) robe of a Buddhist mendicant. C. is the first one of the set of 4 standard requisites of a wandering bhikkhu, vir. c°, piṇḍapāta almsbowl, senāsana lodging, a place to sleep at, gilānapaccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra medicinal appliances for use in sickness. Thus mentioned passim e. g. Vin.III,89, 99, 211; IV,154 sq.; D.I,61; M.II,102; A.I,49; Nd² s. v.; It.111. In abbreviated form Sn.339; PvA.7; Sdhp.393. In starting on his begging round the bhikkhu goes patta-cīvaraṁ ādāya, The 3 robes are saṅghāṭi, uttarāsaṅga, antaravāsaka, given thus, e.g. at Vin.I,289. that is literally “taking his bowl & robe.” But this is an elliptical idiom meaning “putting on his outer robe and taking his bowl.” A bhikkhu never goes into a village without wearing all his robes, he never takes them, or any one of the three, with him. Each of the three is simply an oblong piece of cloth (usually cotton cloth). On the mode of wearing these three robes see the note at Dialogues II.145. -- Vin.III,11; D.II,85; Sn.p. 21; PvA.10, 13 & passim. The sewing of the robe was a festival for the laity (see under kaṭhina). There are 6 kinds of cloth mentioned for its manufacture, viz. khoma, kappāsika, koseyya, kambala, sāṇa, bhaṅga Vin. I.58=96=281 (cp. °dussa). Two kinds of robes are distinguished: one of the gahapatika (layman) a white one, and the other that of the bhikkhu, the c. proper, called paṁsukūlaṁ c. “the dust-heap robe” Vin.V,117 (cp. gahapati). -- On cīvara in general & also on special ordinances concerning its making, wearing & handling see Vin.I,46, 49 sq., 196, 198, 253 sq., 285, 287 sq., 306=II.267 (of var. colours); II,115 sq. (sibbati to sew the c.); III,45, 58 (theft of a c.), 195--223, 254--266; IV,59--62, 120--123, 173, 279 sq., 283 (six kinds). -- A.III,108 (cīvare kalyāṇakāma); V,100, 206; Vism.62; It.103; PvA.185. -- Sīse cīvaraṁ karoti to drape the outer robe over the head Vin.II,207, 217; °ṁ khandhe karoti to drape it over the back Vin.II,208, 217; °ṁ nikkhipati to lay it down or put it away Vin.I,47 sq.; II,152, 224; III,198, 203, 263; °ṁ saṁharati to fold it up Vin.I,46. -- Var. expressions referring to the use of the robe: atireka° an extra robe Vin.III,195; acceka° id. Vin.III,260 sq.; kāla° (& akāla°) a robe given at (and outside) the specified time Vin.III,202 sq.; IV,284, 287; gahapati° a layman’s r. Vin.III,169, 171; ti° the three robes, viz. saṅghāṭī, uttarāsaṅga, antaravāsaka Vin.I,288, 289; III,11, 195, 198 sq.; V,142; adj. tecīvarika wearing 3 rs. Vin.V,193; dubbala° (as adj.) with a worn-out c. Vin.III,254; IV,59, 154, 286; paṁsukūla° the dust-heap robe PvA.141; sa°-bhatta food given with a robe Vin.IV,77; lūkha° (adj.) having a coarse robe Vin.I,109 (+duccola); III,263 (id.); A.I,25; vihāra° a robe to be used in the monastery Vin.III,212.

--kaṇṇa the lappet of a monk’s robe DhA.III,420; VvA.76=DhA.III,106, cp. cīvarakarṇaka Av.Ś II.184, & °ika Divy 239, 341, 350. --kamma (nt.) robe-making Vin.II,218; III,60, 240; IV,118, 151; A.V,328 sq.; DhA.III,342; PvA.73, 145. --kāra (-samaya) (the time of) sewing the robes Vin.III,256 sq. --kāla (-samaya) the right time for accepting robes Vin.III,261; IV,286, 287; --dāna (-samaya) (the ime for) giving robes Vin.IV,77, 99; --dussa clothing-material Vin.IV,279, 280; --nidāhaka putting on the c. Vin.I,284; --paṭiggāhaka the receiver of a robe Vin.I,283; II,176; V,205; A.III,274 sq.; --paṭivisa a portion of the c. Vin.I,263, 285, 301; --palibodha an obstacle to the valid performance of the kathina ceremony arising from a set of robes being due to a particular person [a technical term of the canon law. See Vinaya Texts II.149, 157, 169]. It is one of the two kaṭhinassa palibodhā (c. & āvāsa°) Vin.I,265; V,117, cp. 178; --paviveka (nt.) the seclusion of the robe, i. e. of a non-Buddhist with two other pavivekāni (piṇḍapāta° & senāsana°) at A.I,240; --bhaṅga the distribution of robes Vin.IV,284; --bhatta robes & a meal (given to the bh.) Vin.III,265; --bhājaka one who deals out the robes Vin.I,285; II,176; V,205; A.III,274 sq. (cp. °paṭiggāhaka); --bhisī a robe rolled up like a pillow Vin.I,287 sq.; --rajju (f.) a rope for (hanging up) the robes; in the Vinaya always comb^d with °vaṁsa (see below); --lūkha (adj.) one who is poorly dressed Pug.53; --vaṁsa a bamboo peg for hanging up a robe (cp. °rajju) Vin.I,47, 286; II,117, 121, 152, 153, 209, 222; III,59; J.I,9; DhA.III,342; --saṅkamanīya (nt.) a robe that ought to be handed over (to its legal owner) Vin.IV,282; 283. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】袈裟，（出家人的）衣。 ~kaṇṇa, 【中】袈裟的垂部。 ~kamma,【中】缝袈裟，做袈裟。 ~kāra, 【阳】袈裟的设计者，制造袈裟者。 ~dāna,【中】捐赠袈裟。 ~dussa, 【中】袈裟布料。 ~rajju, 【阴】晾衣绳。 ~vaŋsa, 【阳】晾衣竹竿。(p128)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】【阳】【阴】袈裟(=kāsāya, kasāva,【中】袈裟)，(出家人的)衣。cīvarakaṇṇa,【中】袈裟的下摆。cīvarakamma,【中】缝袈裟，做袈裟。cīvarakāra,【阳】袈裟的设计者，制造袈裟者。cīvaradāna,【中】捐赠袈裟。cīvaradussa,【中】袈裟布料。cīvarajju,【阴】晒衣绳。cīvaravaṁsa,【阳】晒衣竹竿。tīni cīvarāni﹐三衣。包括：僧伽梨(saṅghāṭi大衣)、安陀会(antaravāsaka下著之衣，裙)、郁多罗僧(uttarāsṅga上著之衣)。三衣又总称为袈裟(kāsāya)。acchinnacīvaro﹐被偷的衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cīyati: {'def': '[Pass. of cināti] to be gathered, to be heaped up Sn.428 (cīyate pahūtaṁ puññaṁ). See also ā°. (Page 269)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cūcuka: {'def': '【中】乳头(nipple)，奶头(teat)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】乳头，奶头。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Cūla: {'def': '参考 culla。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】小的，未成年人。参考 culla。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cūlikā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. cūlikā, cp. cūḍā]=cūḷa; kaṇṇa° the root of the ear J.II,276; Vism.249, 255; DhA.IV,13 (of an elephant). °baddha S.II,182; KS.II,122. See also cūḷā. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cūḷa: {'def': '[Sk. cūḍa & cūlikā] 1. swelling, protuberance; root, knot, crest. As kaṇṇa-cūḷa the root of an elephant’s ear J.VI,488. aḍḍha-cūḷa a measure (see aḍḍha). See also cūlikā. -- 2. (adj.) see culla. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cūḷaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. cūḷā] having a cūḷa or top-knot; pañca° with five top-knots J.V,250 (of a boy). (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cūḷanikā: {'def': '(f.) [Der. fr. culla, q. v.] only in phrase sahassi cūḷanikā lokadhātu “the system of the 1,000 lesser worlds” (distinguished from the dvi-sahassī majjhimakā & the ti-sahassī mahāsahassi lokadhātu) A.I,227; Nd² 235, 2^b. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Cūḷapanthaka: {'def': '（比库名）朱腊般他嘎，（古音译：）周利盘陀迦', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Cūḷikā: {'def': '【阴】发髻。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】发髻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cūḷā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic cūḍā. to cūḍa]=cūḷa, usually in sense of crest only, esp. denoting the lock of hair left on the crown of the head when the rest of the head is shaved (cp. Anglo-Indian chuḍā & Gujarāti choṭali) J.I,64, 462; V,153, 249 (pañcacūḷā kumārā); DhA.I,294; as mark of distinction of a king J.III,211; V,187; of a servant J.VI,135. -- a cock’s comb J.II,410; III,265.

--maṇi (m.) a jewel worn in a crest or diadem, a jewelled crest J.I,65; II,122; V,441. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】冠，顶髻，髦（古时幼儿剃光头只留下垂在前额一小髻的头发），鸡冠。 ~mani, 【阳】王冠，带状头饰，珠宝冠。(p129)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】冠，顶髻，髦(古时幼儿剃光头只留下垂在前额一小髻的头发)，鸡冠。cūḷāmani,【阳】王冠，带状头饰，珠宝冠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Cūḷāsīti: {'def': 'for cullāsīti at Th.2, 51. (Page 271)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

D: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十八个辅音字母。发音是带音的 d, 汉语没有这个辅音, 请参考英语或马来语的发音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十八个辅音字母。发音是带音的 d, 汉语没有这个辅音, 请参考英语或马来语的发音。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dabba: {'def': '¹ (adj.-n.) [Sk. dravya, nt. to dravati (dru)] (a) fit for, able, worthy, good, S.I,187=Th.1, 1218, cp. Pss. of the Brethren, 399, n. 4 (=Sk. bhavya, cp. Pāṇini V.3, 104 dravyaṁ ca bhavyaḥ). -- (b) material, substance, property; something substantial, a worthy object Pgdp 14.

--jātika of good material, fit for, able M.I,114; A.I,254 (cp. Sk. pātrabhūta); Vism.196. --saṁhāra collecting something substantial PvA.114 (should prob. be read sambhāra). --sambhāra the collection of something substantial or worth collecting,; a gift worth giving J.IV,311; V,48; VI,427; DhA.I,321; II,114. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】明智的，能干的。【中】木材，财富，物质。 ~jātika, 【形】聪明的。 ~sambhāra, 【阳】木制品的收集物，建材的收集物。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.-n.) [Sk. dravya, of dru wood, see dāru] treelike, wooden; a tree, shrub, wood J.I,108 (d.-tiṇagaccha a jungle of wood & grass); V,46 (d.-gahana a thicket of shrubs & trees); Vism.353 (°tiṇa). (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】明智的，能干的。【中】木材，财富，物质。dabbajātika,【形】聪明的。dabbasambhāra,【阳】木制品的收集物，建材的收集物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dabba-mallaputta: {'def': '（比库名）达拔马喇子，（古音译：）沓婆摩罗子', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Dabbatiṇa: {'def': '【中】印度画眉草(印度的一种禾草 (Eragrostis cynosuroides), 用於印度教礼仪中--亦称达勃哈 (darbha))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】印度画眉草（印度的一种禾草 (Eragrostis cynosuroides),用于印度教礼仪中—亦称达勃哈 (darbha)）。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dabbha: {'def': '[Sk. darbha to dṛbhati, to plait, interlace, etc. cp. Lith. darbas plaiting, crating] a bunch of kuśa grass (Poa Cynosuroides) D.I,141; M.I,344; A.II,207.

--puppha “kuśa-flower,” Ep. of a jackal J.III,334. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】印度画眉草(kusa-grass﹐见 Dabbatiṇa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】达勃哈，印度画眉草（见 Dabbatiṇa）。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dabbimukha: {'def': '【阳】一种鸟(Turdus Ginginianus)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一种鸟（？琵鹭）。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dabbī: {'def': '【阴】匙，杓子。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. darvī=*dāru-ī made of wood, see dāru] a (wooden) spoon, a ladle; (met.) the hood of a snake (dabbimattā, phaṇapuṭakā DhA.IV,132). -- Dh.64; Gen. & instr, davyā J.III,218; Miln.365. -- In cpds. dabbi°.

--kaṇṇa the tip of the ladle DhA.I,371; --gāha holding a spoon, viz. for the purposes of offering M.II,157 (of a priest); Pv.II,9⁵³ (=kaṭacchu-gāhika PvA.135); --mukha a kind of bird J.VI,540 (=āṭa); --homa a spoonoblation D.I,9. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】匙，杓子(ladle)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dabhakkaṁ: {'def': '(?) (indecl.)=daddabhaṁ; a certain noise (of a falling fruit) J.III,77 (v. l. duddabha=daddabha). (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dada: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 给的，授予的。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) (adj.-suff.) [Sk.° dad or °dada, cp °da & dadāti base 3] giving, to be given S.I,33 (paññā°); Kh VIII,10 (kāma°); Pv.II,9¹ (id.=dāyaka PvA.113); II,12⁴ (phala° =dāyin PvA.157); VvA.171 (puriṁ°). -- duddada hard to give S.I,19=IV.65=J.II,86=VI,571. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 给的，授予的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daddabha: {'def': '[onomatop.] a heavy, indistinct noise, a thud J.III,76 (of the falling of a large fruit), v. l. duddabhayasadda to be regarded as a Sk. gloss=dundubhyaśabda. See also dabhakka. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daddabhāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. prec.] to make a heavy noise, to thud J.III,77. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daddara: {'def': '¹ [onomat. from the noise, cp. next & cakora, with note on gala] partridge J.III,541. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. dardara] a cert. (grinding, crashing) noise A.IV,171; J.II,8; III,461; N. of a mountain, expl^d as named after this noise J.II,8; III,16, 461. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daddaḷhati: {'def': '[Sk. jājvalyati, Intens. of jval, see jalati] to blaze, to shine brilliantly; only in pp. med. daddaḷhamāna resplendent, blazing forth S.I,127=J.I,469; Vv 17³; 34¹; Pv.II,12⁶; III,3⁵; VvA.89 (ativiya vijjotamāna); PvA.157 (at. virocamāna), 189 (at. abhijalanto). -- Spelling daddallamāna at J.V,402; VI,118. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daddu: {'def': '【阴】皮肤病、湿疹、轮癣(一种皮肤的出疹)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dadru f. & dardru a kind of leprosy, dadruna leprous (but given by Halāyudha in the meaning of ringworm, p. 234 Aufrecht); fr. *der in Sk. dṛṇāti to tear, chap, split (see dara & dala); cp. Lat. derbiosus; Ohg. zittaroh; Ags. teter] a kind of cutaneous eruption Miln.298; Vism.345.

--bandhana in d.-bandhanādi-bandhana at ThA.241 should be read daṇḍa°. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】轮癣（一种皮肤的出疹）。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Daddula: {'def': '¹ a cert. kind of rice D.I,166; M.I,78, 343; A.I,241, 295; II,206; Pug.55. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [Sk. dārdura?] in nahāru° (v. l. dala & dadalla) both at M.I,188 (kukkuṭapattena pi. n-daddulena pi aggiṁ gavesanti) & A.IV,47 (kukkuṭapattaṁ vā n-daddulaṁ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṁ paṭilīyati) unexplained; perhaps a muscle. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.软骨。2.米的一种(直译：头头逻)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】软骨。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dadhi: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dadhi, redpl. formation fr. dhayati to suck. Cp. also dhenu cow, dhīta, etc.] sour milk, curds, junket Vin.I,244 (in enumⁿ of 5--fold cow-produce, cp. gorasa); D.I,201 (id.); M.I,316; A.II,95; J.II,102; IV,140; Miln.41, 48, 63; Dhs.646, 740, 875; Vism.264, 362.

--ghaṭa a milk bowl J.II,102; --maṇḍaka whey S.II,111; --māla “the milk sea,” N. of an ocean J.IV,140; --vāraka a pot of milk-curds J.III,52. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】凝乳。dadhighaṭa,【阳】一锅凝乳。dadhimaṇḍa,【中】乳清(指在奶酪制造过程中，以乳汁中分离出来的牛奶中的水质部分)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】凝乳。 ~ghaṭa, 【阳】一锅凝乳。 ~maṇḍa, 【中】乳清（指在奶酪制造过程中，以乳汁中分离出来的牛奶中的水质部分）。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dadāti: {'def': '[Redupl. formation dā as in Lat. do, perf. de-di, Gr. di/dwmi; cp. Lat. dōs dowry, Gr. dwζ; Ohg. dati; Lith. důti to give] to give, etc. I. Forms. The foll. bases form the Pāli verb-system: dā, dāy, dadā & di.-1. Bases dā & (reduced) da. -- (a) dā°: fut. dassati J.I,113, 279; III,83; A.III,37; 1st sg. dassāmi J.I,223; II,160; PvA.17, 35, etc. -- dammi interpreted by Com. as fut. is in reality a contraction fr. dātuṁ īhāmi, used as a hortative or dubitative subjunctive (fr. dāhāmi, like kāhami I am willing to do fr. kātuṁ īhāmi) Sn.p. 15 (“shall I give”); II,112; IV,10 (varaṁ te dammi); Pv.I,10³; II,3²⁴ (kin t’āhaṁ dammi what can I give thee=dassāmi PvA.88). -- pret. adā Sn.303; Pv.II,2⁸ (=adāsi PvA.81); Mhvs VII.14; 2nd sg. ado J.IV,10 (=adāsi Com.): Miln.384; 1st. pl. adamha J.II,71; Miln.10; 2nd pl. adattha J.I,57 (mā ad.); Miln.10, & dattha J.II,181; -- aor. adāsi J.I,150, 279; PvA.73, etc.; pl. adaṁsu Pv.I,11⁶. -- inf. dātuṁ J.III,53; PvA.17, 48 (°kāma), etc. & dātave Sn.286. -- grd. dātabba J.III,52; PvA.7, 26, 88, etc. ‹-› (b) da°: pp. datta --ger. datvā J.I,152, 290 (a°); PvA.70, 72, etc. & datvāna Pv.I,11³; also as °dā (for °dāya or °dāna) in prep. cpds., like an-upādā, ādā, etc. Der. fr. 1. are Caus. dāpeti, pp. dāpita; n. ag. dātar; nt. dāna. See also suffix dā,° datti, dattikā, etc.; and pp. atta (=ā-d[a]ta). -- 2. Bases dāy & (reduced) day, contracted into de. (a) dāy°: only in der. dāya, dāyaka, dāyin and in prep. cpds. ā-dāye (ger. of ādāti). ‹-› (b) de°: pres. ind. deti Sn.130; J.II,111, 154; PvA.8; 1st sg. demi J.I,228, 307; 2nd desi J.I,279; PvA.39. 1st pl. dema J.I,263; III,126; PvA.27, 75 (shall we give); 2nd detha J.III,127; 3rd denti Sn.244. -- imper. dehi Vin.I,17; J.I,223; IV,101; PvA.43, 73; 3rd sg. detu J.I,263; II,104; 2nd pl. detha It.66 J.III,126; PvA.29, 62, 76. -- ppr. dento J.I,265; PvA.3, 11 etc. -- grd. deyya Mhvs VII.31. B^tSk. deya. -- Other der. fr. base 2 are dayati & dayā (q. v.). -- 3. Base dadā: pres. ind. dadāti S.I,18; Sn.p. 87; 1st. sg. dadāmi J.I,207; Sn.421; 3rd. pl. dadanti J.III,220; Dh.249. -- imper. dadāhi Pv.II,1⁴. -- pot. dadeyya PvA.17; Miln.28 & dade Pv.II,3²²; Vv 62⁵; 1st. sg. dadeyyaṁ J.I,254, 265; 2nd. sg. dadeyyāsi J.III,276. Also contracted forms dajjā S.I,18 (may he give); Dh.224; Pv.I,4¹ (=dadeyya PvA.17); II,9⁴⁰; 1st sg. dajjaṁ Vin.I,232 (dajjâhaṁ=dajjaṁ ahaṁ). Cp. I.10⁹ (dajjâhaṁ); J.IV,101 (=dammi Com.); Pv.II,9⁴⁵; 2nd. pl. dajjeyyātha Vin.I,232; 3rd y. dajjeyya & 3rd. pl. dajjuṁ in cpd. anupa°. -- ppr. dadanto Sn.p. 87. Gen. etc. dadato It. 89; Dh.242; Pv.II,9⁴²; & dadaṁ Sn.187, 487; Pv.II,9⁴²; Vv 67⁶. -- ppr. med. dadamāna J.I,228, II.154; PvA.129. -- aor. adadaṁ Vv 34¹¹ (=adāsiṁ VvA.151); proh. 2nd. pl. mā dadiṭṭha DhA.I,396; J.III,171. -- ger. daditvā Pv.II,8^9.II (v. l. BB datvā): contr. into dajjā (should be read dajja) Pv.II,9⁶⁷ (=datvā PvA.139). -- Der. dada for °da. ‹-› 4. (Passive) base di (& dī): pp. dinna pres. dīyati S.I,18; Th.2, 475; PvA.26, & diyyati VvA.75; cp. ādiyati; pret. dīyittha DhA.I,395; -- ppr. dīyamāna PvA.8, 26, 49, 110, 133, etc. -- Der. fr. 4 are Desid. dicchati, diti, etc. -- II. Meanings I. (trs.) with Acc. to give, to present with: dānaṁ deti (w. Dat. & abs.) to be liberal (towards), to be munificent, to make a present S.I,18; It.89; Pv.I,4¹; II³; PvA.8, 27, etc. -- (fig.) okāsaṁ to give opportunity, allow J.I,265; ovādaṁ to give advice PvA.11; jīvitaṁ to spare one’s life J.II,154; paṭivacanaṁ to answer J.I,279; sādhukāraṁ to applaud J.I,223; paṭiññaṁ to promise PvA.76; -- to offer, to allow: maggaṁ i. e. to make room Vin.II,221; J.II,4; maggaṁ dehi let me pass J.IV,101; -- to grant: varaṁ a wish J.IV,10; Pv.II,9⁴⁰; -- to give or deal out: daṇḍaṁ a thrashing J.IV,382; pahāraṁ a blow S.IV,62. -- 2. with ger. to give out, to hand over: dārūni āharitvā aggiṁ katvā d. to provide with fire J.II,102; sāṭake āharitvā to present w. clothes J.I,265; dve koṭṭhāse vibhajitvā d. to deal out J.I,226; kuṭikāyo kāretvā adaṁsu had huts built & gave them PvA.42. -- 3. (abs.) with inf. to permit, to allow: khādituṁ J.I,223; nikkhamituṁ J.II,154; pavisituṁ J.I,263, etc. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dā+a, dā 重叠，而前 ā 被短化), 给，提供，允许，移交。【过】dadi, adadi。【过分】dinna。【现分】dadanta, dadamāna。【不】dātuṁ, dadituṁ。fut.dassati, dammi。pret.adā (=adāsi); 1st.pl.adamha; aor.adāsi; pl.adaṁsu。inf.dātuṁ & dātave。grd.dātabba & da tabba。pp. datta。ger. datvā & datvāna; also as °dā (for °dāya or °dāna) in prep.cpds., like an-upādā, ādā, etc.Der.fr.1.are Caus.dāpeti, pp. dāpita; n.ag.dātar; nt.dāna.See also suffix dā,° datti, dattikā, etc.; and pp. atta (=ā-d[a]ta).-- 2.Bases dāy & (reduced) day, contracted into de.(a) dāy°：only in der.dāya, dāyaka, dāyin and in prep.cpds.ā-dāye (ger. of ādāti). (b) de°：pres.ind.deti。1st sg.demi; 2nd desi。1st pl.dema(shall we give); 2nd detha; 3rd denti。imper.dehi。3rd sg.detu; 2nd pl.detha。ppr.dento。grd.deyya 。Other der.fr.base 2 are dayati & dayā。3.Base dadā：pres.ind.dadāti; 1st.sg.dadāmi; 3rd.pl.dadanti。imper.dadāhi。pot.dadeyya & dade; 1st.sg.dadeyyaṁ; 2nd.sg.dadeyyāsi. Also contracted forms dajjā (may he give)(=dadeyya ); 1st sg.dajjaṁ(dajjāhaṁ=dajjaṁ ahaṁ)(=dammi Com.);2nd.pl.dajjeyyātha;3rd y.dajjeyya & 3rd.pl.dajjuṁ in cpd.anupa°.。ppr.dadanto。Gen.etc.dadato & dadaṁ。ppr.med.dadamāna。aor.adadaṁ (=adāsiṁ); proh.2nd.pl.mā dadiṭṭha。ger. daditvā(datvā)：contr.into dajjā (should be read dajja) (=datvā).。der.dada for °da.。4.(passive) base di (& dī)：pp. dinna pres.dīyati diyyati; cp. ādiyati; pret.dīyittha。ppr.dīyamāna。der.fr.4 are desid.dicchati, diti, etc.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dā + a, dā 重叠，而前 ā 被短化), 给，提供，允许，移交。【过】 dadi,adadi。【过分】 dinna。【现分】 dadanta, dadamāna。【不】 dātuŋ,dadituŋ。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Daha: {'def': '[Sk. draha, through metathesis fr. hrada, hlād, see hilādate] a lake D.I,45 (udaka°); J.I,50; II,104; V,412; Miln.259; PvA.152; Dpvs.I,44. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】湖。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. draha),【阳】湖。(a lake, D.I,45. udakadaha)。devadahanti devā vuccanti rājāno, tesaṁ maṅgaladaho, sayaṁjāto vā so dahoti, tasmā “devadaho”ti vutto. Tassa avidūre nigamo devadahantveva napuṁsakaliṅgavasena saṅkhaṁ gato.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dahana: {'def': '(Sk. dahana, to dahati, orig. “the burner”),【中】烧。【阳】火(fire；Vism.338. dahanakicca)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dahana, to dahati, orig. “the burner”] fire Vism.338 (°kicca); ThA.256; Dāvs.V,6; Sdhp.20. (Page 318)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】烧。【阳】火。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dahara: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dahara & dahra for dabhra to dabhnoti to be or make short or deficient, to deceive] small, little, delicate, young; a young boy, youth, lad D.I,80, 115; S.I,131; II,279 (daharo ce pi paññavā); M.I,82; II,19, 66; A.V,300; Sn.216, 420 (yuvā+), 578 (d. ca mahantā ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitā sabbe maccuvasaṁ yanti); J.I,88 (daharadahare dārake ca dārikāyo), 291 (°itthī a young wife); II,160, 353; III,393; Dh.382; Pv IV.1⁵⁰ (yuvā); DhA.I,397 (sāmaṇera); DA.I,197 (bhikkhū), 223 (=taruṇa), 284 (id.); PvA.148; VvA.76; ThA.239, 251. Opposed to mahallaka J.IV,482; to vuḍḍha Vism.100. ‹-› f. daharā Vv 31⁵ (young wife) (+yuvā VvA.129) & daharī J.IV,35; V,521; Miln.48 (dārikā). (Page 318)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】年纪轻的(small, little, delicate)。【阳】男孩(young, a young boy, youth)。daharā,【阴】年轻的太太(young wife)。daharī,【阴】女孩(lad)。opposed to mahallaka; to vuḍḍha Vism.100.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】年纪轻的。【阳】男孩。 ~rā, 【阴】女孩。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Daharaka: {'def': '=dahara, young Miln.310. -- f. °ikā a young girl Th.2, 464, 483. (Page 318)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dahati: {'def': '² =ḍahati to burn; as dahate Pv.II,9⁸ (=dahati vināseti PvA.116). (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (dahate)(Sk. dadhāti to put down, set up) 放置，接受(to put, place; take for (Acc. or Abl.), assume, claim, consider)。okkākaṁ pitāmahaṁ=ṭhapeti DA.I,258); S.III,113 (mittato daheyya); A.IV,239 (cittaṁ dahati, fix the mind on); Sn.825 (bālaṁ dahanti mithu aññamaññaṁ=passanti dakkhanti, etc. Nd1 163). Pass dhīyati (q. v.); grd. dheyya (q. v.). Note. dahati is more frequent in combn with prefixes & compositions like ā°, upa°, pari°, sad°, san°, samā°, etc. pp. hita。【过】dahi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2(dah流浪+a), 燃烧(=ḍahati to burn; as dahate Pv.II.98 (=dahati vināseti PvA.116).。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (dahate) [Sk. dadhāti to put down, set up; *dhe=Gr. ti/qhmi, Lat. facio, Ohg. tuon, Ags. dōn= E. to do. See also dhātu] to put, place; take for (Acc. or Abl.), assume, claim, consider D.I,92 (okkākaṁ pitāmahaṁ=ṭhapeti DA.I,258); S.III,113 (mittato daheyya); A.IV,239 (cittaṁ d. fix the mind on); Sn.825 (bālaṁ dahanti mithu aññamaññaṁ=passanti dakkhanti, etc. Nd¹ 163). Pass dhīyati (q. v.); grd. dheyya (q. v.). ‹-› Note. dahati is more frequent in combⁿ with prefixes & compositions like ā°, upa°, pari°, sad°, san°, samā°, etc. pp. hita. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dah + a), 1. 燃烧。 2. 接受。【过】 dahi。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Daka: {'def': '【中】水。 ~rakkhasa, 【阳】水鬼，水怪。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [=udaka, aphæretic from comb^ns like sītodaka which was taken for sīto+daka instead of sīt’odaka] Vin.III,112; S.III,85; A.II,33=Nd² 420 B³ (: the latter has udaka, but Nd¹ 14 daka).

--āsaya (adj.) (beings) living in water A.II,33≈; --ja (adj.) sprung from water, aquatic J.I,18 (thalajā d pupphā); --rakkhasa a water-sprite J.I,127, 170; VI,469. (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】水。dakarakkhasa,【阳】水鬼，水怪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dakkha: {'def': '【形】聪明的，能干的，熟练的，灵巧的。 ~tā, 【阴】技术，能力，聪明。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】聪明的，能干的，熟练的，灵巧的。dakkhatā,【阴】技术，能力，聪明。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Vedic dakṣa=Gr. a)ri-dei/ketos & deciόs; dakṣati to be able; to please, satisfy, cp. daśasyati to honour, denom. fr. *dasa=Lat. decus honour, skill. All to *dek in Lat. decet to be fit, proper, etc. On var. theories of connections of root see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under decet. It may be that *deks is an intens. formation fr. *diś to point (see disati), then the original meaning would be “pointing,” i. e. the hand used for pointing. For further etym. see dakkhiṇa] dexterous, skilled, handy, able, clever D.I,45, 74, 78; III,190 (+analasa) M.I,119; III,2; S.I,65; Nd² 141 (+analasa & sampajāna); J.III,247; DA.I,217 (=cheka); Miln.344 (rūpadakkhā those who are of “fit” appearance). (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [dakkha¹+ya, see dakkheyya] dexterity, ability, skill J.III,466. (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dakkhaka: {'def': '【形】领会的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】领会的人。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dakkhati: {'def': '(dis + a, dis 被改成 dakkh), 看。【过】 addakkhi, 【不】 dakkhituŋ,dakkhitāye。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Dakkhiti see dassati. (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dis+a, dis 被改成 dakkh), 看。【过】addakkhi,【不】dakkhituṁ, dakkhitāye。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dakkheyya: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. dakkha²] cleverness, skill J.II,237 (Com. kusalassa-ñāṇa-sampayuttaṁ viriyaṁ); III,468. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dakkhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. dakkhati, see dassati] seeing, perceiving; f. °ī in atīra-dakkhiṇī nāvā a ship out of sight of land D.I,222. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dakkhita: {'def': '[Vedic dīkṣita pp. of dīkṣ, Intens to daśayati: see dakkha¹] consecrated, dedicated J.V,138. Cp. dikkhita. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dakkhiṇa: {'def': '【形】南方的，右边的。 ~akkhaka, 【中】右锁骨。 ~disā, 【阴】南方。 ~desa, 【阳】南部国家。 ~ṇāpatha, 【阳】 “南路”（即今名“德干” Decan）。 ~ṇāyana, 【中】黄道向南移时（黄道向赤道的南方移进时期，即：太阳看来像是向南方移进的时期）。 ~ṇāraha, 【形】值得奉献的。 ~ṇāvatta, 【形】向右绕的。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic dakṣiṇa, Av. dašinō; adj. formation fr. adv. *deksi=*deksinos, cp. purāṇa fr. purā, viṣuṇa fr. viṣu, Lat. bīni (=bisni) fr. bis. From same root *deks are Lat. dexter (with compar.-antithetic suffix ter=Sk. tara, as in uttara) & Gr. deciterόs; cp. also Goth. taihswa (right hand), Ohg. zeso & zesawa. See dakkha for further connections] 1. right (opp. vāma left), with a tinge of the auspicious, lucky & prominent: Vin.II,195 (hattha); PvA.112, 132 (id.); Ps.I,125. hattha, pāda, etc. with ref. to a Tathāgata’s body); J.I,50 (°passa the right side); PvA.178 (id.), 112 (°bāhu); Sn.p. 106 (bāha); PvA.179 (°jānumaṇḍalena with the right knee: in veneration). -- 2. skilled, welltrained (=dakkha) J.VI,512 (Com. susikkhita). -- 3. (of that point of the compass which is characterized through “orientation” by facing the rising sun, & then lies on one’s right:) southern, usually in combⁿ with disā (direction): D.III,180 (one of the 6 points, see disā), 188 sq. (id.); M.I,487; II,72; S.I,145, etc.

--āvattaka (adj.) winding to the right D.II,18 (of the hairs of a Mahāpurisa, the 14^th of his characteristics or auspicious signs; cp. BSk. dakṣiṇāvarta a precious shell, i. e. a shell the spiral of which turns to the right AvŚ I.205; Divy 51, 67, 116); J.V,380; --janapada the southern country the “Dekkan” (=dakkhiṇaṁ) D.I,96, 153 (expl^d by Bdhgh as “Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇato pākaṭa-janapado” DA.I,265); --samudda the southern sea J.I,202. (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】南方的，右边的。dakkhiṇakkhaka,【中】右锁骨。dakkhiṇadisā,【阴】南方。dakkhiṇadesa,【阳】南部国家。dakkhiṇāpatha,【阳】“南路”(即今名 “德干” Decan)。dakkhiṇāyana,【中】黄道向南移时(黄道向赤道的南方移进时期，即：太阳看来像是向南方移进的时期)。dakkhiṇāraha,【形】值得奉献的。dakkhiṇāvatta,【形】向右绕的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dakkhiṇeyya: {'def': '【形】值得供养的。 ~puggala, 【阳】值得供养的人。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [grd.-formation fr. dakkhiṇā as from a verb *dakṣiṇāti=pūjeti] one worthy of a dakkiṇā. The term is expl. at KhA 183, & also (with ref. to brahmanic usage) at Nd² 291; -- S.I,142, 168, 220; M.I,37, 236 sq.; 446; A.I,63, 150; II,44; III,134, 162, 248; IV,13 sq.; D.III,5; It.19 (annañ ca datvā bahuno dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇaṁ . . . saggaṁ gacchanti dāyakā); Sn.227, 448 sq., 504, 529; Nd² 291 (as one of the 3 constituents of a successful sacrifice, viz. yañña the gift, phala the fruit of the gift, d. the recipient of the gift). Cp. I.10⁵ (where also adj. to be given, of dāna). Pv IV.1³³; VvA.120, 155 (Ep. of the Saṅgha= ujubhūta); PvA.25, 125, 128, 262.

--aggi the (holy) fire of a good receiver of gifts; a metaphor taken from the brahmanic rite of sacrifice, as one of the 7 fires (=duties) to be kept up (or discarded) by a follower of the Buddha A.IV,41, 45; D.III,217; --khetta the fruitful soil of a worthy recipient of a gift PvA.92; --puggala an individual deserving a donation J.I,228; there are 7 kinds enum^d at D.III,253; 8 kinds at D.III,255; --sampatti the blessing of finding a worthy object for a dakkhiṇā PvA.27, 137 sq. (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(grd.-formation fr. dakkhiṇā as from a verb *daksiṇāti=pūjeti),【形】【中】值得供养的。dakkhiṇeyyapuggala,【阳】值得供养的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dakkhiṇeyyatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact of being a dakkhiṇeyya Miln.240 (a°). (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dakkhiṇā: {'def': '【阴】南，礼物，（对圣人的）布施品。 ~visuddhi, 【阴】净施（礼物的纯净）。 ~ṇodaka, 【中】献水。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic dakṣiṇā to dakṣ as in daśasyati to honour, to consecrate, but taken as f. of dakkhiṇa & by grammarians expl. as gift by the “giving” (i. e. the right) hand with popular analogy to dā to give (dadāti)] a gift, a fee, a donation; a donation given to a “holy” person with ref. to unhappy beings in the Peta existence (“Manes”), intended to induce the alleviation of their sufferings; an intercessional, expiatory offering, “don attributif” (Feer) (see Stede, Peta Vatthu, etc. p. 51 sq.; Feer Index to AvŚ p. 480) D.I,51=III,66 (d.-uddhaggikā), cp. A.II,68 (uddhaggā d.); A.III,43, 46, 178, 259; IV,64 sq., 394; M.III,254 sq. (cuddasa pāṭipuggalikā d. given to 14 kinds of worthy recipients) Sn.482, 485; It.19; J.I,228; Pv.I,4⁴ (=dāna PvA.18), I.5⁹ (petānaṁ d °ṁ dajjā), IV.1⁵¹; Miln.257; Vism.220; PvA.29, 50, 70, 110 (pūjito dakkhiṇāya). guru-d. teacher’s fee VvA.229, 230; dakkhiṇaṁ ādisati (otherwise uddisati) to designate a gift to a particular person (with Dat.) Vin.I,229=D.II,88.

--âraha a worthy recipient of a dedicatory gift Pv.II,8⁶; --odaka water to wash in (orig. water of dedication, consecrated water) J.I,118; IV,370; DhA.I,112; PvA.23; --visuddhi. purity of a gift M.III,256 sq.=A.II,80 sq.=D.III,231, cp. Kvu 556 sq. (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】南方，礼物，(对圣人的)布施品。dakkhiṇāvisuddhi,【阴】净施(礼物的纯净)。dakkhiṇodaka,【中】献水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dakkhī: {'def': '【阳】见者，察觉的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】见者，察觉的人。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dala: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dala, *del (var. of *der, see dara) in dalati (q. v.) orig. a piece chipped off=a chip, piece of wood, cp. daṇḍa, Mhg. zelge (branch); Oir delb (figure, form), deil (staff, rod)] a blade, leaf, petal (usually --°); akkhi-d. eyelid ThA.259; DA.I,194; DhsA.378; uppala° DhsA.311; kamala° (lotus-petal) VvA.35, 38; muttā° (?) DA.I,252; ratta-pavāḷa° J.I,75. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】草叶，叶，花瓣。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】草叶，叶，花瓣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dalati: {'def': '[Sk. dalati, del to split off, tear; Gr. daidaλlw, Lat. dolare & delere. See dala & dara] to burst, split, break. -- Caus. dāleti Sn.29 (dalayitvā=chinditvā SnA 40); Miln.398. -- Pass. dīyati (Sk. dīryate) see uddīyati. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dalidda: {'def': '& Daḷidda (adj.-n.) [Sk. daridra, to daridrāti, Intens. to drāti run (see dava), in meaning cp. addhika wayfarer=poor] vagrant, strolling, poor, needy, wretched; a vagabond, beggar -- (l:) Vin.II,159; S.I,96 (opp. aḍḍha); A.II,57, 203; III,351; IV,219; V,43; Pug.51; VvA.299 (ḷ:) M.II,73; S.V,100, 384, 404; Vv20¹ (=duggata VvA.101); DA.I,298; PvA.227; Sdhp.89, 528. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐贫穷。S.46.46./V,100.：“Sattannaṁ kho, bhikkhu, bojjhaṅgānaṁ abhāvitattā abahulīkatattā ‘daliddo’ti vuccati.(比丘！不修习、不多修七觉支，称为贫穷。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dama: {'def': '(adj.-n.) (& of a nt. damo the Instr. damasā) [Ved. dama; Ags. tam=E. tame, Ohg. zam to *demā in dameti] taming, subduing; self-control, self-command, moderation D.I,53 (dānena damena saṁyamena=It.15; expl. at DA.I,160 as indriya-damena uposatha-kammena) III,147, 229; S.I,4, 29, 168=Sn.463 (saccena danto damasā upeto); S.IV,349; A.I,151; II,152 sq.; M.III,269 (+upasama); Sn.189, 542 (°ppatta), 655; Dh.9, 25, 261; Nett 77; Miln.24 (sudanto uttame dame). duddama hard to tame or control Dh.159; PvA.280; Sdhp.367. -- arindama taming the enemy (q. v.). (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'damatha,【阳】damana,【中】驯服，征服，调伏，抑制，控制。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'damatha, 【阳】 Damana, 【中】驯服，征服，抑制，控制。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Damaka: {'def': '【形】驯兽师，控制者，训练者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】驯兽师，控制者，训练者。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [=dama] 1. subduing, taming; converting; one who practises self-control M.I,446 (assa°); III,2 (id.) J.I,349 (kula° bhikkhu), one who teaches a clan self-mastery 505 (go°, assa°, hatthi°); Th.2, 422 (=kāruññāya paresaṁ cittassa damaka ThA.268). -- 2. one who practises self-mortification by living on the remnants of offered food (Childers) Abhp 467. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Damana: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) taming, subduing, mastery PvA.251 (arīnaṁ d°-sīla=arindama). (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Damatha: {'def': '[Sk. damatha] taming, subduing, mastery, restraint, control M.I,235; D.III,54 (+samatha); Dh.35 (cittassa d.); PvA.265; Dpvs VI,36. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Damaya: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. damya, see damma] to be tamed: duddamaya difficult to tame Th.1, 5 (better to be read damiya). (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dametar: {'def': '[n.-ag. to dameti=Sk. damayitṛ, cp. Sk. damitṛ= Gr. (pan)damάtwr dmhtήr; Lat. domitor] one who tames or subdues, a trainer, in phrase adantānaṁ dametā “the tamer of the untamed” (of a Buddha) M.II,102; Th.2, 135. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dameti: {'def': '[Sk. damayati, caus. to dāmyati of *dam to bring into the house, to domesticate; Gr. damάw, dmhtόs; Lat. domare; Oir. dam (ox); Goth. tamjan=Ohg. zemman=Ags. temian=E. tame; to *demā of dama house, see dampati] to make tame, chastise, punish, master, conquer, convert Vin.II,196 (daṇḍena); M.II,102; Dh.80, 305 (attānaṁ); It.123 (ppr. [danto] damayataṁ seṭṭho [santo] samayataṁ isi); Miln.14, 386; PvA.54 (core d.=converted). (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dam + e), 驯服，训练，征服，使转变。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 damita,danta。【现分】 damenta。【独】 dametvā。【潜】 dametabba, damanīya。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dam+e), 驯服，训练，征服，使转变。【过】damesi。【过分】damita, danta。【现分】damenta。【独】dametvā。【义】dametabba, damanīya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dametu: {'def': '【形】驯兽师，训练者。参考 damaka。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 damaka。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Damita: {'def': '[Sk. damāyita=danta³; cp. Gr. a-dάmatos; Lat. domitus] subdued, tamed J.V,36; PvA.265. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Damiḷa: {'def': 'm. ダミラ(Damiḷa)族, ドラヴィダ(達羅毗荼, drāvida 或 drāviḍa 或 draviḍa 或 dravida).', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. ダミラ族, ドラヴィダ.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Damma: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. damya, grd. of dāmyati see dameti & cp. damaya (damiya)] to be tamed or restrained; esp. with ref. to a young bullock M.I,225 (balagāvā dammagāvā the bulls & the young steers); It.80; also of other animals: assadamma-sārathi a horse-trainer A.II,112; & fig. of unconverted men likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa-damma-sārathi (Ep. of the Buddha) “the trainer of the human steer” D.I,62 (misprint °dhamma°)=II.93=III,5; M.II,38; A.II,112; Vv 17¹³ (nara-vara-d.-sārathi cp. VvA.86. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】要被驯养的，要被训练的。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. damya, grd. of dāmyati see dameti & cp. damaya (damiya)),【形】要被驯养的，要被训练的(to be tamed or restrained; esp. with ref. to a young bullock M.I,225 (balagāvā dammagāvā the bulls & the young steers))。also of other animals: assadamma-sārathi a horse-trainer A.II,112; & fig. of unconverted men likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa-damma-sārathi (Ep. of the Buddha) “the trainer of the human steer” D.I,62 (misprint °dhamma°)。dammagavabalavagavesu,(在)小牛、壮牛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dammika: {'def': '【形】如法的，正直的。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】如法的，正直的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dampati: {'def': '【阳】夫妻，妻子和丈夫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dampati master of the house; dual: husband & wife; cp. also patir dan, *dam, as in Gr. dώ, dώma & des- in despόths=dampati, short base of *dama house =Ved. dama, Gr. dQmos, Lat. domus to *demā (as also in dameti to domesticate) to build, cp. Gr. dέmw & dέmas; Goth. timrjan; Ohg. zimbar; E. timber] master of the house, householder, see tudampati & cp. gahapati. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】夫妻，妻子和丈夫。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dandha: {'def': '【形】慢的，无聊的，愚蠢的。 ~tā, 【阴】愚蠢，偷懒。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】慢的，无聊的，愚蠢的(slow; slothful, indocile; silly, stupid)。《增支部》A.3.68./I,200.：‘rāgo kho, āvuso, appasāvajjo dandhavirāgī, doso mahāsāvajjo khippavirāgī, moho mahāsāvajjo dandhavirāgī’(友！染是小罪迟退离，瞋是大罪速退离，痴是大罪迟退离。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk.? Fausböll refers it to Sk. tandra; Trenckner (Notes 65) to dṛḍha; see also Müller, P. Gr. 22, & Lüders Z.D.M.G. 58, 700. A problematic connection is that with thaddha & datta² (q. v.)] slow; slothful, indocile; silly, stupid M.I,453; S.IV,190; Dh.116; J.I,116, 143; II,447; V,158; VI,192 (+laḷāka); Th.1, 293; Miln.59, 102, 251; DhA.I,94, 251; III,4. Vism.105, 257 (with ref. to the liver).

--âbhiññā sluggish intuition D.III,106; A.V,63; Dhs.176; Nett 7, 24, 50, 123 sq., cp. A.II,149 sq.; Vism.85. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dandhanatā: {'def': '(f.), in a° absence of sluggishness Dhs.42, 43. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】懒散，呆滞。adandhanatā﹐不懒散，不呆滞(absence of sluggishness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dandhatā: {'def': '【阴】愚蠢(stupidity)。dandhattaṁ﹐愚蠢的状况态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) stupidity DhA.I,250; as dandhattaṁ at D.III,106. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dandheti: {'def': '[denom. fr. dandha] to be slow, to tarry Th.1, 293 (opp. tāreti). -- pp. dandhāyita see in der. °tta. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dandhāyanā: {'def': '【阴】(clumsiness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) clumsiness Miln.105. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dandhāyitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [der. fr. dandheti] stupidity (=dandhatā) D.I,249 (opp. vitthāyitatta); S.II,54; Miln.105; DA.I,252. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(der. fr. dandheti,【中】愚蠢(stupidity (=dandhatā)。opp. vitthāyitatta)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Danta: {'def': '² (adj.) [Sk. dānta] made of ivory, or iv.-coloured J.VI,223 (yāna=dantamaya).

--kāsāva ivory-white & yellow Vin.I,287; --valaya see danta¹. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [Sk. dānta, pp. dāmyati to make, or to be tame, cp. Gr. dmhtόs, Lat. domitus. See dameti] tamed, controlled, restrained Vin.II,196; S.I,28, 65, 141 (nāgo va danto carati anejo); A.I,6 (cittaṁ dantaṁ); It.123 (danto damayataṁ seṭṭho); Sn.370, 463, 513, 624; Dh.35, 142 (=catumagga-niyamena d. DhA.III,83), 321 sq.=Nd² 475. -- sudanta well-tamed, restrained Sn.23; Dh.159, 323.

--bhūmi a safe place (=Nibbāna), or the condition of one who is tamed S.III,84; Nd² 475 (in continuation of Dh.323); DhA.IV,6. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3 (dameti 的【过分】；梵dānta, pp. dāmyati to make, or to be tame), 已驯服，已受约束，已抑制。dantatā,【阴】dantabhāva,【阳】驯熟，温顺，控制，被抑制的状态。sudanta﹐很驯服。dantabhūmi﹐安全的地方(a safe place =Nibbāna)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】牙齿，牙，尖牙。 ~kaṭṭha,【中】牙刷，清洁牙齿的工具。 ~kāra,【阳】象牙工匠。 ~panti, 【阴】牙排。 ~poṇa, 【阳】清洁牙齿的工具。 ~valaya, 【中】象牙制的手镯。 ~vidaŋsaka, 【形】显露牙齿的。~āvaraṇa, 【中】唇。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. danta fr. Acc. dantaṁ of dan, Gen. datah= Lat. dentis. Cp. Av. dantan, Gr. o]dόnta, Lat. dentem, Oir. dēt; Goth. tunpus, Ohg. zand, Ags. tōot (=tooth) & tusc (=tusk); orig. ppr. to *ed in atti to eat=“the biter.” Cp. dāṭhā], a tooth, a tusk, fang, esp. an elephant’s tusk; ivory Vin.II,117 (nāga-d. a pin of ivory); Kh II. (as one of the taca-pañcaka, or 5 dermatic constituents of the body, viz. kesā, lomā nakhā d. taco, see detailed description at KhA 43 sq.); paṅkadanta rajassira “with sand between his teeth & dust on his head” (of a wayfarer) Sn.980; J.IV,362, 371; M.I,242; J.I,61; II,153; Vism.251; VvA.104 (īsā° long tusks); PvA.90, 152 (fang); Sdhp.360.

--ajina ivory M.II,71 (gloss: dhanadhaññaṁ); --aṭṭhika “teeth-bone,” ivory of teeth i. e. the tooth as such Vism.21. --āvaraṇa the lip (lit. protector of teeth) J.IV,188; VI,590; DhA.I,387. --ullahakaṁ (M.III,167) see ullahaka; --kaṭṭha a tooth-pick Vin.I,46=II.223; I,51, 61; II,138; A.III,250; J.I,232; II,25; VI,75; Miln.15; DhA.II,184; VvA.63; --kāra an artisan in ivory ivory-worker D.I,78; J.I,320; Miln.331; Vism.336; --kūta tooth of a maimed bullock (?) (thus taking kūṭa as kūṭa⁴, and equivalent to kūṭadanta), in phrase asanivicakkaṁ danta-kūṭaṁ D.III,44=47, which has also puzzled the translators (cp. Dial. III,40: “munching them all up together with that wheel-less thunderbolt of a jawbone,” with note: “the sentence is not clear”). --pāḷi row of teeth Vism.251; --poṇa tooth-cleaner, always comb^d with mukh’odaka water for rinsing the teeth Vin.III,51; IV,90, 233; J.IV,69; Miln.15; SnA 272. The C. on Pārāj. II.4, 17, (Vin.III,51) gives 2 kinds of dantapoṇa, viz. chinna & acchinna. --mūla the root of a tooth; the gums J.V,172; --vakkalika a kind of ascetics (peeling the bark of trees with their teeth?) DA.I,271; --vaṇṇa ivory-coloured, ivory-white Vv 45¹⁰; --valaya an iv. bangle DhA.I,226; --vikati a vessel of iv. D.I,78; M.II,18; J.I,320; Vism.336. --vikhādana biting with teeth, i. e. chewing Dhs.646, 740, 875; --vidaṁsaka (either=vidassaka or to be read °ghaṁsaka) showing one’s teeth (or chattering?) A.I,261 (of hasita, laughter); --sampatti splendour of teeth DhA.I,390. (Page 313)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(梵danta),【中】牙齿，牙，尖牙。dantakaṭṭha,【中】牙刷、牙签(tooth-pick﹐tooth-cleaner) (古译：杨枝)。dantaṭṭhika,【中】牙齿(颚骨?)。dantakāra,【阳】象牙工匠。dantapanti,【阴】整排牙齿。dantapoṇa,【阳】清洁牙齿的工具(tooth-cleaner)(古译：杨枝)。dantavalaya,【中】象牙制的手镯。dantavidaṁsaka,【形】(=dantavidassaka or =dantaghaṁsaka)露齿(而笑)。dantāvaraṇa,【中】唇。dantavakkalika﹐穿树皮的苦行僧( a kind of ascetics--peeling the bark of trees with their teeth?)。dantavaṇṇa﹐(ivory-coloured, ivory-white)。dantavidaṁsaka。dantasampatti﹐美齿( splendour of teeth )。dantajina 象牙(ivory) (gloss:dhanadhaññaṁ) 。dantaṭṭhika﹐象牙( “teeth-bone,” ivory of teeth)。dantāvaraṇa﹐唇( the lip--lit.protector of teeth)。A.5.208./III,250.：Cakkhussaṁ, mukhaṁ na duggandhaṁ hoti, rasaharaṇiyo visujjhanti, pittaṁ semhaṁ bhattaṁ na pariyonandhati, bhattamassa chādeti.((嚼杨枝五利益：)适可於眼、口不恶臭、味神经清净、胆汁与痰不缠络食物、食物甘於彼。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dameti 的【过分】), 已驯服，已受约束，已抑制。 ~tā, 【阴】 ~bhāva,【阳】驯熟，温顺，控制，被抑制的状态。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 (梵dānta)﹐【形】象牙制品(made of ivory, or ivory-coloured (yāna=dantamaya)。dantakāsāva﹐象牙白或象牙黄。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dantaka: {'def': 'a pin of tooth or ivory; makara° the tooth of a sword-fish Vin.II,113, 117; IV,47. See details under makara. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dantasaṭha: {'def': '【阳】酸橙树，【中】酸橙。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】酸橙树，【中】酸橙。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dapeti: {'def': 'Caus. fr. dā⁴ to clean, see pariyo°; pp. dāta see ava°. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dappa: {'def': '[Sk. darpa, to dṛpyati] wantonness, arrogance J.II,277; Miln.361, 414; Pgdp 50. Cp. ditta². -- In def. of root gabb at Dhtm 289. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】傲慢态度，蛮横。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】傲慢态度，蛮横。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dappaṇa: {'def': '【中】镜子。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】镜子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dappita: {'def': '【形】傲慢的，骄傲的。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】傲慢的，骄傲的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) arrogant, haughty J.V,232, 301. (Page 314)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dara: {'def': 'daratha,【阳】悲伤，焦虑，苦恼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'daratha, 【阳】悲伤，焦虑，苦恼。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dara; see etym. connection under darī] fear, terror; sorrow, pain Vin.II,156=A.I,138 (vineyya hadaye daraṁ); S.II,101, 103; IV,186 sq.; Th.2, 32 (=cittakato kilesa-patho ThA, 38); J.IV,61; Vv 83⁸ (=daratha VvA.327); Pv.I,8⁵ (=citta-daratha PvA.41). -- sadara giving pain, fearful, painful M.I,464; A.II,11, 172; S.I,101. Cp. ādara & purindada. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daratha: {'def': '[Sk. daratha, der. fr. dara] anxiety, care, distress A.II,238; M.III,287 sq. (kāyikā & cetasikā d.); Sn.15 (darathajā: the Arahant has nought in him born of care C^y explains by pariḷāha fever); J.I,61 (sabbakilesa-d.) PvA.230 (id.); DhA.II,215; Miln.320; PvA.23, 41; VvA.327. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Darī: {'def': '【阴】劈开，裂缝，巨穴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. darī to dṛṇāti to cleave, split, tear, rend, caus. darayati *der=Gr. dέrw to skin, dέrma, dorά skin); Lith. dirù (id.) Goth. ga-taíran=Ags. teran (tear) =Ohg. zeran (Ger. zerren). To this the variant (r:l) *del in dalati, dala, etc. See also daddara, daddu, dara, avadīyati, ādiṇṇa, uddīyati, purindada (=puraṁ-dara)] a cleavage, cleft; a hole, cave, cavern J.I,18 (v. 106), 462 (mūsikā° mouse-hole); II,418 (=maṇiguhā); SnA 500 (=padara).

--cara a cave dweller (of a monkey) J.V,70; --mukha entrance of a cave Vism.110. --saya a lair in a cleft Cp. III,7¹. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】劈开，裂缝，巨穴。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dasa: {'def': '¹ [Sk. daśa=Av. dasa, Gr. dέka, Lat. decem, Goth. taíhun, Oir. deich, Ags. tīen, Ohg. zehan fr. *dekm̊, a cpd. of dv+km̊=“two hands”] the number ten; Gen. dasannaṁ (Dh.137); Instr. dasahi (Kh III,) & dasabhi (Vin.I,38). In cpds. (-°) also as ḷasa (soḷasa 16) & rasa (terasa 13; pannar° 15; aṭṭhār° 18).

Metaphorical meaning. (A) In the first place 10 is used for measurement (more recent & comprehensive than its base 5); it is the no. of a set or comprehensive unity, not in a vague (like 3 or 5), but in a definite sense. (B) There inheres in it the idea of a fixed measure, with which that of an authoritative, solemn & auspicious importance is coupled. This applies to the unit as well as its decimal comb^ns (100, 1000). Ethically it denotes a circle, to fulfil all of which constitutes a high achievement or power. Application (A) (based on natural phenomena): dasa disā (10 points of the compass; see disā): Sn.719, 1122; PvA.71, etc.; d. lokadhātuyo Pv.II,9⁶¹ (=10X1000; PvA.138); d. māse (10 months as time of gestation) kucchiyā pariharitvā J.I,52; PvA.43, 82. -- (B) (fig.) 1. a set: (a) personal (cp. 10 people would have saved Sodom: Gen. 18, 32; the 10 virgins (2X5) Matt. 25, 1): divase divase dasa dasa putte vijāyitvā (giving birth to 10 sons day by day) Pv.I,6. -- (b) impersonal: 10 commandments (dasa sikkhāpadāni Vin.I,83), cp. Exod. 34, 28; 10 attributes of perfection of a Tathāgata or an Arahant: Tathāgata-balāni; with ref. to the Buddha see Vin.I,38 & cp. Vin. Texts I.141 sq.; dasah’aṅgehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati (in memorizing of No. 10) Kh III, dasahi asaddhammehi sam° kāko J.III,127; -- 10 heavenly attributes (ṭhānāni): āyu etc. D.III,146; S.V,275; PvA.9, opp. 10 afflictions as punishment (cp. 10 plagues Exod. 7--11): dasannaṁ aññataraṁ ṭhānaṁ nigacchati Dh.137 (=das. dukkha-kāraṇānaṁ, enum^d v. 138, 139) “afflicted with one of the 10 plagues”; cp. DhA.III,70. -- 10 good gifts to the bhikkhu (see deyyadhamma) Nd² 523; PvA.7; 10 rules for the king: PvA.161; -- dividing the Empire into 10 parts: PvA.111; etc. vassa-dasa a decade: das’ev’imā vassa-dasā J.IV,396 (enum^d under vassa); dasa-rāja-dhammā J.II,367; das’akkosa-vatthūni DhA.I,212.- See on similar sets A.V,1--310; D.III,266--271. -- 2. a larger unity, a crowd, a vast number (of time & space): (a) personal, often meaning “all” (cp. 10 sons of Haman were slain Esth. 9, 10; 10 lepers cleansed at one time Luke 17, 12): dasa bhātaro J.I,307; dasa bhātikā PvA.111; dasa-kaññā-sahassa-parivārā PvA.210 etc. ‹-› (b) impersonal (cp. 10 X 10=many times, S.B.E. 43, 3): dasa-yojanika consisting of a good many miles DhA.III,291. dasavassasahassāni dibbāni vatthāni paridahanto (“for ever and aye”) PvA.76, etc.

--kkhattuṁ [Sk. °kṛtvah] ten times DhA.I,388; --pada (nt.) a draught-board (with 10 squares on each side); a pre-Buddhistic game, played with men and dice, on such a board D.I,6; Vin.II,10=III,180 (°e kīḷanti); DA.I,85. --bala, [Sk. daśabala] endowed with 10 (supernormal) powers, Ep. of the Buddhas, esp. of Kassapa Buddha Vin.I,38=J.I,84; S.II,27; Vism.193, 391; DhA.I,14; VvA.148, 206, etc. --vidha tenfold DhA.I,398. --sata ten times a hundred Vin.I,38 (°parivāro); Sn.179 (yakkhā); DhsA.198 (°nayano). --sahassa ten times a thousand (freq.); °ī in dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu Vin.I,12 (see lokadhātu). (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 见者，领会的人。duddasa =难领会的，不易看到的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】十。 ~ka, 【中】十年，十个一组。 ~kkhattuŋ, 【副】十次。~dhā, 【副】十方式。 ~bala, 【形】十力，佛陀。 ~vidha, 【形】十倍的。 ~sata, 【中】千。 ~satanayana 【形】有一千只眼睛的（即：释帝 Sakka）。 ~sahassa, 【中】十千。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】十。Gen.dasannaṁ, dasānaṁ; Instr.dasahi & dasabhi。dasaka,【中】十年，十个一组。dasakkhattuṁ,【副】十次。dasadhā,【副】十方式。dasabala,【形】十力，佛陀。dasavidha,【形】十倍的。dasasata,【中】千。dasasatanayana 【形】有一千只眼睛的(即：帝释 Sakka)。dasasahassa,【中】十千(=一万)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 见者，领会的人。 duddasa = 难领会的，不易看到的。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (-°) [Sk.-dṛśa; cp. dassa] seeing, to be seen, to be perceived or understood D.I,18 (aññadatthu° sureseeing, all-perceiving=sabbaṁ passāmī ti attho DA.I,111); Sn.653 (paṭiccasamuppāda°), 733 (sammad°); J.I,506 (yugamatta°; v. l. dassa). -- duddasa difficult to be seen or understood D.I,12 (dhammā gambhīrā d.; see gambhīra); M.I,167, 487; Sn.938; Dh.252; also as sududdasa Dh.36. (Page 316)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dasaka: {'def': '(nt.) 1. a decad, decade, a decennial J.IV,397; DhsA.316. khiḍḍā° the decad of play Vism.619; cakkhu° etc. sense-decads Vism. 553; Comp. 164, 250; kāya°, Vism. 588. (Page 316)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dasana: {'def': '【中】齿。dasanacchada,【阳】唇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. daśana to ḍasati] a tooth Dāvs.V,3 (d.‹-› dhātu, the tooth relic of the Buddha). (Page 316)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】齿。 ~cchada, 【阳】唇。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dasika: {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. dasā] belonging to a fringe, in dasika --sutta an unwoven or loose thread Vin.III,241; DhA.IV,206 (°mattam pi not even a thread, i. e. nothing at all, cp. Lat. nihīlum=ne-fīlum not a thread=nothing). See also dasaka under dasā. (Page 316)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) (-°) [Sk. dṛśika, cp. dassin] to be seen, to behold, being of appearance, only in dud° or frightful app., fierce, ugly SI .94 & id. p. (q. v. under okoṭimaka); J.I,504 (kodha, anger); PvA.24, 90 (of Petas). -- Note. The spelling is sometimes °dassika: A.II,85; Pug.51; PvA.90. (Page 316)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dasikasutta: {'def': '【中】（衣服）须边的须线。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】(衣服)边缘的须线。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dassa: {'def': '(-°) [Sk. --darśa; cp. dasa²] to see or to be seen, perceiving, perceived Sn.1134 (appa° of small sight, not seeing far, knowing little=paritta-dassa thoka-dassa Nd² 69). Cp. akkha° a judge Miln.114. --su° easily perceived (opp. duddasa) Dh.252. (Page 316)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassaka: {'def': '【形】显示的人。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】显示的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dassana: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. darśana, see dassati¹] -- 1. Lit. seeing, looking; noticing; sight of, appearance, look. Often equivalent to an infinitive “to see,” esp. as Dat. dassanāya in order to see, for the purpose of seeing (cp. dassana-kāma=daṭṭhu-kāma): [Bhagavantaṁ] dassanāya M.II,23, 46; A.I,121; III,381; Sn.325. -- (a) (nt.) “sight” D.II,157 (visūka°, looking on at spectacles); A.III,202 (+savana hearing); IV,25 sq. (bhikkhu°); Sn.207 (muni°, may be taken as 2, cp. SnA 256), 266 (=pekkhaṇa KhA 148); Dh.206 (ariyānaṁ d., cp. ariyānaṁ dassāvin), 210 (appiyānaṁ), 274; Vv 34²; VvA.138 (sippa° exhibition of art, competition).‹-› (b) adj. as (-°) “of appearance” (cp. °dasa) Sn.548 (cāru° lovely to behold); PvA.24 (bhayānaka° fearful to look at), 68 (bībhaccha°). -- 2. Appld. (power of) perception, faculty of apperception, insight, view, theory; esp. (a) in combⁿ ñāṇa-dassana either “knowing & seeing,” or perhaps “the insight arising from knowledge,” perfect knowledge, realization of the truth, wisdom (cp. ñāṇa): S.I,52; II,30; V,28, 422; M.I,195 sq., 241, 482 (Gotamo sabbaññū sabba-dassāvī aparisesaṁ ñ-d °ṁ paṭijānāti; id. II.31); D.III,134; A.I,220; II,220; IV,302 sq.; cp. ñ-d-paṭilābha A.I,43; II,44 sq.; III 323; ñ-d-visuddhi M.I,147 sq. Also with further determination as adhideva-ñ-d° A.IV,428; alam-ariya° S.III,48; IV,300; V,126 sq.; M.I,68, 71, 81, 207, 246, 440 sq., A.I,9; III,64, 430; V,88; parisuddha A.III,125; maggâmagga° A.V,47; yathābhūta° A.III,19, 200; IV,99, 336; V,2 sq., 311 sq.; vimutti° S.I,139; V,67; A.III,12, 81, 134; IV,99, 336; V,130; It.107, 108; Miln.338. See also vimutti. -- (b) in other contexts: ariyasaccāna-dassana Sn.267; ujubhūta° S.V,384, 404; dhamma° (the right doctrine) S.V,204, 344, 404; A.III,263; pāpa° (a sinful view) Pv IV.3⁵⁵; viparīta° A.III,114; IV,226; V,284 sq. (and a°), 293 sq. sammā° (right view) S.III,189; A.III,138; IV,290; V,199; sabbalokena d. S.IV,127; sahetu d. S.V,126 sq.; suvisuddha d. S.IV,191. -- S.III,28, 49; M.II,46; III,157; Sn.989 (wisdom: Jinānaṁ eta d. corresponding with ñāṇa in preceding line); Dhs.584, 1002 (insight: cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 256). -- (adj.) perceiving or having a view (cp. dasseti) S.I,181 (visuddha°); Th.1, 422. -- (c) as nt. from the Caus. dasseti: pointing out, showing; implication, definition, statement (in Com. style) PvA.72; often as °ākāra-dassana: PvA.26 (dātabba°), 27 (thomana°), 35 (kata°) & in dassanatthaṁ in order to point out, meaning by this, etc. PvA.9, 68. -- 3. adassana not seeing S.I,168=Sn.459; invisibility J.IV,496 (°ṁ vajjati to become invisible); wrong theory or view A.V,145 sq.; Sn.206; Pug.21.

--anuttariya (nt.) the pre-eminence or importance of (right or perfect) insight; as one of the 3 anuttariyāni, viz. d°, paṭipadā°, vimutta° at D.III,219, 250, 281; A.III,284, 325; --kāma (adj.) desirous of seeing A.I,150; IV,115; Miln.23; --bhūmi the level or plane of insight Nett 8, 14, 50; --sampanna endowed with right insight S.II,43 sq., 58. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵 Darwana),【中】看见，直觉，洞察力。dassanatthaṁ, 以便指出(in order to point out, meaning by this)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】看见，直觉，洞察力。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dassaneyya: {'def': '(adj.)=dassanīya J.V,203 (bhusa°). (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassanīya: {'def': 'dassaneyya,【形】被认为美丽的，美丽的，英俊的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '~neyya, 【形】被认为美丽的，美丽的，英俊的。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. darśanīya; grd. formation of dassana, also as dassaneyya] fair to behold, beautiful, good-looking (=dassituṁ yutta DA.I,141), often in formula abhirūpa d. pāsādika paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgata to express matchless physical beauty: D.I,114; S.II,279; PvA.46 etc. Also with abhirūpa & pāsādika alone of anything fair & beautiful: D.I,47. -- Vin.IV,18; S.I,95; J.III,394; Pug.52, 66; DA.I,281; PvA.44 (=subha), 51 (=rucira). -- Comparative dassanīyatara S.I,237; Sdhp.325: DhA.I,119. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassati: {'def': '(dadāti 的【未】), 他将会给。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 (dadāti 的【未】), 他将会给。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (Sk. *darw in dadarwa pref. to drw; caus. darwayati),见，觉知，见识(to see, to perceive)。1. (pres.) base dakkh (Sk. draks): pres. (a) dakkhati (=passati), 1st dakkhāmi(=passāmi), 2nd dakkhasi; (=adakkhi); imper. dakkha(=passa). -- (b) dakkhiti(=dakkhati), 3rd pl. dakkhinti(=dakkhanti). -- aor. addakkhi (Sk. adraksīt)(=addasa); & dakkhi; 1st sg. addakkhiṁ. Spelling also adakkhi & adakkhiṁ. -- inf. dakkhituṁ. -- caus. p.p. dakkhāpita (shown, exhibited). -- der. dakkhin (q. v.).%b\xa0\xa02. (pret.) base dass (Sk. darw & draw): aor. (a) addasa (Sk. adarwat)(mā addasa=addakkhiṁ); & (older, cp. agamā) addasā(=addasa); 1st sg. addasaṁ; & addasaṁ(=adakkhiṁ), 1st pl. addasāma, 3rd pl. (mā) addasuṁ(=mā passiṁsu)；3rd pl. dassayiṁsu (b) addasāsi, 1st sg. addasāsiṁ(v. l. addasāmi), 3rd pl. addasāsuṁ. -- (c) shortened forms of aor. are: adda Th 1, 986; addā. -- inf. daṭṭhuṁ(daṭṭhukāma); (=passituṁ). -- ger. daṭṭhu (=Sk. drsṭvā) (in phrase nekkhammaṁ daṭṭhu khemato)=1098; 681. Expl. at Nd2 292 with expl. of disvā=passitvā, etc. grd. daṭṭhabba (to be regarded as); & dassanīya (see sep.). Also in Caus. (see below) & in daṭṭhar (q. v.).%b\xa0\xa03. (med.-pass.) base diss (Sk. drw): pres. pass. dissati (to be seen, to appear) (dissare), (dissasi you look, intrs.); ppr. dissamāna (visible) PvA 71, 6 (°rūpa); VvA 78 (°kāya); & der. dissamānatta (nt.) (visibility). -- ger. disvā & disvāna; also a ger. form diṭṭhā, q. v. under adiṭṭhā. -- pp. diṭṭha (q. v.)。dassayiṁsu\xa0\xa04. Caus. (of base 2) dasseti (Sk. darwayati), aor. dassesi & (exceptional) dassayi, only in dassayi tumaṁ showed himself at Pv III.24 (=attānaṁ uddisayi) & (=attānaṁ dassayi dassesi pākaṭo ahosi). 3rd pl. dassesuṁ; ger. dassetvā; inf. dassetuṁ to point out, exhibit, explain, intimate.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² fut. of dadāti, q. v. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassetar: {'def': '[Sk. darśayitṛ, n. agent to dasseti] one who shows or points out, a guide, instructor, teacher A.I,62, 132=It.110. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dasseti: {'def': '(dis+e, dis 被改成 das), 出示，展现。【过】dassesi。【过分】dassita,【现分】dassenta,【独】dassetvā, dassiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dis + e, dis 被改成 das), 出示，展现。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 dassita,【现分】 dassenta, 【独】 dassetvā, dassiya。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Caus. of dassati¹ (q. v.). (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassetu: {'def': '【阳】指出的人，出示的人。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】指出的人，出示的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dassika: {'def': '(-°): see dasika¹. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassimant: {'def': 'see attha°. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [Sk. °darśin] seeing, finding, realizing, perceiving. Only in cpds., like attha° Sn.385; ananta° S.I,143; ādīnava° Sdhp.409; ekaṅga° Ud.69; jātikkhaya° Sn.209; It.40; ñāṇa° Sn.478 (=sacchikatasabbaññuta-ñāṇa SnA 411; cp. dassāvin); tīra° S.III,164 sq.; A.III,368, cp. tīra-dakkhin; dīgha° (=sabbadassāvin) PvA.196; bhaya° Dh.31 (°dassivā=dassī vā?), 317; It.40; DA.I,181 (=bhaya dassāvin); viveka° Sn.474, 851. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassita: {'def': '¹ [Sk. darśita, pp. of dasseti¹] shown, exhibited, performed Vin.IV,365; J.I,330. Cp. san°. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² at J.VI,579 accord. to Kern (Toev. p. 114)=Sk. daṁśita mailed, armed. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dasso: {'def': 'n. pl. of dāsī. (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassu: {'def': '【阳】强盗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】强盗。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dasyu, cp. dāsa] enemy, foe; robber, in dassukhīla robber-plague D.I,135, 136 (=corakhīla DA.I,296). (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassāvin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Sk. *darśavant] full of insight, seeing, perceiving, taking notice of. In combⁿ with °ñū (knowing) it plays the part of an additional emphasis to the 1st term=knowing & seeing i. e. having complete or highest knowledge of, gifted with “clear” sight or intuition (see jānāti passati & cp. ñāṇa-dassana). ‹-› (a) As adj. --°: seeing, being aware of, realizing; anicca° S.III,1; ādīnava° S.II,194; IV,332; M.I,173; A.V,181 sq.; pariyanta° A.V,50 sq.; bhaya° S.V,187: It.96; esp. in phrase anumattesu vajjesu bhaya° D.I,63=It.118 (cp bhaya-dassin); lokavajjabhaya° S.I,138; sabba° (+sabbaññū) M.I,482 (samaṇo Gotamo s° s°); II,31; Miln.74 (Buddho s° s°); cp. M Vastu III,51 sarvadarśāvin; sāra°. Vin.II,139. -- (b) (n.) one who sees or takes notice of, in phrase ariyānaṁ dassāvī (+sappurisānaṁ dassāvī & kovido) M.I,8; S.III,4; opp. adassāvī one who disregards the Noble Ones S.III,3, 113; M.III,17; Dhs.1003 (cp. DhsA.350). (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassāvitā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to dassāvin] seeing, sight (-°) Miln.140 (guṇavisesa°). (Page 317)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dassāvī: {'def': 'dassī,【阳】见者(只有在【合】中，例： bhayadassāvī)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'dassī, 【阳】见者（只有在【合】中，例： bhayadassāvī）。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dasā: {'def': '(f.) & dasa (nt.) [Sk. daśā] unwoven thread of a web of cloth, fringe, edge or border of a garment D.I,7 (dīgha° long-fringed, of vatthāni); J.V,187; DhA.I,180; IV,106 (dasāni). -- sadasa (nt.) a kind of seat, a rug (lit. with a fringe) Vin.IV,171 (=nisīdana); opp. adasaka (adj.) without a fringe or border Vin.II,301=307 (nisīdana). --anta edge of the border of a garment J.I,467; DhA.I,180 sq., 391. (Page 316)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】1.衣服的边缘或须边。2.条件。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 1. 衣服的边缘或须边。 2. 条件。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Datta: {'def': '¹ [pp. of dadāti] given (-° by; often in Np. as Brahmadatta, Deva-datta=Theo-dor. etc.) Sn.217 (para°) =SnA 272 (v. l. dinna). (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.-n.) [prob.=thaddha, with popular analogy to datta¹, see also dandha & cp. dattu] stupid; a silly fellow M.I,383; J.VI,192 (Com.: dandha lāḷaka). (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已给。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已给。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Datti: {'def': '【阴】保存食物的小容器。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [from dadāti+ti] gift, donation, offering D.I,166; M.I,78, 342; A.I,295; II,206; Pug.55. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】保存食物的小容器。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dattika: {'def': '(adj.) [der. fr. datta] given; J.III,221 (kula°); IV,146 (id.); nt. a gift D.I,103 (=dinnaka DA.I,271). (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'datthiya,dattiya,【形】(在【合】中) 被给的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'dattiya, 【形】 (在【合】中) 被给的。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dattiya: {'def': '=dattika, given as a present J.II,119 (kula°); V,281 (sakka°); VI,21 (id.): VvA.185 (mahārāja° by the King). (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dattu: {'def': '(adj.?) [is it base of n. ag. dātar? see datta²] stupid, in d°-paññatta a doctrine of fools D.I,55=M.I,515; J.IV,338. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】愚蠢的人。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】愚蠢的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Datvā: {'def': 'daditvā, (dadāti 的【独】) 给了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'daditvā, (dadāti 的【独】) 给了。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dava: {'def': '¹ [Sk. dava, to dunoti (q. v.); cp. Gr. dais fire-brand] fire, heat J.III,260. -- See also dāva & dāya.

--ḍāha (=Sk. davāgni) conflagration of a forest, a jungle-fire Vin.II,138; M.I,306; J.I,641; Cp. III,9³; Miln.189; Vism.36. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】游戏，运动。davakamyatā,【阴】喜爱开玩笑。davatthāya, davāya,【与.单】开玩笑地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Sk. drava to dravati to run, flow, etc. *dreu besides *drā (see dalidda) & *dram (=Gr. drόmos); cp. abhiddavati, also dabba=dravyaṁ] running, course, flight; quickness, sporting, exercise, play Vin.II,13; M.I,273; III,2; A.I,114; II,40, 145; IV,167; Pug.21, 25. -- davā (Abl.) in sport, in fun Vin.II,101; davāya (Dat.) id. Nd² 540; Miln.367; Dhs.1347, cp. DhsA.402. -- davaṁ karoti to sport, to play J.II,359, 363.

--atthāya in joke, for fun Vin.II,113; --kamyatā fondness for joking, Vin.IV,11, 354; M.I,565. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】游戏，运动。 ~kamyatā, 【阴】喜爱开玩笑。 ~tthāya, davāya,【与、单】开玩笑地。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Davaḍāha: {'def': '【阳】森林火灾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】森林火灾。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Davya: {'def': '[for *dravya]=dabba¹, in sarīra° fitness of body, a beautiful body J.II,137. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dayati: {'def': '² =[Ved. dayate of day to divide, share, cp. Gr. dai/omai, dai/numi, dai/th, etc. to dā (see dadāti, base 2), & with p. Gr. dapάnh, Lat. daps (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] to have pity (c. Loc.), to sympathize, to be kind J.VI,445 (dayitabba), 495 (dayyāsi=dayaṁ kareyyāsi). (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ =dayati (q. v.) to fly J.IV,347 (+uppatati); VI,145 (dayassu=uyyassu Com.). (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dayita: {'def': '【过分】已同情。 ~bba, 【潜】可以同情，可以帮助。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已同情。dayitabba,【义】可以同情，可以帮助。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dayitā: {'def': '【阴】女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女人。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dayā: {'def': '【阴】同情，怜悯，仁慈。 ~lu, 【形】富于同情心的。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Ved. dayā, to dayati²] sympathy, compassion, kindness M.I,78; Sn.117; J.I,23; VI,495. Usually as anuddayā; freq. in cpd. dayāpanna showing kindness D.I,4 (=dayaṁ metta-cittaṁ āpanno DA.I,70); M.I,288; A.IV,249 sq.; Pug.57; VvA.23. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Ved. dayā, to dayati2),【阴】同情，怜悯，仁慈(sympathy, compassion, kindness)。anuddayā﹐仁慈。dayāpanna﹐仁慈(showing kindness (=dayaṁ metta-cittaṁ āpanno)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dayālu: {'def': '【形】富於同情心的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daḍḍha: {'def': '(dahati 的【过分】), 已烧〔伤, 焦〕，已烧毁。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】被火烧毁的地方。 ~geha, 【形】房子被烧毁的的人。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dahati 的【过分】), 已烧〔伤, 焦〕，已烧毁。daḍḍhaṭṭhāna,【中】被火烧毁的地方。daḍḍhageha,【形】房子被烧毁的的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dagdha, pp. of dahati, see ḍahati] burnt, always with aggi° consumed by fire Sn.62; Pv.I,7⁴; Miln.47; PvA.56 (indaggi°).

--ṭṭhāna a place burnt by fire J.I,212; also a place of cremation (sarīrassa d.) PvA.163 (=āḷāhana). (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daḍḍhi°: {'def': '[not with Trenckner, Notes p. 65=Sk. dārḍhya, but with Kern, Toev. 113=Sk. dṛḍhī (from dṛḍha, see daḷha), as in compⁿ dṛḍhī karoti & bhavati to make or become strong] making firm, strengthening, in kayādaḍḍhi-bahula strengthened by gymnastics, an athlete J.III,310 (v. l. daḷhi°), IV.219 (v. l. distorted kādaḷiphahuna). (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daḷha: {'def': '【形】结实的，强壮的，稳固的。 ~parakkama, 【形】很努力的，精力充沛的。 ~haŋ, 【副】坚定地，强烈地。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. drḍha to drhyati to fasten),【形】结实的，强壮的，稳固的。daḷhadhamma,【形】全面加强(strong in anything)，熟练(skilled in some art, proficient)。daḷhaparakkama,【形】很努力的，精力充沛的。daḷhaṁ,【副】坚定地，强烈地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dṛḍha to dṛhyati to fasten, hold fast; *dhergh, cp. Lat. fortis (strong). Gr. tarfuζ (thick), Lith. diQas (strap). For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fortis] firm, strong, solid; steady, fast; nt. adv. very much, hard, strongly -- D.I,245; S.I,77; A.II,33; Sn.321 (nāvā), 357, 701, 821 (°ṁ karoti to strengthen), 966 (id.); Dh.112; J.II,3; IV,106; DhA.IV,48; KhA 184; VvA.212 (=thira); PvA.94, 277. -- daḷhaṁ (adv.) Dh.61, 313.

--dhamma strong in anything, skilled in some art, proficient S.II,266=A.II,48 (of an archer); M.I,82; J.VI,77; Vv 63¹ Acc. to Trenckner, Notes p. 60 (cp. also VvA.261)=dṛḍha-dhanva, from dhanu=having a strong bow; --nikkama of strong exertion Sn.68 (=Nd² 294); --parakkama of strong effort, energetic M.II,95; A.II,250; Dh.23; Th.2, 160; --pahāra a violent blow J.III,83; --pākāra (etc.) strongly fortified S.IV,194; --bhattin firmly devoted to somebody DhsA.350. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daḷhāya: {'def': '﹐蛇，蚖蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daḷhī-: {'def': '(›daḷha),【阴】锻链(身体)(kāya-daḷhī-bahula strong in body)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daḷhīkamma: {'def': 'daḷhīkaraṇa, 【中】加强，做给牢固。(p154)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'daḷhīkaraṇa,【中】加强(making firm)，强化(strengthening)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daḷhī°: {'def': '[f. of dṛḍha›daḷha in compⁿ like dṛḍhī-bhūta, etc.; cp. daḍḍhi] in kāya-daḷhī-bahula strong in body, athletic Vin.II,76, cp. Com. on p. 313; J.III,310; IV,219. daḷhīkaraṇa steadiness, perseverance SnA 290 (+ādhāraṇatā), 398 (id). In cpds. also daḷhi° viz. --kamma making firm; strengthening Vin.I,290; J.V,254; Pug.18, 22; Vism.112. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daḷidda: {'def': '【形】穷的，贫穷的，贫穷的人。(p153)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐Dalidda(Sk. daridra, to daridrāti),【形】【名】穷，贫穷；浪子，贫穷的人(vagrant, strolling, poor, needy, wretched; a vagabond, beggar)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daḷiddatā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. daridratā] poverty VvA.63. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daḷiddiya: {'def': 'see dāḷiddiya. (Page 315)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daṁsaka: {'def': 'see vi°. (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daṁseti: {'def': '(for dasseti): see upa°; pavi°, vi°. (Page 311)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(for dasseti), 显示。see upadaṁseti; pavidaṁseti, vidaṁseti. nidaṁseti。nidaṁsanī', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daṇḍa: {'def': '【阳】 1. 茎，棍，棍棒，拐杖，（大体上）木材。 2. 罚款，处罚。 ~ka,【中】棍，小枝，竿，柄。 ~kamadhu,【中】悬挂在树枝上的蜂巢。 ~kamma,【中】处罚，惩罚，赔偿。~koti, 【阴】棍端。 ~dīpikā, 【阴】火把。~nīya, 【形】有处罚倾向的。 ~ppatta, 【形】被告发的人。 ~parāyaṇa,【形】靠着手杖的，藉着支柱支撑的。 ~pāṇī,【形】一手持着杖的。 ~bhaya,【中】怕被处罚。 ~hattha, 【形】手中有杖的人。(p152)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic daṇḍa, dial.=*dal[d]ra; (on ṇ: l cp. guṇa: guḷa etc.) to *del as in Sk. dala, dalati. Cp. Lat. dolare to cut, split, work in wood; delere to destroy; Gr. Qai/dalon work of art; Mhg. zelge twig; zol a stick. Possibly also fr. *dan[d]ra (r=l freq., ṇ: l as tulā: tūṇa; veṇu: veḷu, etc. cp. aṇḍa, caṇḍa), then it would equal Gr. dέndron tree, wood, & be connected with Sk. dāru] 1. stem of a tree, wood, wood worked into something, e. g. a handle, etc. J.II,102; 405 (v. l. dabba); Vism.313; PvA.220 (nimbarukkhassa daṇḍena [v. l. dabbena] katasūla). tidaṇḍa a tripod. -- 2. a stick, staff, rod, to lean on, & as support in walking; the walking-stick of a Wanderer Vin.II,132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṁ), 196; S.I,176; A.I,138, 206; Sn.688 (suvaṇṇa°); J.III,395; V,47 (loha°); Sdhp.399 (eka°, °dvaya, ti°). daṇḍaṁ olubbha leaning on the st. M.I,108; A.III,298; Th.2, 27. -- 3. a stick as means of punishment. a blow, a thrashing: daṇḍehi aññamaññaṁ upakkamanti “they go for each other with sticks” M.I,86=Nd² 199; °ṁ dadāti to give a thrashing J.IV,382; V,442; daṇḍena pahāraṁ dadāti to hit with a stick S.IV,62; brahma° a certain kind of punishment D.II,154, cp. Vin.II,290 & Kern, Manual p. 87; pañca satāni daṇḍo a fine of 500 pieces Vin.I,247; paṇīta° receiving ample p. Pv IV.1⁶⁶; purisa-vadha° J.II,417; rāja-daṇḍaṁ karoti (c. Loc.) to execute the royal beating PvA.216. See also Dh.129, 131, 310, 405 -- 4. a stick as a weapon in general, only in cert. phrases & usually in combⁿ w. sattha, sword. daṇḍaṁ ādiyati to take up the stick, to use violence: attadaṇḍa (atta=ā-dā) violent Sn.935; attadaṇḍesu nibbuta Dh.406=Sn.630; a.+kodhâbhibhūta S.IV,117: ādinna-daṇḍa ādinnasattha Vin.I,349; opp. daṇḍaṁ nidahati to lay down the stick, to be peaceful: sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṁ Sn.35, 394, 629; nihita-d. nihita-sattha using neither stick nor sword, of the Dhamma D.I,4, 63; M.I,287; A.I,211; II,208; IV,249; V,204. daṇḍaṁ nikkhipati id. A.I,206. d.-sattha parāmasana Nd² 576. daṇḍa-sattha-abbhukkirana & daṇḍa-sattha-abhinipātana Nd² 576⁴. Cp. paṭidaṇḍa retribution Dh.133. ‹-› 5. (fig.) a means of frightening, frightfulness, violence, teasing. In this meaning used as nt. as M.I,372; tīṇi daṇḍāni pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya: kāyadaṇḍaṁ vacī°, mano°; in the same sense as m. at Nd² 293 (as expl^d to Sn.35). -- 6. a fine, a penalty, penance in general: daṇḍena nikkiṇāti to redeem w. a penalty J.VI,576 (dhanaṁ datvā Com.); daṇḍaṁ dhāreti to inflict a fine Miln.171, 193; daṇḍaṁ paṇeti id. Dh.310 (cp. DhA.III,482); DhA.II,71; aṭṭha-kahāpaṇo daṇḍo a fine of 8 k. VvA.76. -- adaṇḍa without a stick, i. e. without force or violence, usually in phrase adaṇḍena asatthena (see above 4): Vin.II,196 (ad. as. nāgo danto mahesinā; thus of a Cakkavattin who rules the world peacefully: paṭhaviṁ ad. as. dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati D.I,89=A.IV,89, 105, or dhammena-manusāsati Sn.1002=S.I,236.

--âbhighata slaying w. cudgels PvA.58; --âraha (adj.) deserving punishment J.V,442; VvA.23; --ādāna taking up a stick (weapon) (cp. above 4), comb^d with satth’ādāna M.I,110, 113, 410; D.III,92, 93, 289; A.IV,400; Vism.326. --kaṭhina k. cloth stretched on a stick (for the purpose of measuring) Vin.II,116; --kathālikā a large kettle with a handle Vin.I,286; --kamma punishment by beating, penalty, penance, atonement J.III,276, 527; V,89; Miln.8; °ṁ karoti to punish, to inflict a fine Vin.I,75, 76, 84; II,262; --koṭi the tip of a branch or stick DhA.I,60; --dīpikā a torch J.VI,398; Vism.39; DhA.I,220, 399; --ppatta liable to punishment Miln.46; --paduma N. of a plant (cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala=sahadevā, Halāyudha) J.I,51; --parāyana supported by or leaning on a stick (of old people) M.I,88; A.I,138; Miln.282; --parissāvana a strainer with a handle Vin.II,119; --pahāra a blow with a stick D.I,144; --pāṇin carrying a staff, “staff in hand” M.I,108; --bali (-ādi) fines & taxes, etc. DhA.I,251; --bhaya fear of punishment A.II,121 sq.=Nd² 470=Miln.196; --(m)antara among the sticks D.I,166=A.I,295=II.206=M.I,77, 238, 307, 342= Pug.55; see note at Dial. I.228; --yuddha a club-fight D.I,6; J.III,541; --lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from sticks D.I,9; --vākarā a net on a stick, as a snare, M.I,153; --veḷupesikā a bamboo stick J.IV,382; --sikkā a rope slung round the walking-staff Vin.II,131; --hattha with a stick in his hand J.I,59. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.茎，棍，箠，棍棒，拐杖，(大体上)木材。2.罚款，处罚。daṇḍaka,【中】棍，小枝，竿，柄。daṇḍakamadhu,【中】悬挂在树枝上的蜂巢。daṇḍakamma,【中】处罚，惩罚，赔偿。daṇḍakoti,【阴】棍端。daṇḍadīpikā,【阴】火把。daṇḍanīya,【形】有处罚倾向的。daṇḍappatta,【形】被告发的人。daṇḍaparāyaṇa,【形】靠著手杖的，藉著支柱支撑的。daṇḍapāṇī,【形】一手持著杖的。daṇḍabhaya,【中】怕被处罚。daṇḍahattha,【形】手中有杖的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daṇḍaka: {'def': '[Demin. of daṇḍa] 1. a (small) stick, a twig; a staff, a rod; a handle D.I,7 (a walking stick carried for ornament: see DA.I,89); J.I,120 (sukkha° a dry twig); II,103; III,26; DhA.III,171; Vism.353. -- aḍḍha° a (birch) rod, used as a means of beating (tāḷeti) A.I,47; II,122=M.I,87=Nd² 604=Miln.197; ubhato° two handled (of a saw) M.I,129=189; ratha° the flag-staff of a chariot Miln.27; veṇu° a jungle rope J.III,204. -- See also kudaṇḍaka a twig used for tying J.III,204. -- 2. the crossbar or bridge of a lute J.II,252, 253.

--dīpikā a torch J.I,31; --madhu “honey in a branch,” a beehive DhA.I,59. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daṇḍaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation from daṇḍa] liable to punishment Miln.186. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daṭṭha: {'def': '(ḍasati 的【过分】) 已咬。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】被咬过的地方。 ~bhāva,【阳】被咬的事实。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of daśati, see ḍasati] bitten J.I,7; Miln.302; PvA.144. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ḍasati 的【过分】) 已咬。daṭṭhāna,【中】被咬过的地方。daṭṭhabhāva,【阳】被咬的事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Daṭṭhar: {'def': '[n. ag. to dassati] one who sees A.II,25. (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Daṭṭhā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. dāṭhā] a large tooth, tusk, fang Miln.150 (°visa). (Page 312)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Deha: {'def': '【阳】【中】身体。dehanikkhepana,【中】放下身体，死亡。dehanissita,【形】与身体连接的，身体的。dehaja(‹ deha-ja),「身体-所生的」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】身体。 ~nikkhepana, 【中】放下身体，死亡。 ~nissita, 【形】与身体连接的，属于身体的。(p161)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. deha to *dheigh to form, knead, heap up (cp. kāya=heap), see diddha. So also in uddehaka. Cp. Kern, Toev. p. 75 s. v. sarīradeha. Cp. Gr. teίxos (wall)=Sk. dehī; Lat. fingo & figura; Goth. deigan (knead)=Ohg. teig=E. dough] body A.II,18; PvA.10, 122. Usually in foll. phrases: hitvā mānusaṁ dehaṁ S.I,60; Pv.II,9⁵⁶; pahāya m. d. S.I,27, 30; jahati d. M.II,73; °ṁ nikkhipati Pv.II,6¹⁵; (muni or khīṇāsavo) antima-deha-dhārin (°dhāro) S.I,14, 53; II,278; Sn.471; Th.II,7, 10; It.32, 40, 50, 53. °nikkhepana laying down the body Vism.236. (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dehaka: {'def': '(nt.)=deha; pl. limbs Th.2, 392; cp. ThA.258. (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dehin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) that which has a body, a creature Sdhp.12, 16. (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dehī: {'def': '【阳】有身体的，生物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】有身体的，生物。(p161)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dejjha: {'def': '(=dvejjha, see dvi B I.5] divided, in a° undividedness J.III,7 (com. abhejja), 274=IV.258 (dhanuṁ a °ṁ karoti to get the bow ready, v. l. BB. sarejjhaṁ C. expl^d jiyāya ca sarena ca saddhiṁ ekam eva katvā). (Page 328)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Depiccha: {'def': '(adj.) [=dvepiccha, see dvi B I. 5] having two tail-feathers J.V,339. (Page 329)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Desa: {'def': '【阳】区域，国家。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Ved. deśa, cp. disā] point, part, place, region, spot, country, Vin.I,46; II,211; M.I,437; J.I,308; DhsA.307 (°bhūta); PvA.78 (°antara prob. to be read dos°), 153; KhA 132, 227. -- desaṁ karoti to go abroad J.V,340 (p. 342 has disaṁ). -- kañcid-eva desaṁ pucchati to ask a little point D.I,51; M.I,229; A.V,39, sometimes as kiñcid-eva d. p. S.III,101; M.III,15; v. l. at D.I,51. -- desāgata pañha a question propounded, lit. come into the region of some one or having become a point of discussion Miln.262. (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】区域，国家。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Desaka: {'def': 'desetu,【阳】弘法者，传道者，详细说明的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'desetu, 【阳】弘法者，传道者，详细说明的人。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. deśaka] pointing out, teaching, advising Sdhp.217, 519 -- (nt.) advice, instruction, lesson M.I,438. (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Desanā: {'def': '【阴】讲道，训诫，弘法。 ~vilāsa 【阳】美妙的教育。(p161)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. deśanā] 1. discourse, instruction, lesson S.V,83, 108; J.III,84; Pug.28; Nett 38; Vism.523 sq. (regarding Paṭiccasamuppāda); PvA.1, 2, 9, 11; Sdhp.213. 2. Freq. in dhamma° moral instruction, exposition of the Dhamma, preaching, sermon Vin.I,16; A.I,53; II,182; IV,337 sq.; It.33; J.I,106 etc. (a° gāminī āpatti), a Pārājika or Saṅghādisesa offence Vin.II,3, 87; V,187. Cp. Vin. Texts II.33. -- 3. (legal) acknowledgment Miln.344. -- Cp. ā°.

--avasāne (Loc.) at the end of an instruction discourse or sermon DhA.III,175; PvA.54; --pariyosāne=proc. PvA.9, 31 etc. --vilāsa beauty of instruction Vism.524; Tikapaṭṭhāna 21. (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】讲道，训诫，弘法。desanāvilāsa,【阳】美妙的教育。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Desetar: {'def': '[n. ag. to deseti] one who instructs or points out; a guide, instructor, teacher M.I,221, 249; A.I,266; III,441; V,349. (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Deseti: {'def': '(dis(梵diw)详说+e)(Sk. dewayati, caus. of disati), 指出，传道，弘法，详细说明，忏悔(to point out, indicate, show; set forth, preach, teach; confess)。【过】desesi, adesesi, adesayi(in Ratanasuttaṁ)。【现分】desenta, desita。【独】desetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dis + e), 指出，传道，弘法，详细说明。【过】 desesi。【现分】 desenta。【无】 desetvā。(p161)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. deśayati, Caus. of disati, q. v.] to point out, indicate, show; set forth, preach, teach; confess. Very freq. in phrase dhammaṁ d. to deliver a moral discourse, to preach the Dhamma Vin.I,15; II,87, 188; V,125, 136; D.I,241, A.II,185, V.194; It.111; J.I,168; III,394; Pug.57; PvA.6. -- aor. adesesi (S.I,196=Th.1 1254) & desesi (PvA.2, 12, 78 etc.) -- pp. desita (q. v.). (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Desika: {'def': '【形】国家或省的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】属于国家或省的。(p161)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. deśika]=desaka, su° one who points out well, a good teacher Miln.195. (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Desita: {'def': '(Deseti的【过分】) 指出，传道，弘法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of deseti] expounded, shown, taught etc., given, assigned, conferred Vin.III,152 (marked out); V,137; D.II,154 (dhamma); Dh.285 (nibbāna); PvA.4 (magga: indicated), 54 (given). (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dessa: {'def': 'dessiya(Sk. dvesya, to dvis, see disa),【形】不愉快的，嫌恶的，可憎的(disagreeable, odious, detestable)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Dessiya (adj.) [Sk. dveṣya, to dvis, see disa] disagreeable, odious, detestable J.I,46; II,285; IV,406; VI,570, ThA.268, Miln.281. (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'dessiya, 【形】不愉快的，嫌恶的，可憎的。(p161)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dessati: {'def': '[Sk. dviṣati & dveṣṭi; see etym. under disa] to hate, dislike, detest SnA 168 (=na piheti, opp. kāmeti). (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dessatā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. dvesyatā] repulsiveness Miln.281. (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dessin: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dveṣin] hating, detesting Sn.92 (dhamma°); better desin, cp. viddesin. (Page 331)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Deti: {'def': '(dā + e), 给。【过】 adāsi。【现分】 denta。【过分】dinna。【独】 datvā。参考 Dadāti。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dā+e), 给。【过】adāsi。【现分】denta。【过分】dinna。【独】datvā。参考 Dadāti。A.8.37./IV,243-4.：“Aṭṭhimāni, bhikkhave, sappurisadānāni. Katamāni aṭṭha? 1Suciṁ deti, 2paṇītaṁ deti, 3kālena deti, 4kappiyaṁ deti, 5viceyya deti, 6abhiṇhaṁ deti, 7dadaṁ cittaṁ pasādeti, 8datvā attamano hoti.(诸比丘！善士之施有八种。以何为八？即：1鲜洁而施、2殊妙而施、3随时而施、4适当而施、5辨别而施、6屡屡而施、7施时心明净、8施后愉悦。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Deva: {'def': '天神', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '[Ved. deva, Idg. *deịā to shine (see dibba & diva), orig. adj. *deiǔos belonging to the sky, cp. Av. daēvō (demon.), Lat. deus, Lith. dë̃vas; Ohg. &slashedZ;īo; Ags. Tīg, Gen. Tīwes (=Tuesday); Oir. dia (god). The popular etymology refers it to the root div in the sense of playing, sporting or amusing oneself: dibbanti ti devā, pañcahi kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti attano vā siriyā jotantī ti attho KhA 123] a god, a divine being; usually in pl. devā the gods. As title attributed to any superhuman being or beings regarded to be in certain respects above the human level. Thus primarily (see 1^a) used of the first of the next-world devas, Sakka, then also of subordinate deities, demons & spirits (devaññatarā some kind of deity; snake-demons: nāgas, tree-gods: rukkhadevatā etc.). Also title of the king (3). Always implying splendour (cp. above etym.) & mobility, beauty, goodness & light, & as such opposed to the dark powers of mischief & destruction (asurā: Titans; petā: miserable ghosts; nerayikā sattā: beings in Niraya). A double position (dark & light) is occupied by Yama, the god of the Dead (see Yama & below 1 c). Always implying also a kinship and continuity of life with humanity and other beings; all devas have been man and may again become men (cp. D.I,17 sq.; S.III,85), hence “gods” is not a coincident term. All devas are themselves in saṁsāra, needing salvation. Many are found worshipping saints (Th.I,627--9; Th.II,365). -- The collective appellations differ; there are var. groups of divine beings, which in their totality (cp. tāvatiṁsa) include some or most of the well-known Vedic deities. Thus some collect. designations are devā sa-indakā (the gods, including Indra or with their ruler at their head: D.II,208; S.III,90, A.V,325), sa-pajāpatikā (S.III,90), sa-mārakā (see deva-manussaloka), sa-brahmakā (S.III,90). See below 1 b. Lists of popular gods are to be found, e. g. at D.II,253; III,194. -- A current distinction dating from the latest books in the canon is that into 3 classes, viz. sammuti-devā (conventional gods, gods in the public opinion, i. e. kings & princes J.I,132; DA.I,174), visuddhi° (beings divine by purity, i. e. of great religious merit or attainment like Arahants & Buddhas), & upapatti° (being born divine, i. e. in a heavenly state as one of the gatis, like bhumma-devā etc.). This division in detail at Nd² 307; Vbh.422; KhA 123; VvA.18. Under the 3rd category (upapatti°) seven groups are enumerated in the foll. order: Cātummahārājikā devā, Tāvatiṁsā d. (with Sakka as chief), Yāmā d., Tusitā d., Nimmānaratī d., Paranimmita-vasavattī d., Bṛahmakāyikā d. Thus at D.I,216 sq.; A.I,210, 332 sq.; Nd² 307; cp. S.I,133 & J.I,48. See also devatā.

1. good etc. -- (a) sg. a god, a deity or divine being, M.I,71 (d. vā Māro vā Brahmā vā); S.IV,180=A.IV,461 (devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā ti: I shall become a god or some one or other of the (subordinate gods, angels); Sn.1024 (ko nu devo vā Brahmā vā Indo vāpi Sujampati); Dh.105 (+gandhabba, Māra, Brahmā); A.II,91, 92 (puggalo devo hoti devaparivāro etc.); PvA.16 (yakkho vā devo vā). -- (b) pl. devā gods. These inhabit the 26 devalokas one of which is under the rule of Sakka, as is implied by his appellation S. devānaṁ indo (his opponent is Vepacitti Asur-indo S.I,222) S.I,216 sq.; IV,101, 269; A.I,144; Sn.346; PvA.22 etc. -- Var. kinds are e. g. appamāṇ’--ābhā (opp. Paritt’ābhā) M.III,147; ābhassarā D.I,17; Dh.200; khiḍḍāpadosikā D.I,19; gandhabba-kāyikā S.III,250 sq.; cattāro mahārājikā S.V,409, 423; Jat I.48; Pv IV.11¹; PvA.17, 272; naradevā tidasā S.I,5; bhummā PvA.5; manāpa-kāyikā A.IV,265 sq.; mano-padosikā D.I,20; valāhaka-kāyikā S.III,254. -- Var. attributes of the Devas are e. g. āyuppamāṇā A.I,267; II,126 sq.; IV,252 sq.; dīghāyukā S.III,86; A.II,33; rūpino manomayā M.I,410, etc. etc. -- See further in general: D.I,54 (satta devā); II,14, 157, 208; S.V,475=A.I,37; Sn.258 (+manussā), 310 (id.); 404, 679; Dh.30, 56, 94, 230, 366; Ps.I,83 sq.; II,149; Vbh.86, 395, 412 sq.; Nett 23; Sdhp.240. -- (c) deva=Yama see deva-dūta (expl^d at J.I,139: devo ti maccu). -- atideva a pre-eminent god, god above gods (Ep. of the Buddha) Nd² 307; DhsA.2 etc.; see under cpds. -- 2. the sky, but only in its rainy aspect, i. e. rain-cloud, rainy sky, rain-god (cp. Jupiter Pluvius; K.S. I.40, n. 2 on Pajjunna, a Catumahārājika), usually in phrase deve vassante (when it rains etc.), or devo vassati (it rains) D.I,74 (: devo ti megho DA.I,218); S.I,65, 154 (cp. It.66 megha); Sn.18, 30; J.V,201; DhA.II,58, 82; PvA.139. devo ekam ekam phusāyati the cloud rains drop by drop, i. e. lightly S.I,104 sq., 154, 184; IV,289. -- thulla-phusitake deve vassante when the sky was shedding big drops of rain S.III,141; V,396; A.I,243; II,140; V,114; Vism.259. -- vigata-valāhake deve when the rain-clouds have passed S.I,65; M.II,34, 42. -- 3. king, usually in Voc. deva, king! Vin.I,272; III,43; A.II,57; J.I,150, 307; PvA.4, 74 etc.

devī (f.) 1. goddess, of Petīs, Yakkhiṇīs etc.; see etym. expl. at VvA.18. -- Pv.II,1¹²; Vv 1³ etc. -- 2. queen Vin.I,82 (Rahulamātā), 272; D.II,14; A.II,57, 202 (Mallikā) J.I,50 (Māyā); III,188; PvA.19, 75.

--accharā a divine Apsarā, a heavenly joy-maiden Vism.531; PvA.46, 279; --aññatara, in phrase devo vā d. vā, a god or one of the retinue of a god S.IV,180= A.IV,461; PvA.16; --âtideva god of gods, i. e. divine beyond all divinities, a super-deva, of Buddha Nd² 307 & on Sn.1134; J.IV,158=DhA.I,147; Vv 64²⁷; VvA.18; Miln.241, 258, 368, 384 & passim; cp. M Vastu I.106, 257, 283, 291; --attabhāva a divine condition, state of a god PvA.14; --ânubhāva divine majesty or power D.II,12; M.III,120; J.I,59; --āsana a seat in heaven It.76; --âsurasaṅgāma the fight between the Gods & the Titans D.II,285; S.I,222; IV,201; V,447; M.I,253; A IV:432 (at all passages in identical phrase); --iddhi divine power Vv 31³; VvA.7; --isi a divine Seer Sn.1116; Nd² 310; --ûpapatti rebirth among the gods PvA.6; --orohaṇa descent of the gods DhA.III,443; --kaññā a celestial maiden, a nymph S.I,200; J.I,61; VvA.37, 78; --kāya a particular group of gods S.I,200; It.77; Th.2, 31; --kuñjara “elephant of the gods,” of Indra J.V,158; --kumāra son of a god (cp. °putta) J.III,391; --gaṇa a troop of gods J.I,203; DhA.III,441; --gaha a temple, chapel Vin.III,43; --cārikā a visit to the gods, journeying in the devaloka VvA.3, 7, 165 etc.; --ṭṭhāna heavenly seat J.III,55; a temple, sacred place Miln.91, 330; --dattika given or granted by a god, extraordinary PvA.145; --dattiya=°dattika J.III,37; DhA.I,278; --dāruka a species of pine J.V,420; --dundubhi the celestial drum, i. e. thunder D.I,10; Miln.178; DA.I,95; --dūta the god’s (i. e. Yama’s see above 1°) messenger A.I,138, 142; M.II,75; III,179; J.I,138; DhA.I,85 (tayo d.); Mhbv. 122 (°suttanta); --deva “the god of gods,” Ep. of the Buddha (cp. devâtideva) Th.1, 533, 1278 (of Kappāyana); DhsA.1; PvA.140; --dhamma that which is divine or a god A.III,277 (°ika); DhA.III,74; --dhītā a female deva or angel (cp. devaputta), lit. daughter of a god J.II,57; VvA.137, 153 (with ref. to Vimānapetīs); --nagara the city of the Devas, heaven J.I,168, 202; DhA.I,280; --nikāya a class, community or group of gods, celestial state or condition D.II,261 (sixty enum^d); S.IV,180; M.I,102 sq.; A.I,63 sq.; II,185; III,249 sq.; IV,55; V,18; --pañha questioning a god, using an oracle D.I,11 (=DA.I,97: devadāsiyā sarīre devataṁ otāretvā pañha-pucchanaṁ); --parivāra a retinue of gods A.II,91; --parisā the assembly of gods A.II,185; Tikp 241. --putta “son of a god,” a demi-god, a ministering god (cp. f. deva-dhītā), usually of Yakkhas, but also appl^d to the 4 archangels having charge of the higher world of the Yāmā devā (viz. Suyāma devaputta); the Tusitā d. (Santusita d.); the Nimmānaratī d. (Sunimmita d.); & the Paranimmitavasavattī d. (Vasavattī d.) D.I,217 sq.; cp. J.I,48. -- D.II,12, 14; S.I,46 sq.; 216 sq.; IV,280; A.I,278; It.76; J.I,59 (jarā-jajjara); IV,100 (Dhamma d.); VI,239 (Java d.); PvA.6, 9, 55, 92, 113 (Yakkho ti devaputto); Miln.23; --pura the city of the gods, heaven S.IV,202; Vv 64³⁰ (=Sudassana-mahānagara VvA.285); J.IV,143; --bhava celestial existence PvA.167; --bhoga the wealth of the gods PvA.97; --manussā (pl.) gods & men D.I,46, 62≈, 99 (°mānuse); M.II,38, 55; Sn.14 (sa°), 236 (°pūjita), 521; It.80 (°seṭṭhā); Kh VIII,10; KhA 196; PvA.17, 31, 117; --°loka the world of gods and men. It comprises (1) the world of gods proper (Devas, i. e. Sakka, Māra & Brahmā; corresp. to sammuti-devā, see above); (2) samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (cp. visuddhi-devā); (3) gods & men under the human aspect (gati, cp. upapatti-devā): Sn.1047, 1063; expl. at Nd² 309 & (with diff. interpretations) DA.I,174 sq.; --yāna leading to the (world of) the gods, i. e. the road to heaven Sn.139, also in °yāniya (magga) D.I,215; --rājā king of the devas, viz. Sakka Nd¹ 177; J.III,392 (=devinda); DhA.III,441; PvA.62; --rūpa divine appearance or form PvA.92; --loka the particular sphere of any devas, the seat of the devas, heaven; there exist 26 such spheres or heavens (see loka); when 2 are mentioned it refers to Sakka’s & Brahma’s heavens. A seat in a devaloka is in saṁsāra attained by extraordinary merit: Dh.177; J.I,202, 203; IV,273; ThA.74; KhA 228; PvA.5, 9, 21, 66, 81, 89; Vism.415, etc.; --vimāna the palace of a deva J.I,58; VvA.173; --saṅkhalikā a magic chain J.II,128; V,92, 94; --sadda heavenly sound or talk among the devas It.75 (three such sounds). (Page 329)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 神，2. 天空，3. 雨云，4. 国王。 ~kaññā, 【阴】天女。 ~kāya,【阳】一群神。 ~kumāra, 【阳】神的王子。 ~kusuma, 【中】丁香。 ~gaṇa,【阳】一组神。 ~cārikā,【阴】天堂的旅程。 ~ccharā,【阴】女神。 ~ññatara,【形】次等神。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】神庙。 ~ttabhāva, 【阳】神的情况，神身。 ~dattika, ~dattiya, 【形】神授的。 ~dundubhi, 【阴】雷。 ~dūta,【阳】天讯（神的报信者）。 ~deva, 【阳】神中神（神的神）。 ~dhamma,【阳】天法（神的德行），怕犯罪。 ~dhītu, 【阴】少女神。 ~nagara, 【中】天城（神的城市）。 ~nikāya, 【阳】神的团体。 ~parisā, 【阴】神的集会。 ~putta, 【阳】神的儿子。 ~pura, 【中】天的城市。 ~bhavana, 【中】神的住所。 ~yāna, 【中】去天堂的路径，飞艇。 ~rāja, 【阳】天王，神王。 ~rukkha, 【阳】天树。 ~rūpa, 【中】神像。 ~loka, 【阳】天堂。 ~vimāna, 【形】天上的大厦。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.神，2.天空，3.雨云，4.国王。devakaññā,【阴】天女。devakāya,【阳】天众，一群神。devakumāra,【阳】神的王子。devakusuma,【中】丁香。devagaṇa,【阳】一组神。devacārikā,【阴】天堂的旅程。devaccharā,【阴】女神，天女。devatara,【形】次等神。devaṭṭhāna,【中】天祠，神庙。devattabhāva,【阳】神的情况，神身。devadattika, devadattiya,【形】神授的。devadundubhi,【阴】雷。devadūta,【阳】天讯(神的报信者)。devadeva,【阳】神中神(神的神)。devadhamma,【阳】天法(天神的德行)，怕犯罪。devadhītu,【阴】少女神。devanagara,【中】天城(天神的城市)。devanara,【中】天人(SA.9.6./I,293.︰Naradevānanti devanarānaṁ.诸天人)。devanikāya,【阳】天神的团体。devaparisā,【阴】天神的集会。devaputta,【阳】神的儿子。devapura,【中】天神的城市。devabhavana,【中】神的住所。devayāna,【中】去天堂的路径，飞艇。devarāja,【阳】天王，神王。devarukkha,【阳】天树。devarūpa,【中】神像。devaloka,【阳】天堂，天界。devavimāna,【形】天上的大厦。aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ uppajjati﹐生为天众中之一(《中阿含经》译作：生余意生天)。SA.35.135.：devaloke ca ekantasukhasamappitattā ekantakhiḍḍārativasena uppannapamādena maggabrahmacariyavāsaṁ vasituṁ na sakkā.(天世间一向是受乐，一向是享乐，生起放逸之心，那是不可能安住於修道、修梵行。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Devadaha: {'def': 'm. 天臂城 [コーリ(Koli)國(拘利國)的都市].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. 天臂城 [ューリ国の都市].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Devadatta: {'def': 'm. 提婆達多 [比丘, 佛的堂弟].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. 提婆達多 [比丘, 仏の従弟].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（比库名）迭瓦达答，（古音译：）提婆达多，调达', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '提婆达多', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Devadāru: {'def': '【阳】雪松（一种高大的西洋杉，〔雪松属〕(Cedrus deodara)，原产于喜马拉雅山脉，树枝下垂，叶子黑绿色，在印度是一种重要的木材松树；亦称喜马拉雅杉）。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】雪松(一种高大的西洋杉，〔雪松属〕(Cedrus deodara)，原产於喜马拉雅山脉，树枝下垂，叶子黑绿色，在印度是一种重要的木材松树；亦称喜马拉雅杉)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Devaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [deva+ka] belonging or peculiar to the devas; only in sa°-loka the world including the gods in general D.I,62; Nd² 309; Sn.86 377, 443, 760 etc.; Miln.234. See also devamanussa-loka. (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Devara: {'def': '[Sk. devṛ & devara Gr. da_ήr (*daivήr), Lat. levir, Ohg. zeihhur, Ags. tācor] husband’s brother, brotherin-law J.VI,152; Vv 32⁶ (sa°), popularly expl^d at VvA.135 as “dutiyo varo ti vā devaro, bhattu kaniṭṭha bhātā.” (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】姊夫，丈夫的兄弟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】姊夫，丈夫的兄弟。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Devasika: {'def': '【形】日常发生的。 ~kaŋ, 【副】日常地。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】日常发生的。devasikaṁ,【副】日常地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Der. fr. divasa] daily J.V,383; DA.I,296 (°bhatta=bhattavetena); DhA.I,187 sq., --nt. °ṁ as adv. daily, every day J.I,82, J.I,149, 186; VvA.67, 75; DhA.I,28; II,41. (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Devata: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) having such & such a god as one’s special divinity, worshipping, a worshipper of, devotee of Miln.234 (Brahma°+Brahma (garuka). -- f. devatā in pati° “worshipping the husband,” i. e. a devoted wife J.III,406; VvA.128. (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Devati: {'def': '[div] to lament, etc.; see pari°. Cp. also parideva etc. (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Devatta: {'def': '(nt.) [deva+tta] the state of being a deva, divinity ThA.70; PvA.110 (°bhāva as Yakkha, opp. petatta bhāva; so read for devatā-bhāva). (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】神性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】神性。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Devattana: {'def': '(nt.) [=last] state or condition of a deva Th.1, 1127; cp. petattana in the foll. verse. (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Devatā: {'def': '【阴】神。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '女神', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【阴】天人，女天人。sā devatā﹐彼男天人，彼女天人。天人是指从四天王天(Catumahārāja)以上至色究竟天(Akaniṭṭha)的二十四层天。其中有欲界六天即︰四天王天，忉利天，夜摩天，兜率天，化乐天，他化乐天。色界十八天即︰梵身天，梵辅天，大梵天；少光天，无量光天，光音天；少净天，无量净天，遍净天；少福天，福生天，广果天，和五阿那含天(无烦天，无热天，善现天，善见天，色究竟天)及无想天。无色界四天，也是属於天人，但在经典中不见他们与人间往来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [deva+tā, qualitative-abstr. suffix, like Lat. juventa, senecta, Goth. hauhipa, Ohg. fullida cp. Sk. pūrṇatā, bandhutā etc.] “condition or state of a deva,” divinity; divine being, deity, fairy. The term comprises all beings which are otherwise styled devas, & a list of them given at Nd² 308 & based on the principle that any being who is worshipped (or to whom an offering is made or a gift given: de-vatā=yesaṁ deti, as is expressed in the conclusion “ye yesaṁ dakkhiṇeyyā te tesaṁ devatā”) is a devatā, comprises 5 groups of 5 kinds each, viz. (1) ascetics; (2) domestic animals (elephants, horses, cows, cocks, crows); (3) physical forces & elements (fire, stone etc.); (4) lower gods (: bhumma devā) (nāgā, suvaṇṇā, yakkhā, asurā, gandhabbā); (5) higher gods (: inhabitants of the devaloka proper) Mahārājā, Canda, Suriya, Inda, Brahmā), to which are added the 2 aspects of the sky-god as devadevatā & disā-devatā). -- Another definition at VvA.21 simply states: devatā ti devaputto pi Brahmā pi devadhītā pi vuccati. -- Among the var. deities the foll. are frequently mentioned: rukkha° tree-gods or dryads M.I,306; J.I,221; PvA.5; vatthu° earth gods (the four kings) Pv 4¹; PvA.17; vana° wood-nymphs M.I,306; samudda° water-sprites J.II,112 etc. etc. ‹-› D.I,180 (mahiddhikā, pl.), 192; II,8, 87, 139, 158; S.I, sq.; IV,302; M.I,245; II,37; A.I,64, 210, 211; II,70 (sapubba°); III,77 (bali-paṭiggāhikā), 287 (saddhāya samannāgatā); 309; IV,302 sq., 390 (vippaṭisāriniyo); V,331; Sn.45, 316, 458, 995, 1043; Dh.99; J.I,59, 72, 223, 256; IV,17, 474; Vv 16³; Pv.II,1¹⁰; KhA 113, 117; PvA.44.

--ânubhāva divine power or majesty J.I,168; --ânussati “remembrance of the gods,” one of the 6 ânussatiṭṭhānāni, or subjects to be kept in mind D.III,250, 280, cp. A.I,211; Vism.197. --uposatha a day of devotion to the gods A.I,211; --paribhoga fit to be enjoyed by gods J.II,104; --bali an offering to the gods A.II,68; --bhāva at PvA.110 read as devattabhāva (opp. petattabhāva). (Page 330)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Devisi: {'def': '【阳】神仙(神的先知者)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】神仙（神的先知者）。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Devānaṁpiya Asoka: {'def': 'm.［Sk.Asoka］天爱阿育，アソーカ王', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Devānaṁpiya Tissa: {'def': 'm. 天爱帝须［アソーカ王时代のスリランカ王］', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Devānubhāva: {'def': '【阳】 deviddhi, 【阴】神力。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】deviddhi,【阴】神力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Devātideva: {'def': '【阳】神的神。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】诸神的神。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Devī: {'def': '【阴】女神，皇后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女神，皇后。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Devūpapatti: {'def': '【阴】再生为神。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】再生为神。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Deyya: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. deya, grd. of dā, see dadāti I. 2, b] (a) to be given (see below). -- (b) deserving a gift, worthy of receiving alms J.III,12 (a°); Miln.87 (rāja°) --nt. a gift, offering Vin.I,298 (saddhā°).

--dhamma a gift, lit. that which has the quality of being given; esp. a gift of mercy, meritorious gift S.I,175; A.I,150, 166; II,264 (saddhā°); Pv.I,1¹; II,3¹⁸; PvA.5, 7 sq., 26, 92 (°bīja), 103, 129; cp. AvŚ I.308. The deyyadhamma (set of gifts, that which it is or should be a rule to give) to mendicants, consists of 14 items, which are (as enum^d at Nd² 523 under the old Brahman’s term yañña “sacrifice”) (1) cīvara, (2) piṇḍapāta, (3) senāsana, (4) gilāna-paccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra, (5) anna, (6) pāna, (7) vattha, (8) yāna, (9) mālā, (10) gandhā, (11) vilepana, (12) seyya, (13) āvasatha, (14) padīpeyya. A similar enumⁿ in diff. order is found at Nd¹ 373. (Page 329)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Deḍḍubha: {'def': '【阳】水蛇。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】水蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. duṇḍubha] a water-snake; salamander J.III,16; VI,194; Sdhp.292. See next. (Page 328)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Deḍḍubhaka: {'def': '1. a sort of snake (see prec.) J.I,361. -- 2. a kind of girdle (in the form of a snake’s head) Vin.II,136 (expl^d by udaka-sappi-sira-sadisa). (Page 328)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Deṇḍima: {'def': '(m. nt.) [Sk. diṇḍima, cp. dindima] a kind of kettle-drum D.I,79 (v. l. dindima); Nd² 219 (°ka, v. l. dind°); J.I,355; (=paṭaha-bheri); V,322=VI,217; VI,465=580. (Page 329)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】半球形铜鼓，定音鼓(一种大的半球形红铜或黄铜鼓，面为羊皮纸，能通过调整拉力调音)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】半球形铜鼓，定音鼓（一种大的半球形红铜或黄铜鼓，面为羊皮纸，能通过调整拉力调音）。(p160)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dh: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十九个辅音字母。发音是送气带音的 d，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十九个辅音字母。发音是送气带音的 d，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhaja: {'def': '【阳】旗，符号，象徵(siong7 teng (上丁)或 siong7 tin(上珍)。)。dhajagga, 旗尖。dhajālu,【形】以旗子装饰的。dhajāhaṭa,【形】在战争中捕获的，作为战利品。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】旗，象征，符号。 ~gga, 最标准。 ~ālu, 【形】以旗子装饰的。 ~āhaṭa, 【形】在战争中捕获的，作为战利品。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhvaja, cp. Ohg. tuoh “cloth” (fr. *dwōko)] a flag, banner; mark, emblem, sign, symbol Vin.I,306 (titthiya°: outward signs of); II,22 (gihi°); S.I,42; II,280; A.II,51; III,84 sq. (panna°); M.I,139 (id.); A.III,149 (dhamma); J.I,52 (+patākā); VvA.173 (id.); J.I,65 (arahad °;)Th.I,961; J.V,49=Miln.221; J.V,509; VI,499; Nd¹ 170; Vv 36¹, 64²⁸ (subhāsita°=dhamma° VvA.284); Dhs.1116, 1233; Vism.469 (+paṭȧka, in comparison); PvA.282; VvA.31, 73; Miln.21; Sdhp.428, 594. Cp. also panna.

--agga the top of a standard S.I,219; A.III,89 sq.; Pug.67, 68; Vism.414 (°paritta). --ālu adorned with flags Th.1, 164=J.II,334 (: dhajasampanna Com.); --āhaṭa won under or by the colours, taken as booty, captured Vin.III,139, 140; Vism.63. --baddha captured (=°āhaṭa) Vin.I,74 (cora). (Page 334)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhajinī: {'def': '【阴】军队。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. dhvajinī, f. to adj. dhvajin] “bearing a standard,” i. e. an army, legion Sn.442 (=senā SnA 392). (Page 334)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】军队。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhama: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [Sk. dhama, to dhamati] blowing, n. a blower, player (on a horn: saṅkha°) D.I,251; S.IV,322. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'dhamaka, 【形、阳】吹的人，（喇叭等）演奏者。 Dhamakaraka, 【阳】过滤器，滤水器。（时常看到 dhammakaraka 的词形）。(p163)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. dhama, to dhamati), Dhamaka,【形】【阳】吹的人，(喇叭等)演奏者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhamadhamāyati: {'def': '[cp. Sk. dadhmāti, Intens. to dhamati] to blow frequently, strongly or incessantly Miln.117. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhamaka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) one who blows Miln.31; see vaṁsa°, saṅkh°, singa°. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhamakaraka: {'def': '【阳】过滤器，滤水器。(时常看到 dhammakaraka 的词形)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhamani: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. dhamani, to dhamati, orig. a tube for blowing, a tubular vessel, pipe] a vein Th.1, 408. Usually in cpd.: --santhata strewn with veins, with veins showing, i. e. emaciated (: nimmaṁsa-lohitatāya sirājālehi vitthatagatta PvA.68) Vin.III,110; J.IV,371; V,69; Dh.395=Th.1, 243=Pv.II,1¹³; Pv IV.10¹; DhA.I,299, 367; IV,157; ThA.80. So also in Jain Pk. “kisa dhamaṇisaṁtata”: Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; cp. Lal. Vist. 226. -- Also as °santhatagatta (adj.) having veins showing all over the body for lack of flesh Vin.I,55; III,146; M.II,121; J.I,346, II.283; ThA.80. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】血管。 ~santhatagatta, 【形】全身血管暴露的（缺乏肌肉）。(p163)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】血管。dhamanisanthatagatta,【形】全身血管暴露的(缺乏肌肉)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhamati: {'def': '[Ved. dhamati, dhmā, pp. dhamita & dhmāta, cp. Ohg. dampf “steam”] to blow, to sound (a drum); to kindle (by blowing), melt, smelt, singe A.I,254; IV,169; J.I,283, 284; VI,441; Nd¹ 478; Miln.262.‹-› ppr. dhamāna S.I,106; Miln.67. -- Caus. dhameti to blow (an instrument) J.II,110; Miln.31, and dhamāpeti to cause to blow or kindle DhA.I,442. -- pp. dhamanta & dhamanita (the latter to dhvan, by which dhamati is influenced to a large extent in meaning. Cp. uddhana). (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dham + a), 吹，使发声，激起。【过】 dhami。【现分】 dhamanta, 【无】 dhamitvā。【动名】 dhamana。(p163)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dham吹+a), 吹，使发声，激起(to blow, to sound (a drum); to kindle (by blowing), melt, smelt, singe)。【过】dhami。【现分】dhamāna。【过分】dhamanta, dhamanita。dhamanta,【独】dhamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhameti: {'def': '(dham吹+e), 吹，使发声。【过】dhamesi。【过分】dhamita。【现分】dhamenta。【使】dhamāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dham + e), 吹，使发声。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 dhamita。【现分】dhamenta。【使】 dhamāpeti。(p163)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhamma: {'def': '【阳】法，教义，自然，事实，规格，道德，好行为。 ~kkhāna, 【中】弘法（教义的讲道）。 ~kathā, 【阴】法论（宗教性的谈话，伦理的讨论）。~kathika, 【阳】法论者（传道规格的人）。 ~kamma, 【中】法业（合法的行为），如法羯磨（符合戒律规则的程序）。 ~kāma, 【形】热爱事实的人。 ~kāya, 【形】法身（正常的身体）。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】法蕴（规格的部分）。 ~gaṇḍikā, 【阴】法块（正义的木块，即：执行死刑的断头木块）。 ~garu, 【形】法尊（尊敬规格的）。 ~gutta, 【形】法护（被规格保护的）。 ~ghosaka, 【阳】法音者（宣布教义的人）。 ~cakka,【中】法轮（规格的轮子）。 ~cakkappavattana, 【中】转法轮（训诫宇宙的正义）。 ~cakkhu, 【中】法眼（智能的眼睛）。 ~cariyā, 【阴】法行（遵守正义）。 ~cārī, 【阳】法行者（遵守正义的人）。【形】有品德的。 ~cetiya, 【中】法塔。 ~jīvī, 【形】正直地生活的。 ~ññū, 【形】懂得教义的人。 ~ṭṭha, 【形】正义的，正直的。 ~ṭṭhiti, 【阴】规格的真正性质。 ~takka, 【阳】法思择（正确的推论）。 ~dāna, 【中】法施（规格的礼物）。 ~dāyāda, 【形】法嗣（以法为遗产，教义的继承人）。~dīpa, 【形】法灯，法岛（以法为可靠的立足点）。 ~desanā, 【阴】说法，开示佛理。 ~dessī, 【阳】法憎者（憎恨法者）。 ~dhaja, 【形】法旗（以法为旗帜的）。 ~dhara, 【形】法持，持法者（牢记法的人）。 ~niyāma,【阳】法序（规格的次序）。 ~paṇṇākāra, 【阳】法赠（法为赠品）。 ~pada,【中】法句。 ~ppamāṇa, 【形】法测（藉着教义为测量）。 ~bhaṇḍāgārika,【阳】法司库（正义的财务员）。 ~bheri, 【阴】法鼓（正义之鼓）。 ~rakkhita,【形】法护（被正义保护的）。 ~rata, 【形】法爱（爱好法）。 ~rati, 【阴】法乐（以法为乐）。 ~rasa, 【阳】法味（法的味道）。 ~rāja, 【阳】法王（正义之王）。 ~laddha, 【形】法获（正直取得的）。 ~vara, 【阳】优法（优良的教义）。 ~vādī, 【形】法语者（依法说的）。 ~vicaya, 【阳】择法（对法做检讨）。 ~vidū, 【形】知法者（懂法的人）。 ~vinicchaya,【阳】法决（正当的决定）。 ~vihārī,【形】法住（依法而住的）。 ~saŋvibhāga,【阳】法的分配。 ~saṅgīti, 【阴】法诵（法的背诵）。 ~saṅgāhaka, 【阳】法的编辑者。 ~samādāna, 【中】法的获得。 ~saraṇa, 【中】归依法。~savaṇa, 【中】听闻法。 ~sākacchā, 【阴】讨论法。 ~sālā, 【阴】法堂。 ~senāpati, 【阳】法将（法的大元帅或总司令）。 ~soṇḍa, 【形】爱好法。 ~ssāmī, 【阳】法主（法的统治者）。 ~adhipati, 【形】敬法为指南。 ~anudhamma, 【阳】法随法（合法，守法）。 ~anuvattī, ~anusārī,【形】随法行（守法的行动的）。 ~abhisamaya, 【阳】法现观（理解真理）。 ~amata, 【中】法的甘露。 ~ādāsa, 【阳】法镜。 ~ādhāra, 【形】法的支持者。 ~āsana, 【中】法座（弘法的座）。(p163)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ (adj.) [Sk. dhanvan] having a bow: see daḷha°; also as dhammin in daḷha° S.I,185 (see dhammin). (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Sk. *dhārma, cp. dhammika] only in f. --ī in combⁿ with kathā: relating to the Dhamma, viz. conversation on questions of Ethics, speaking about the Dh., preaching, religious discourse, sermon. Either as dhammī kathā Vin.II,161; IV,56 & in Instr.-Abl. dhammiyā kathāya (sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti saṁpahaṁseti: ster. formula) S.I,114, 155, 210, IV.122, PvA.30 etc.; or as cpd. dhammī-kathā D.II,1; M.I,161; Sn.325; & dhammi-kathā S.I,155; PvA.38. (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (m. & rarely nt.) [Ved. dharma & dharman, the latter a formation like karman (see kamma for explⁿ of subj. & obj. meanings); dhṛ (see dhāreti) to hold, support: that which forms a foundation and upholds= constitution. Cp. Gr. qrόnos, Lat. firmus & fretus; Lith. derme (treaty), cp. also Sk. dhariman form, constitution, perhaps=Lat. forma, E. form] constitution etc. A. Definitions by Commentators: Bdhgh gives a fourfold meaning of the word dhamma (at DA.I,99= DhA.I,22), viz. (1) guṇe (saddo), applied to good conduct; (2) desanāyaṁ, to preaching & moral instruction; (3) pariyattiyaṁ, to the 9 fold collection of the Buddh. Scriptures (see navaṅga); (4) nissatte (-nijjīvate), to cosmic (non-animistic) law. -- No. 1 is referred to freq. in expl^s of the term, e. g. dhammiko ti ñāyena samena pavattatī ti DA.I,249; dhamman ti kāraṇaṁ ñāyaṁ PvA.211; as paṭipatti-dhamma at VvA.84; No. 3 e. g. also at PvA.2. Another and more adequate fourfold definition by Bdhgh is given in DhsA.38, viz. (1) pariyatti, or doctrine as formulated, (2) hetu, or condition, causal antecedent, (3) guṇa, or moral quality or action, (4) nissatta-nijīvatā, or “the phenomenal” as opposed to “the substantial,” “the noumenal,” “animistic entity.” Here (2) is illustrated by hetumhi ñāṇa ‘dhammapaṭisambhidā: “analytic knowledge in dhamma’s means insight into condition, causal antecedent” Vibh 293, and see Niyama (dhamma°). Since, in the former fourfold definition (2) and (3) really constitute but one main implication considered under the two aspects of Doctrine as taught and Doctrine as formulated, we may interpret Dhamma by the fourfold connotation:--doctrine, right, or righteousness, condition, phenomenon. -- For other exegetic definitions see the Com^s & the Niddesa, e. g. Nd¹ 94; for modern expl^s & analyses see e. g. Rhys Davids, Buddh. India pp. 292--4; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism (1912) pp. 32 sq., 107 sq., 235 sq.; Dhs. trsl. XXXIII, sq.; and most recently the exhaustive monograph by M. & W. Geiger, Pāli Dhamma. Abhandlungen der Bayer. Akademie XXXI. 1; München 1920; which reached the editors too late to be made use of for the Dictionary.

B. Applications and Meaning.--1. Psychologically; “mentality” as the constitutive element of cognition & of its substratum, the world of phenomena. It is that which is presented as “object” to the imagination & as such has an effect of its own:--a presentation (Vorstellung), or idea, idea, or purely mental phenomenon as distinguished from a psycho-physical phenomenon, or sensation (re-action of sense-organ to sensestimulus). The mind deals with ideas as the eye deals with forms: it is the abstraction formed by mano, or mind proper, from the objects of sense presented by the sense-organ when reacting to external objects. Thus cakkhu “faculty of sight” corresponds to rūpa “relation of form” & mano “faculty of thought” (citta & ceto its organ or instrument or localisation) corresponds to dhamma “mentalized” object or “idea” (Mrs. Rh. D. “mental object in general,” also “state of mind”) -- (a) subjective: mental attitude, thought, idea, philosophy, truth, & its recognition (anubodhi) by the Buddha, i. e. the Dhamma or worldwisdom=philosophy of the Buddha as contained & expounded in the Dialogues of the 5 Nikāyas (see below C.) -- Note. The idea of dhamma as the interpreted Order of the World is carried further in the poetical quasi-personification of the Dh. with the phrase “dhammaja dh-nimmita dh-dāyāda” (born of the Norm, created by the Norm, heir of the Norm; see under cpds. and Dhammatā; also s. v. Niyama). That which the Buddha preached, the Dhamma kat) e)coxήn, was the order of law of the universe, immanent, eternal, uncreated, not as interpreted by him only, much less invented or decreed by him, but intelligible to a mind of his range, and by him made so to mankind as bodhi: revelation, awakening. The Buddha (like every great philosopher & other Buddhas preceding Gotama: ye pi te ahesuṁ atītaṁ addhānaṁ Arahanto Sammāsambuddhā te pi dhammaṁ yeva sakkatvā S.I,140) is a discoverer of this order of the Dhamma, this universal logic, philosophy or righteousness (“Norm”), in which the rational & the ethical elements are fused into one. Thus by recognition of the truth the knower becomes the incorporation of the knowable (or the sense of the universe=Dhamma) & therefore a perfect man, one who is “truly enlightened” (sammā-sambuddha): so Bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passati cakkhu-bhūto ñāṇa-bhūto dhamma° brahma° & in this possession of the truth he is not like Brahmā, but Brahmā himself & the lord of the world as the “master of the Truth”: vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā Amatassa dātā dhammassāmī S.IV,94; & similarly “yo kho Dhammaṁ passati so mam passati; yo mam passati so Dhammaṁ passati” =he who sees the Buddha sees the Truth S.III,120. Cp. with this also the dhamma-cakka idea (see cpds.). On equation Dhamma=Brahman see esp. Geiger, Dhamma pp. 76--80, where is also discussed the formula Bhagavato putto etc. (with dhammaja for the brahmanic brahmaja). -- In later (Abhidhamma) literature the (dogmatic) personification of Dhamma occurs. See e. g. Tikp A 366.

As 6th sense-object “dhamma” is the counterpart of “mano”: manasā dhammaṁ viññāya “apperceiving presentations with the mind” S.IV,185 etc. (see formula under rūpa); mano-viññeyyā dhammā S.IV,73; cp. S.III,46; IV,3 sq.; V,74; D.III,226, 245, 269. Ranged in the same category under the anupassanā-formula (q. v.) “dhammesu dhamm-ânupassin” realising the mentality of mental objects or ideas, e. g. D.II,95, 100, 299; A.I,39, 296; II,256; III,450; IV,301. Also as one of the 6 taṇhās “desire for ideas” D.III,244, 280. -- As spirituality opposed to materiality in contrast of dh. & āmisa: It.98 (°dāna: a mat. & a spir. gift). -- (b) objective: substratum (of cognition), piece, constituent (=khandha), constitution; phenomenon, thing, “world,” cosmic order (as the expression of cosmic sense, as under a & 2). Thus applied to the khandhas: vedanādayo tayo kh. DhA.I,35 (see Khandha B 3); to rūpa vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāna S.III,39;= saṅkhārā D.III,58, 77, 141. Freq. in formula sabbe dhammā aniccā (+dukkhā anattā: see nicca) “the whole of the visible world, all phenomena are evanescent etc.” S.III,132 sq. & passim. diṭṭhe [va] dhamme in the phenomenal world (opp. samparāyika dh. the world beyond): see under diṭṭha (S.IV,175, 205 etc.). -- ye dhammā hetuppabhavā tesaṁ hetuṁ Tathāgato āha “of all phenomena sprung from a cause the Buddha the cause hath told” Vin.I,40 (cp. Isā Upanishad 14). ‹-› lokadhammā things of this world (viz. gain, fame, happiness etc., see under lābha) D.III,260; Nd² 55. ‹-› uttari-manussa-dh°ā transcendental, supernormal phenomena D.I,211, cp. D.III,4; abbhuta-dh°ā wonderful signs, portents Miln.8 (tayo acchariyā a. dh. pāturahesuṁ); PvA.2: hassa-khiḍḍhā-rati-dh.-samāpanna endowed with the qualities or things of mirth, play & enjoyment D.I,19; III,31; gāma° things or doings of the village D.I,4 (cp. DA.I,72).

2. Ratio-ethically-(a) objective: “rationality,” anything that is as it should be according to its reason & logicality (as expressed under No. 1 a), i. e. right property, sound condition, norm, propriety, constitution as conforming to No. 1 in universal application i. e. Natural or Cosmic Law: yattha nāmañ ca rūpaṁ ca asesam uparujjhati, taṁ te dhammaṁ idhâññāya acchiduṁ bhavabandhanaṁ (recognising this law) S.I,35 cittacetasikā dh° ā a term for the four mental khandhas, and gradually superseding them Dhs.1022 (cf. Compendium of Philosophy, 1); dasadhamma-vidū Vin.I,38 (see dasa); with attha, nirutti and paṭibhāna: one of the 4 Paṭisambhidās (branches of analytic knowledge A.II,160; Pṭs I.84, 88 etc.; Vibh. 293 f., Points of Controversy, p. 380. In this sense freq. --° as adj.: being constituted, having the inherent quality (as based on Natural Law or the rational constitution of the Universe), destined to be . . ., of the (natural) property of . . ., like (cp. Gr. --eidήs or E. --able, as in change-able=liable to change, also E. --hood, --ly & P. --gata, --ṭhita), e. g. khaya-dhamma liable to decay (+vaya°, virāga°, nirodha°), with ref. to the Saṅkhāras S.IV,216 sq.; in the Paṭiccasamuppāda S.II,60; akkhaya imperishable Pv IV.1⁵² (dānaṁ a-dh. atthu). cavana° destined to shift to another state of existence D.I,18; III,31; It.76; VvA.54. jāti-jarā-maraṇa° under the law of birth, age, & death D.III,57; A.I,147; III,54; PvA.41 (sabbe sattā . . .); bhedana° fragile (of kāya) D.I,76; S.I,71; PvA.41 (bhijjana° of saṅkhārā). vipariṇāma° changeable A.I,258; IV,157; PvA.60 (+anicca). a° unchanging D.III,31 sq. samudaya° & nirodha°, in formula yaṁ kiñci s-dh°ṁ sabban tan n-dh°ṁ “anything that is destined to come into existence must also cease to exist” D.I,110, 180; S.IV,47 & passim. Cp. further: anāvatti° avinipāta° D.I,156; III,107, 132; A.I,232; II,89, 238; IV,12; anuppāda° D.III,270. -- (b) subjective: “morality,” right behaviour, righteousness, practice, duty; maxim (cp. ṭhāna), constitution of character as conforming to No. 1 in social application, i. e. Moral Law. -- Often in pl.: tenets, convictions, moral habits; & as adj. that which is proper, that which forms the right idea; good, righteous, true; opp. adhamma false, unjust etc.; evil practice -- (a) Righteousness etc.: S.I,86 (eko dh. one principle of conduct; II,280 (dh. isinaṁ dhajo: righteousness is the banner of the Wise); kusala dh. D.I,224; dhamme ṭhita righteous Vv 16⁸; ñāti° duty against relatives PvA.30; deyya°= dāna PvA.9, 70; sad° faith (q. v.) -- opp. adhamma unrighteousness, sin A.II,19; V,73 sq.; D.III,70 (°rāga+ visama-lobha & micchā-dhamma); Pv III,9⁶ (°ṁ anuvattisaṁ I practised wrong conduct).- In the same sense: dh. asuddho Vin.I,5=S.I,137 (pāturahosi Magadhesu pubbe dh. a.); pāpa° (adj.) of evil conduct Vin.I,3; aṭṭhita° unrighteous D.III,133; lobha° greedy quality D.I,224, 230; methuna dh. fornication D.III,133. -- (b) (pl.) Tenets, practices etc. -- (aa) good: kusalā dh. D.II,223, 228; III,49, 56, 82, 102 etc.; S.II,206; sappurisa° A.V,245, 279; PvA.114; samaṇa° Wanderer’s practice or observances DhA.II,55. brāhmaṇakaraṇā D.I,244; yesaṁ dh°ānaṁ Gotamo vaṇṇavādin D.I,206; cp. sīlaṁ samādhi paññā ca vimutti ca anuttarā: anubuddhā ime dhammā Gotamena yasassinā D.II,123. dhammānaṁ sukusalo perfect in all (these) qualities D.I,180; samāhite citte dhammā pātubhavanti “with composed mind appear true views” S.IV,78; dhammesu patiṭṭhito S.I,185; ananussutesu dh°esu cakkhuṁ udapādi “he visualized undiscovered ideas” S.II,9. ‹-› (bb) evil: āvaraṇīyā S.IV,104; pāpakā Vin.I,8; D.I,70; A.I,202; akusalā D.III,56, 57, 73, 91 etc.; lobha°, dosa°, moha° S.I,70=It.45=Nd² 420; S.I,43; M.III,40; dukkhavipākā vodanīyā saṁkilesikā ponobbhavikā D.I,195; III,57. -- (cc) various: gambhīrā duddasā etc. Vin.I,4; D.I,12; S.I,136; -- Cp. S.II,15, 26; Nd² 320; It.22, 24; Ps.I,5, 22, 28; Vbh.105, 228, 293 sq. etc. etc. -- (g) (adj.) good, pious, virtuous etc.: adhammo nirayaṁ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṁ “the sinners go to niraya, the good to heaven” Th.1, 304=DA.I,99=DhsA.38= DhA.I,22. kalyāṇa° virtuous A.I,74, 108; II,81, 91, 224 sq.; PvA.13. Opp. pāpa° Vin.III,90; cp. above a. -- (d) (phrases). Very freq. used as adv. is the Instr. dhammena with justice, justly, rightly, fitly, properly Vin.I,3; D.I,122; S.IV,331; Vv 34¹⁹ (=kāraṇena ñāyena vā VvA); Pv.II,9³⁰ (=yutten’eva kāraṇena PvA.125, as just punishment); IV,16⁹ (=anurūpakāraṇena PvA.286). Esp. in phrase of the cakkavattin, who rules the world according to justice: adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena anusāsati (or ajjhāvasati) D.I,89; II,16; S.I,236=Sn.1002; cp. Sn.554 (dhammena cakkaṁ vattemi, of the Buddha). Opp. adhammena unjustly, unfitly, against the rule Vin.IV,37; S.I,57; IV,331; DA.I,236. -- dhamme (Loc.) honourably J.II,159. ‹-› dhammaṁ carati to live righteously Pv.II,3³⁴; see also below C 3 & dh.-cariyā.

C. The Dhamma, i. e. moral philosophy, wisdom, truth as propounded by Gotama Buddha in his discourses & conversations, collected by the compilers of the 5 Nikāyas (dhamma-vinayaṁ saṅgāyantehi dhammasaṅgāhakehi ekato katvā VvA.3; cp. mayaṁ dh.°ṁ ca vinayañ ca saṅgāyāma Vin.II,285), resting on the deeper meaning of dhamma as expl^d under B 1 a, & being in short the “doctrinal” portions of the Buddhist Tipiṭaka in contradiction to the Vinaya, the portion expounding the rules of the Order (see piṭaka). Dhamma as doctrine is also opposed to Abhidhamma “what follows on the Dhamma.” -- (1) Dhamma and Vinaya, “wisdom & discipline,” as now found in the 2 great Piṭakas of the B. Scriptures, the Vinaya and SuttantaPiṭaka (but the expression “Piṭako” is later. See Piṭaka). Thus bhikkhū suttantikā vinaya-dharā dhamma kathikā, i. e. “the bhikkhus who know the Suttantas, remember the Vinaya & preach the Word of the Buddha” Vin.II,75 (≈I.169), cp. IV.67. Dhamma & Vinaya comb^d: yo ‘haṁ evaṁ svâkkhāte Dh-vinaye pabbajito S.I,119; bhikkhu na evarūpiṁ kathaṁ kattā hoti: na tvaṁ imaṁ Dh-v°ṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ Dh-v°ṁ ājānāmi etc. S.III,12; imaṁ Dh-v°ṁ na sakkomi vitthārena ācikkhituṁ S.I,9; samaṇā . . . imasmiṁ Dh-v°e gādhanti S.III,59. -- Thus in var. cpds. (see below), as Dh-dhara (+V-dh.) one who knows both by heart; Dh-vādin (+V-v.) one who can recite both, etc. -- See e. g. the foll. passages: Vin.II,285 (dh. ca v. ca pariyatta), 304; III,19, 90; D.I,8, 176, 229; II,124 (ayaṁ Dh. ayaṁ V. idaṁ Satthu-sāsanaṁ); III,9, 12, 28, 118 sq.; S.I,9, 119, 157; II,21, 50, (dh-vinaye assāsa); A.III,297 (id.); S.II,120; III,91; IV,43 sq., 260; A.I,34, 121, 185, 266; II,2, 26, 117, 168; III,8, 168 sq.; IV,36, 200 sq.; V,144, 163, 192; It.112; Sn.p.102; Ud.50. ‹-› 2. Dhamma, Buddha, Saṅgha. On the principle expl^d in Note on B 1 a rests the separation of the personality of the teacher from that which he taught (the “Doctrine,” the “Word,” the Wisdom or Truth, cp. Dhamma-kāyo Tathāgatassa adhivacanaṁ D.III,84). A person becoming a follower of the B. would conform to his teaching (Dh.) & to the community (“Church”; Saṅgha) by whom his teaching was handed down. The formula of Initiation or membership is therefore threefold, viz. Buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ upemi (gacchāmi), Dh.°ṁ . . ., Saṅghaṁ . . . i. e. I put myself into the shelter of the B., the Dh. & the S. (see further ref. under Saṅgha) S.I,34 (Buddhe pasannā Dhamme ca Saṅghe tibbagāravā: ete sagge pakāsenti yattha te upapajjare, i. e. those who adore the B. & his Church will shine in Heaven); D.II,152 sq., 202 sq., 352; S.IV,270 sq. (°saraṇagamana); DhA.I,206; PvA.1 (vande taṁ uttamaṁ Dh.°ṁ, B °ṁ, S °ṁ). Cp. Satthari, Dhamme, Saṅghe kaṅkhati, as 3 of the ceto-khilā A.III,248≈. --3. Character of the Dhamma in var. attributes, general phraseology. -- The praise of the Dh. is expressed in many phrases, of which only a few of the more frequent can be mentioned here. Among the most famous is that of “dhammaṁ deseti ādi-kalyāṇaṁ majjhe-k°, pariyosāna-k°, etc. “beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle & beautiful in the end,” e. g. D.I,62; S.I,105; IV,315; A.II,147, 208; III,113 sq., 135, 262; D.III,96, 267; Nd² 316; It.79; VvA.87. It is welcome as a friend, beautifully told, & its blessings are immediate: sv’akkhāta, sandiṭṭhika, akālika, ehipassika etc. D.II,93; III,5, 39, 45, 102; S.I,9, 117; II,199; IV,271; A.III,285 etc. It is mahā-dh. S.IV,128; ariya° S.I,30; A.V,241, 274; Sn.783; sammā° S.I,129. It is likened to a splendid palace on a mountain-top Vin.I,5=It.33, or to a quiet lake with sīla as its banks S.I,169=183; and it is above age & decay: satan ca dhammo na jaram upeti S.I,71. Whoever worships the Dh. finds in this worship the highest gratification: diyo loke sako putto piyo loke sako pati, tato piyatarā . . . dhammassa magganā S.I,210; ye keci ariyadhamme khantiyā upetā . . . devakāyaṁ paripūressanti S.I,30. Dh.°ṁ garukaroti D.III,84. Opp. Dhamme agārava A.III,247, 340; IV,84: the slanderers of the Dh. receive the worst punishment after death S.I,30 (upenti Roruvaṁ ghoraṁ). -- Var. phrases: to find the truth (i. e. to realize intuitively the Dh.)=dh°ṁ anubodhati D.II,113; S.I,137, or vindati D.I,110, 148. To expound the Dh., teach the truth, talk about problems of ethics & philosophy: dh°ṁ deseti Vin.IV,134; S.I,210 etc.; katheti PvA.41; bhāsati Vin.I,101; bhaṇati Vin.I,169; pakāseti S.II,28; IV,121. To hear the Dh., to listen to such an exposition: dh°ṁ suṇāti S.I,114, 137, 196, 210; A.I,36; III,163; DhA.III,81, 113. To attain full knowledge of it: dh °ṁ pariyāpuṇāti A.II,103, 185; III,86, cp. 177 & °pariyatti. To remember the Dh.: dhāreti A.III,176 (for details of the 5 stages of the Dh.-accomplishment); to ponder over the Dh., to study it: dh °ṁ viciṇāti S.I,34=55, 214; A.IV,3 sq. To enter a relation of discipleship with the Dh.: dh °ṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati (see above 2) Pv IV.3⁴⁸; dhammaṁ saraṇatthaṁ upehi Vv 53² (cp. VvA.232). ‹-› See further Ps.I,34, 78, 131; II,159 sq.; Pug.58, 66; Vbh.293 sq., 329; Nett 11, 15, 31, 83, 112; & cp. cpds. -- 4. Dhamma and anudhamma. Childers interprets anudhamma with “lesser or inferior dhamma,” but the general purport of the Nikāya passages seems to be something like “in conformity with, in logical sequence to the dhamma” i. e. lawfulness, righteousness, reasonableness, truth (see KS.II,202; Geiger, Pāli Dhamma pp. 115--118). It occurs (always with Dh.) in the foll. contexts: dhammassa c’ânudh °ṁ vyākaroti “to explain according to the truth of the Dhamma” D.I,161; III,115; Ud.50; dhammassa hoti anudhammacārin “walking in perfect conformity to the Dh.” A.II,8; dh.-anudh °ṁ ācaranti id. D.III,154; dh.-anudh° paṭipanna “one who has reached the complete righteousness of the Dh.” D.II,224; III,119; S.III,40 sq.; It.81; A.III,176 (where it forms the highest stage of the Dhammaknowledge, viz. (1) dh °ṁ suṇāti; (2) pariyāpuṇāti; (3) dhāreti; (4) atthaṁ upaparikkhati; (5) dh-anudh °ṁ paṭipajjati). Further in series bahussuta, dhammadhara, dh-anudh°-paṭipanna D.II,104; S.V,261; A.II,8; Ud.63; also in dhamma-kathika, dh-anudh°-paṭi panna, diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna-patta S.II,18=114= III,163; & in atthaṁ aññāya, dhammaṁ aññāya, dhanudh°-paṭipanna A.I,36; II,97.

--akkhāna discussing or preaching of the Dhamma Nd¹ 91; --atthadesanā interpretation of the Dh. Miln.21; --âdhikaraṇa a point in the Dh. S.IV,63=V.346; --âdhipa Lord of righteousness (+anudhamma-cārin) A.I,150; cp. °ssāmi; nt. abstr. °âdhipateyya the dominating influence of the Dh. A.I,147 sq.; D.III,220; Miln.94; Vism.14. --ânudhamma see above C 4; --anuvattin acting in conformity with the moral law Dh.86, cp. DhA.II,161; --ânusārin of righteous living D.III,105, 254 (+saddhā°); M.I,226, 479; A.I,74; IV,215; IV,23; S.V,200; Pug.15; Nett 112, 189; --anvaya main drift of the faith, general conclusions of the Dh., D.II,83= III,100; M.II,120; --abhisamaya understanding of the Truth, conversion to the Dhamma [cp. dharmâbhisamaya Divy 200] S.II,134 (+dh.-cakkhu-paṭilābha): Pug.41; Miln.20; DhA.I,27; IV,64; PvA.31 etc.; --âmata the nectar of righteousness or the Dh. Miln.22 (°meghena lokaṁ abhitappayanto), 346; --ādāsa the mirror of the Dhamma D.II,93 (name of an aphorism) S.V,357 (id.); Th.1, 395; ThA.179; --āyatana the field of objects of ideation S.II,72; Dhs.58, 66, 147, 397, 572, 594; Vbh.70, 72 sq.; --ārammaṇa: dh. as an object of ideation Dhs.146, 157, 365; cp. Dhs. trsl. 2; --ārāma “one who has the Dh. as his pleasure-ground,” one who rejoices in the Dh. A.III,431; It.82 (+dh-rata); Sn.327; Dh.364, cp. DhA.IV,95; --ālapana using the proper address, a fit mode of addressing a person as followed by the right custom. See Dial. I.193--196; J.V,418; --āsana “the Dh-seat,” i. e. flat piece of stone or a mat on which a priest sat while preaching J.I,53; DhA.II,31; --ûposatha the fast day prescribed by the Dh. A.I,208; --okkā the torch of Righteousness J.I,34; --oja the essence or sap of the Dh. S.V,162; DhA.IV,169; --osadha the medicine of the Dh. Miln.110, 335. --kathā ethical discussion, fit utterance, conversation about the Dh., advice D.III,151; J.I,217; VvA.6; PvA.50, 66; --kathika (adj.) one who converses about ethical problems, one who recites or preaches the Dh., one who speaks fitly or properly. Often in combn. with Vinaya-dhara “one who masters (knows by heart) the Vinaya,” & bahussuta “one who has a wide knowledge of tradition”: Vin.IV,10, 13, 141; A.III,78; DhA.II,30; also with suttantika “one who is versed in the Suttantas”: Vin.I,169; II,75; IV,67. The ability to preach the Dh. is the first condition of one who wishes to become perfected in righteousness (see dhamm-ânudhamma, above C 4): S.II,18, 114=III,163; M.III,40. -- A.I,25 sq.; II,138; Pug.42; J.I,217; IV,2 (°thera). Cp. also AvŚ II.81; --kathikatta (nt.) speaking about the Dh.; preaching M.III,40; A.I,38 (+vinayadhara-katta); --kamma a legally valid act, or procedure in accordance with the Rules of the Order Vin.IV,37, 136, 232; A.I,74 (+vinaya°); a° an illegal act Vin.IV,232; A.I,74; --karaka a proper or regulation (standard) water-pot, i. e. a pot with a filter for straining water as it was used by ascetics Vin.II,118, 177, 301; J.I,395; VI,331; DhA.III,290, 452; VvA.220 (not °karaṇena); PvA.185; Miln.68; --kāma a lover of the Dh. D.III,267; A.V,24, 27, 90, 201; Sn.92. --kāya having a body according to the Norm (the dhammatā of bodies). See Bdhgh as translated in Dial. III, ad Loc.; having a normal body (sic Bdhgh, esp. of the B. D.III,84; --ketu the standard of the Dh., or Dh. as standard A.I,109=III,149; --khan- dha the (4) main portions or articles of the Dh. (sīla, samādhi, paññā, vimutti) D.III,229; cp. Sp. AvŚ II.155; --gaṇa a body of followers of the Dh. PvA.194; --gaṇḍikā (better gaṇṭhikā, q v.) a block of justice, i. e. of execution J.I,150, 151; II,124; VI,176; V,303; --garu worshipping the Dh. S.IV,123; DhA.I,17 (°ka); --gariya a kind of acrobatic tumbler, lit. excellent t. (+brahma°) Miln.191; --gu one who knows the Dh. (analogous to vedagu) J.V,222; VI,261; --gutta protecting the Dh. or protected by the Dh. (see gutta) S.I,222; J.V,222 (+dhpāla); --ghosaka (-kamma) praise of the Dh. DhA.III,81; --cakka the perfection or supreme harmony of righteousness (see details under cakka), always in phrase dhcakkaṁ pavatteti (of the Buddha) “to proclaim or inaugurate the perfect state or ideal of universal righteousness” Vin.I,8=M.I,171; Vin.I,11; S.I,191; III,86; Sn.556, 693; Miln.20, 343; DhA.I,4; VvA.165; PvA.2, 67 etc.; besides this also in simile at S.I,33 of the car of righteousness; --cakkhu “the eye of wisdom,” perception of the law of change. Freq. in the standing formula at the end of a conversation with the Buddha which leads to the “opening of the eyes” or conversion of the interlocutor, viz. “virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhcakkhuṁ udapādi” D.I,86, 110; II,288; S.IV,47; A.IV,186; Vin.I,11, 16, 40 etc. Expl. at DA.I,237: dhammesu vā cakkhuṁ dhammamayaṁ vā cakkhuṁ. Cp. S.II,134 (°paṭiĺābha;+dhammâbhisamaya); Dial. I.184; II,176; --cariyā walking in righteousness, righteous living, observance of the Dh., piety (=dānādi-puññapaṭipatti VvA.282) S.I,101 (+samacariyā kusalakiriyā); A.II,5; III,448; V,87, 302; Sn.263 (=kāyasucaritâdi° SnA. 309), 274 (+brahma°). a° evil way of living A.I,55 (+visama-cariyā); --cārin virtuous, dutiful M.I,289; II,188; Dh.168; Miln.19 (+samacārin); --cetiya a memorial in honour of the Dh. M.II,124; --chanda virtuous desire (opp. kāma°) DhsA.370; Vbh.208; --ja born of the Dh. (see above, Note on B 1 a), in formula “Bhagavato putto oraso dh-jo, dh-nimmito, dh.dāyādo” (the spiritual child of the Buddha) D.III,84=S.II,221; It.101; --jāla “net of the Dh.,” name of a discourse (cp. °ādāsa & pariyāya) D.I,46; --jīvin living righteously It.108; Dh.24 (=dhammenā samena DhA.I,239); --ññū one who knows the Dh. J.VI,261; --ṭṭha standing in the Law, just, righteous S.I,33 (+sīlasampanna); Sn.749; J.III,334; IV,211; ThA.244, --ṭṭhita=°ṭṭha D.I,190; --ṭṭhiti° having a footing in the Dh. S.II,60, 124, cp. °ṭṭhitatā: establishing of causes and effects S.II,25; --takka right reasoning Sn.1107 (=sammāsaṅkappa Nd² 318); --dāna gift of; --dāyāda heir of the Dh.; spiritual heir (cp. above note on B 1 a) D.III,84; S.II,221; M.I,12; III,29; It.101; --dīpa the firm ground or footing of the Dh. (usually comb^d with atta-dīpa: having oneself as one’s refuge, self-dependent) D.II,100; III,58, 77; S.V,154; --desanā moral instruction, exposition of the Dh. Vin.I,16; D.I,110 etc. (see desanā); --dessin a hater of the Dh. Sn.92; --dhaja the banner of the Dh. A.I,109= III,149; Nd² 503; Miln.21; --dhara (adj.) one who knows the Dh. (by heart); see above C 4. Comb^d w. Vinayadhara Vin.I,127, 337; II,8; A.I,117, & bahussuta (ibid). Sn.58 (cp. SnA 110). -- See also A.III,361 sq., IV.310; Nd² 319; --dhātu the mental object considered as irreducible element Dhs.58, 67, 147 etc.; Vbh.87, 89 (see above B 1); an ultimate principle of the Dh., the cosmic law D.II,8; M.I,396; S.II,143 sq.; Nett 64 sq.; Vism.486 sq. --dhāraṇa knowledge of the Dh. M.II,175; --nāṭaka a class of dancing girls having a certain duty J.V,279; --nimmita see °ja; --niyāma belonging to the order of the Norm D.I,190; DA. on D.II,12: dhammatā; (°ka); --niyāmatā, certainty, or orderliness of causes and effects S.II,25; Points of Controversy, 387; --netti= niyāma Miln.328; DA.I,31; cp. Sk. dharmanetrī M Vastu II.357; III,234, 238; --pajjota the lamp of the Dh. Miln.21; --pada (nt.) a line or stanza of the Dhamma, a sentence containing an ethical aphorism; a portion or piece of the Dh. In the latter meaning given as 4 main subjects, viz. anabhijjhā, avyāpāda, sammā-sati, sammā-samādhi D.III,229; A.II,29 sq. (in detail); Nett 170. -- S.I,22 (dānā ca kho dh-padaṁ va seyyo). 202 (dh-padesu chando); A.II,185; Sn.88 (dh-pade sudesite=nibbāna-dhammassa padattā SnA 164); J.III,472 (=nibbāna); DhA.III,190 (ekaṁ dh-padaṁ). As Np. title of a canonical book, included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; --pamāṇa measuring by the (teaching of) Dh. Pug.53; DhA.III,114 (°ikāni jātisatāni); --pariyatti attainment of or accomplishment in the Dh., the collection of the Dh. in general A.III,86 (w. ref. to the 9 aṅgas, see navaṅga); --pariyāya a short discourse, or a verse, or a poem, with a moral or a text; usually an exposition of a single point of doctrine D.I,46; II,93; III,116; M.I,445; Vin.I,40 (a single verse); A.I,65; IV,63 (a poem Sn.190--218, where also it is called a dh°pariyāyo); A.V,288, 291. Such a dh°pariyāya had very often a special name. Thus Brahmajāla, the Wondrous Net D.I,46; Dhammādāso dh°p°, the Mirror of the Law D.II,93=S.V,357; Sokasallaharaṇa, Sorrow’s dart extractor A.III,62; Ādittap° dh°p°, the Red-hot lancet S.IV,168; Lomahaṁsana° M.I,83; Dhammatā-dhamma° Miln.193, etc. --pāla guardian of the Law or the Dh. J.V,222, freq. also as Np.; --pīti (-rasa) the sweetness of drinking in the Dh. (pivaṁ) Sn.257; Dh.79 (=dhammapāyako dhammaṁ pivanto ti attho DhsA.II,126); --bhaṇḍāgārika treasurer of the Dh., an Ep. of Ānanda Th.1, 1048; J.I,382, 501; II,25; DhA.III,250; PvA.2. --bhūta having become the Dh.; righteousness incorporated, said of the Buddhas D.III,84. Usually in phrase (Bhagavā) cakkhu-bhūta . . . dh-bhūta brahmabhūta A.V,226 sq. (cp. cakkhu); Th.1, 491; see also above, note B 1 a; --bheri the drum of the Dh. Miln.21; --magga the path of righteousness Sn.696; Miln.21; --maya made (built) of the Dh. (pāsāda) S.I,137; --yanta the (sugar-) mill of the Dh. (fig.) Miln.166. --yāna the vehicle of the Law (the eightfold Noble Path) S.V,5; --rakkhita rightly guarded Sn.288; --rata fond of the Law Sn.327; Dh.364; DhA.IV,95; cp. dh.-[gatā]rati Th.I,742; Dhp. 354; --rasa taste of Dhp. 354; --rājā king of righteousness, Ep. of the Buddha S.I,33=55; D.I,88 (of a cakkavatti); A.I,109; III,149; Sn.554; J.I,262; interpreted by Bdhgh at DA.I,249 as “dhammena rajjaṁ labhitvā rājā jāto ti”=a king who gained the throne legitimately; --laddha one who has acquired the Dh., holy, pious S.II,21; J.III,472; justly acquired (bhogā) Sn.p. 87; --vara the best of truths or the most excellent Doctrine Sn.233, 234; --vādin speaking properly, speaking the truth or according to the Doctrine Vin.II,285; III,175 (+Vinaya-vādin); D.III,135 (id.); D.I,4, 95 (of Gotama; DA.I,76: nava-lokuttara-dhamma sannissitaṁ katvā vadati); S.IV,252; A.I,75; II,209; --vicaya investigation of doctrine, religious research Dhs.16, 20, 90, 309, 333, 555; Vbh.106; Vism.132; --vitakka righteous thought A.I,254; --vidū one who understands the Dh., an expert in the Dh. J.V,222; VI,261; --vinicchaya righteous decision, discrimination of the truth Sn.327; Dh.144; DhA.III,86; --vihārin living according to the Dh. A.III,86 sq.; --saṁvibhāga sharing out or distribution of the Dh., i. e. spiritual gifts It.98 (opp. āmisa° material gifts); --saṅgāhaka a compiler of the sacred scriptures, a diaskeuastήs VvA.3, 169; --saññā righteous thought, faith, piety PvA.3; --sabhā a hall for the discussion of the Dh., a chapel, meetinghouse J.VI,333; DhA.I,31; II,51; IV,91; PvA.38, 196; --samaya a meeting where the Dh. is preached S.I,26; --samādāna acquisition of the Dh., which is fourfold as discussed at M.I,305; D.III,229; --saraṇa relying on or putting one’s faith in the Dh. (see above C 3) D.III,58, 77; S.V,154; --savana hearing the preaching of the Dh., “going to church” Vin.I,101; M.II,175; A.II,248, 381; IV,361; Sn.265; DhA.III,190; --sākaccha conversation about the Dh. Sn.266; --ssāmi Lord of the Truth, Ep. of the Buddha (see above B 1 a note) S.IV,94; --sāra the essence of the Dh. S.V,402; --sārathi in purisa-dh.-s° at D.I,62 misprint for purisa-damma-s°; --sārin a follower of the Dh. S.I,170; --sudhammatā excellency of the Dh. S.II,199; Th.1, 24, 220, 270, 286; --senāpati “captain of the Dhamma,” Ep. of Sāriputta Th.1, 1083; J.I,408; Miln.343; DhA.III,305; VvA.64, 65, 158; --soṇḍatā thirst after justice J.V,482; --sota the ear of the Dh. S.II,43. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Skt. Dharma)法', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(梵Dharma‹dhr支持﹑握著), 【中】(有时作【阳】)法，教义，自然，事实，规格，道德，好行为。dhammakkhāna,【中】弘法(教义的讲道)。dhammakathā,【阴】法论(宗教性的谈话，伦理的讨论)。dhammakathika,【阳】法论者(传道的人)。dhammakamma,【中】法业(合法的行为)，如法羯磨(符合戒律规则的程序)。dhammakāma,【形】热爱真理的人。dhammakāya,【形】法身。dhammakkhandha,【阳】法蕴 (规格的部分)。dhammagaṇa,【阳】法众(dhamma-clubmen)。dhammagaṇḍikā,【阴】断头台，刑场。dhammagaru,【形】法尊(尊敬规格的)。dhammagutta,【形】法护。dhammaghosaka,【阳】法音者(宣教的人)。dhammacakka,【中】法轮。dhammacakkappavattana,【中】转法轮(训诫宇宙的正义)。dhammacakkhu,【中】法眼(智慧的眼睛)(已生起道智，称为法眼(SA.6.1./I,200.︰tiṇṇaṁ maggañāṇānaṁ “dhammacakkhū”ti.) 称为法眼是低的三道和三果--远尘，离垢，得法眼净。Dhammacakkhu nāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā tīṇi ca phalāni, yaṁ--“virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādī”ti āgataṁ.。dhammacariyā,【阴】法行(遵守正义)。dhammacārī,【阳】法行者(遵守正义的人)。【形】有品德的。dhammacetiya,【中】法塔。dhammajīvī,【形】正直地生活的。dhammaññū,【形】懂得教义的人。dhammaṭṭha,【形】正义的，正直的。dhammaṭṭhiti,【阴】法住。dhammatakka,【阳】法思择(正确的推论)。dhammatā,(顺)法性，法自然。dhammadāna,【中】法施(规格的礼物)。dhammadāyāda,【形】法嗣(以法为遗产，教义的继承人。Dhammadāyādā me bhikkhave bhavatha mā āmisadāyādā比丘们！成为我的法嗣者，莫成为我的财产的继承者。)。dhammadīpa,【形】法灯，法岛(以法为可靠的立足点)。dhammadesanā,【阴】说法，开示佛理。dhammadessī,【阳】法憎者(憎恨法者)。dhammadhaja,【形】法旗(以法为旗帜的)。dhammadhara,【形】法持，持法者(牢记法的人)。dhammaniyāma,【阳】法序(法的次序)。dhammapaṇṇākāra,【阳】法赠(法为赠品)。dhammapada,【中】法句。dhammappamāṇa,【形】法量(藉著教义为测量)。dhammabhaṇḍāgārika,【阳】法司库(正义的财务员)。dhammabheri,【阴】法鼓(正义之鼓)。dhammarakkhita,【形】法护(被正义保护的)。dhammarata,【形】法爱(爱好法)。dhammarati,【阴】法乐(以法为乐)。dhammarasa,【阳】法味(法的味道)。dhammarāja,【阳】法王(正义之王)。dhammaladdha,【形】法获(正直取得的)。dhammavara,【阳】优法(优良的教义)。dhammavādī,【形】法语者(依法说的)。dhammavicaya,【阳】择法(对法做检讨)。dhammavidū,【形】知法者(懂法的人)。dhammavinaya,【阳】法与律，法律。dhammavinicchaya,【阳】法决(正当的决定)。dhammavihārī,【形】法住(依法而住的)。dhammasaṁvibhāga,【阳】法的分配。dhammasaṅgīti,【阴】法诵(法的背诵)。dhammasaṅgāhaka,【阳】法的编辑者。dhammasamādāna,【中】法的获得。dhammasaraṇa,【中】归依法。dhammasavaṇa,【中】听闻法。dhammasākacchā,【阴】讨论法。dhammasālā,【阴】法堂。dhammasenāpati,【阳】法将(法的大元帅或总司令，在经典中，指舍利弗、目犍连)。dhammasoṇḍa,【形】爱好法。dhammassāmī,【阳】法主(法的统治者)。dhammadhipati,【形】敬法为指南。dhammānudhamma,【阳】法随法(法次法，合法，守法)。dhammānudhammappaṭipanna﹐【阳】法随法行、法次法向，《长阿含经》译：法法成就。dhammanuvattī, dhammanusārī,【形】随法行(dhamma-follower守法的行动的；相对於‘信行者’ saddhānusārī (faith-follower))。dhammabhisamaya,【阳】法现观(理解真理)。dhammamata,【中】法的甘露。dhammādāsa,【阳】法镜。dhammādhāra,【形】法的支持者。dhammānupassin(dhammānupassī= dhamma(单数形态表达复数意义)+anupassī),随观诸法(adj.,m.s.Nom.)。dhammāsana,【中】法座。nippariyāya-dhammadesanā, 直接或没有受到装饰的教法(直接的方式全面地解说诸究竟法，而完全没有受到装饰)。pariyāya-dhammadesanā, 譬喻式或受到装饰的教法。AA.3.30./II,203.︰Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti navalokuttaradhammassa anudhammaṁ saha sīlena pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno. (法次法向︰行向九种出世间法、适当的法及戒的前分行道。) A.7.64./IV,57.︰Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti navannaṁ lokuttaradhammānaṁ anurūpadhammaṁ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno.(法次法向︰行向九种出世间法、适当的法的前分行道。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '事物、现象。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '佛法、真理。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Dhamma-bhaṇḍāgārika: {'def': 'Dhamma-bhaṇḍāgāriya m. 法宝の持者, 法の宝庫=阿難.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'Dhamma-bhaṇḍāgāriya m. 法寶的持者, 法的寶庫 = 阿難.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Dhamma-bhaṇḍāgāriya: {'def': 'Dhamma-bhaṇḍāgārika m. 法宝の持者, 法の宝庫=阿難', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Dhamma-senāpati: {'def': 'm. 法将軍, 法将=舎利弗.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. 法將軍, 法將 = 舍利弗.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Dhamma-vinaya: {'def': '法律', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Dhammacakka: {'def': '【中】法轮。佛陀入灭后150年左右，阿育王(公元前273～前236年在位)大统一印度，之后，他成为佛教徒，阿育王在印度各地立有单一巨石所雕刻而成的石柱(Ashoka Pillar)，刻有昭告天下的文字。在佛陀初转法轮的鹿野苑，阿育王石柱顶端，特别雕刻四只背对背的威武精美石狮，石狮下有24辐的法轮──象徵24缘，象徵向四面八方传播佛陀的纶音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhammadhātu: {'def': '﹐【阴】法界。Vism.589.：Taṁsampayuttā phassādayo dhammadhātūti.(与彼(诸识)相应的触等为法界)。SA.12.32./II,67.：Sā hi bhikkhu Sāriputtassa dhammadhātūti ettha dhammadhātūti paccayākārassa vivaṭabhāvadassanasamatthaṁ sāvakapāramīñāṇaṁ. Sāvakānañhi sāvakapāramīñāṇaṁ sabbaññutaññāṇagatikameva hoti. Yathā Buddhānaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannā dhammā sabbaññutaññāṇassa pākaṭā honti, evaṁ therassa sāvakapāramīñāṇaṁ sabbepi sāvakañāṇassa gocaradhamme jānātīti.()。CS:S-ṭ(S.19.1)pg.2.182：Dhammadhātūti sabbaññutaññāṇaṁ sandhāya vadati. Dhammadhātūti vā dhammānaṁ sabhāvo.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhammani: {'def': 'only found in S.I,103, where the Comy. takes it as a locative, and gives, as the equivalent, “in a forest on dry land” (araññe thale). Cp. Kindred Sayings I.129, n. 2. (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】捕食鼠类的游蛇类（如：鼠蛇，锦蛇等）。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】捕食鼠类的游蛇类(如：鼠蛇，锦蛇等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhammapada: {'def': 'n. 法句經 [小部經之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'n. 法句経 [小部経の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Dhammapada-aṭṭhakathā: {'def': 'f. 法句経註釈 DhpA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 法句經註釋 DhpA.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Dhammapariyāya: {'def': '(梵 Dhammaparyāya), 法门，法波梨耶夜，为佛教教法的通称。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhammarucika: {'def': 'Dhammarucī m. 法喜部 = Abhayagirika 無畏山寺派.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'Dhammarucī m. 法喜部=Abhayagirika 無畏山寺派.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Dhammarucī: {'def': 'Dhammarucika m. 法喜部=Abhayagirika 無畏山寺派', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Dhammasangaṇī: {'def': '《法聚论》(或《法集论》)，南传巴利论藏七部论之一。本论对心的善恶、地位、阶段等详加分析，得出八十九种心。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhammasaṅgaṇi: {'def': 'f. 法集論 [七論の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 法集論 [七論之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Dhammasoka: {'def': 'm.［Dhamma-Asoka］法阿育，正法阿育，アソーカ王', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Dhammatta: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. *dharmatvaṁ] liability to be judged Vin.II,55 (& a°). (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhammatā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. dharmitā] conformity to the Dhammaniyāma (see niyāma), fitness, propriety; a general rule, higher law, cosmic law, general practice, regular phenomenon, usual habit; often used in the sense of a finite verb: it is a rule, it is proper, one should expect S.I,140 (Buddhānaṁ dh. the law of the B.’s i. e. as one is wont to expect of the B.s), 215 (su°); IV,216 sq. (khaya° etc.); D.II,12; A.II,36 (kusala°); V,46; Th.1, 712; J.I,245; II,128; Nett 21, 50, cp. Miln.179; PvA.19; VvA.7. See also AvŚ Index. (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】常法（一般的规则），法性（自然）。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】常法(一般的规则)，法性(自然)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhammavicaya: {'def': '择法，检验(直接经验的)现象。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Dhammavinaya: {'def': '【阳】法与律，法律。有时作「正法律」(saddhammavinaya)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhammika: {'def': '(adj.) [=Sk. dharmya, cp. dhammiya] lawful, according to the Dh. or the rule; proper, fit, right; permitted, legitimate, justified; righteous, honourable, of good character, just, esp. an attr. of a righteous King (rājā cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā) D.I,86; II,16; A.I,109=III,149; J.I,262, 263; def. by Bdhgh as “dhammaṁ caratī ti dh.” (DA.I,237) & “dhammena caratī ti dh., ñāyena samena pavattalī ti” (ib. 249). ‹-› Vin.IV,284; D.I,103; S.II,280 (dhammikā kathā); III,240 (āhāra); IV,203 (dhammikā devā, adh° asurā); A.I,75; III,277; Sn.404; DhA.II,86 (dohaḷa); IV,185 (°lābha); PvA.25 (=suddha, manohara). Also as saha-dh° (esp. in conn. w. pañha, a justified, reasonable, proper question: D.I,94; S.IV,299 in detail) Vin.IV,141; D.I,161; III,115; A.I,174. -- a° unjust, illegal etc. Vin.IV,285; S.IV,203; A.III,243. (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhammilla: {'def': '【阳】髻，辫子，发辫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】髻，辫子，发辫。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhammilla] the braided hair of women Dāvs.IV,9. (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhammin: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Sk. dharmin] only --°: having the nature or quality of, liable to, consisting in, practising, acting like, etc. (as °dhamma B 2 a), viz. uppāda-vaya° D.II,157; maraṇa° (=maraṇadhamma) A.I,147; pāpa° Pv.I,11⁷ of evil nature. (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (-°) only in daḷha-dh°, which is customarily taken as a derⁿ from dhanu, bow=having a strong bow (see dhamma³); although some passages admit interpretation as “of strong character or good practice,” e. g. S.I,185. (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhammiya: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dharmya; cp. dhammika] in accordance with the Dhamma PvA.242 (also a°); Vism.306 (°lābha). (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhammuttarika: {'def': 'Dhammuttariya m. 法上部.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'Dhammuttariya m. 法上部.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Dhammuttariya: {'def': 'Dhammuttarika m. 法上部', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Dhammāsoka: {'def': '[Dhamma-Asoka] m. 法阿育, 正法阿育, アソ一カ王.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[Dhamma-Asoka] m. 法阿育, 正法阿育, Asoka(阿育)王.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Dhammī: {'def': 'in °kathā see dhamma². (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhammīkathā: {'def': '【阴】宗教性的谈话。【工】【离】dhammiyā kathāya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】宗教性的谈话。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhana: {'def': '【中】财富，财产。dhanakkhaya,【阳】财尽。dhanakkīta,【形】用钱买的。dhanatthaddha,【形】以财为傲的。dhanatthika,【形】需要财富的。dhanalola,【形】贪婪财富的。dhanavantu,【形】富有的。dhanahetu,【副】为了财富。dhanāsā,【阴】渴望财富。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. dhana; usually taken to dhā (see dadhāti) as “stake, prize at game, booty,” cp. pradhāna & Gr. qέma; but more likely in orig. meaning “grain, posses sion of corn, crops etc.,” cp. Lith. dūna bread, Sk. dhānā pl. grains & dhañña=dhana-like, i. e. corn, grain] wealth, usually wealth of money, riches, treasures. 1. Lit. D.I,73 (sa°); M.II,180.; A.III,222; IV,4 sq.; Nd² 135 (+yasa, issariya etc.) Th.2, 464 (+issariya); J.I,225 (paṭhavigataṁ karoti: hide in the ground), 262, 289; II,112; IV,2; Sn.60, 185, 302; Pv.II,6¹⁰; DhA.I,238. Often in combⁿ aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga to indicate immense wealth (see aḍḍha) PvA.3, 214 etc. (see also below °dhañña). -- 2. fig. Used in the expression sattavidha-ariya-dhana “the 7 fold noble treasure” of the good qualities or virtues, viz. saddhā, cāga etc. (see enum^d under cāga) D.III,163, 164, 251; VvA.113; ThA.240.

--agga the best treasure (i. e. the ariya-dhana) D.III,164; --atthika wishing for or desiring wealth Sn.987; --āsā craving for wealth; --kkīta bought for money DhA.II,3, --thaddha proud of wealth, snobbish Sn.104; --dhañña, usually Dvandva-cpd. “money & money’s worth,” but as adj. (always in phrase pahūta°) it may be taken as Tatpuruṣa “rich in treasures,” otherwise “possessing money & money’s worth” cp. pahūtadhanadhaññavā J.I,3. As n. Pv.I,11¹¹; III,10⁴; PvA.60; Miln.2, 280; as adj. freq. “pahūtadhana-dhañña” Vv 63¹³=Pv.II,6¹¹: PvA.97. Thus in ster. formula of aḍḍha mahaddhana etc. D.III,163 sq.; S.I,71; A.II,86; --parājaya loss of money, as adj. appl. to kali: the dice marking loss in game Sn.659; --lobha “greed of gold” J.IV,1; --lola=lobha J.II,212; --viriya wealth & power Sn.422; --hetu for the sake of wealth Sn.122. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '财;财物[七财(sattadhanāni)=七圣财(sattavidha-ariyadhana)](信戒惭愧闻施慧)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【中】财富，财产。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】财尽。 ~kkīta, 【形】用钱买的。 ~tthaddha, 【形】以财为傲的。 ~tthika, 【形】需要财富的。 ~lola, 【形】贪婪财富的。 ~vantu, 【形】富有的。 ~hetu, 【副】为了财富。 ~āsā, 【阴】渴望财富。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhanatta: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. *dhanatvaṁ] being bent on having money J.V,449. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhanavant: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dhanavant] wealthy Nd² 462; J.I,3. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhanika: {'def': '【阳】债权人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhanika] a creditor, Th.2, 443, ThA, 271; PvA.276. Cp. dhaniya. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】债权人。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhanita: {'def': '【中】声音。【形】发出声音的，〔语〕有浊音的，浊音的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhvanita, pp. of dhvan, cp. Ags. dyn noise= E. din; Ags. dynnan to sound loud] sounded; as nt. sonant (said of a letter) Miln.344. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】声音。【形】发出声音的，〔语〕有浊音的，浊音的。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhaniya: {'def': '=dhanika Vin.I,76. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhaniṭṭhā: {'def': '【阴】虚宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】虚宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhanta: {'def': '(dhamati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dhamati 的【过分】)。(p163)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhvānta in meaning of either dhvanita fr. dhvan to sound, or dhamita fr. dhmā to blow, see dhameti] blown, sounded A.I,253; J.I,283, 284. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhanu: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dhanus, to Ohg. tanna fir-tree, also oak, orig tree in general, cp. dāru] a bow M.I,429; J.I,50, 150; II,88; IV,327; PvA.285.

--kalāpa bow & quiver Vin.II,192; M.I,86; II,99; A.III,94; PvA.154; --kāra a bow maker Miln.331; --kārika N. of a tree J.V,420; --kārin=prec. J.V,422 (=°pāṭali); --ggaha an archer D.I,51; A.II,48; IV,107; J.I,58, 356; II,87, 88; III,220 (dhanuggaha) J.III,322; V,129 (where 4 kinds are enum^d); Vism.150 (in simile); DA.I,156; --takkāri (f.) a plant J.VI,535; --pāṭali N. of a tree J.V,422; --lakkhaṇa prophesying from marks on a bow D.I,9. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵dhanus),【中】弓(一弓等於四肘长)。dhanuka,【中】小弓。dhanukāra,【阳】弓匠。dhanuketakī,【阳】露兜树(参考 Ketakī)。dhanuggaha,【阳】弓箭手。dhanusippa,【中】箭术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】弓。 ~ka, 【中】小弓。 ~kāra, 【阳】弓匠。 ~ketakī, 【阳】露兜树（参考 Ketakī）。 ~ggaha, 【阳】射手。 ~sippa, 【中】箭术。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhanuka: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dhanuṣka] a (small) bow Vin.II,10; III,180; D.I,7; A.III,75; V,203; J.VI,41; Miln.229; DA.I,86. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhanāyati: {'def': '[denom. to dhana] to desire (like money), to wish for, strive after M.I,260 (perhaps better to be read vanāyati, see formula under allīyati, and note M.I,552). (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dhana 的【派】), 视某物为财富。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dhana 的【派】), 视某物为财富。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhanī: {'def': '【形】富有的。【名】富有的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】富有的。【名】富有的人。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhara: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中)怀有的，持有的，记住的，穿著的，戴著的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(usually --°, except at Miln.420) (adj.) [Sk. dhara, to dhr see dharati] bearing, wearing, keeping; holding in mind, knowing by heart. Freq. in phrase dhammadhara (knowing the Dhamma, q. v.), vinaya°, mātikā° e. g. D.II,125. dhamma° also Sn.58; Th.1, 187; Nd² 319; vinaya° Miln.344; jaṭājina° Sn.1010. See also dhāra. (Page 339)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 怀有的，持有的，记住的，穿着的，戴着的。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dharati: {'def': '[Sk. dharati, dhṛ as in Gr. qrόnos; Lat. firmus & fretus. See also daḷha, dhata, dhamma, dhiti, dhuva] to hold, bear, carry, wear; to hold up, support; to bear in mind, know by heart; to hold out, endure, last, continue, live Sn.385 (take to heart, remember); DhA.II,68; -- ppr. dharamāṇa living, lasting J.I,75 (dh°e yeva suriye while the sun was still up); II,6; Miln.240, 291 (Bhagavato dh°-kāle); -- grd. dhareyya, in dh°divasa the day when a young girl is to be carried (into the house of her husband) ThA, 25; cp. dhāreyya Th.2, 472=vivāha ThA.285. -- pp. dhata (q. v.) -- Caus. dhāreti (q. v.). (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dhar + a), 持续，继续，活着。【过】 dhari。【现分】 dharanta, dharamāna。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dhar+a), 持续，继续，活著。【过】dhari。【现分】dharanta, dharamāna。【工】dharantena。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dharaṇa: {'def': '(adj.) bearing, holding, comprising VvA.104 (suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa° nikkha holding, i. e. worth or equal to 15 parts of gold). -- f. --ī bearing, i. e. pregnant with Sn.26 (of cows: godharaṇiyo paveniyo=gabbhiniyo SnA 39). As n. the Earth J.V,311; VI,526; Miln.34; dharaṇī-ruha N. of a tree J.VI,482, 497; Miln.376. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】重量：大约 2/5 盎司。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】重量：大约 ⅖ 盎司。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dharaṇī: {'def': '【阴】地球。dharaṇīruha,【阳】树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】地球。 ~ruha, 【阳】树。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dharā: {'def': '【阴】地球。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】地球。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhata: {'def': '(dhāreti 的【过分】), 已紧记，已熟记。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dhāreti 的【过分】), 已紧记，已熟记。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhṛta, pp. of dharati; cp. dhara & dhāreti] 1. firm, prepared, ready, resolved A.III,114; Dāvs.V,52. -- 2. kept in mind, understood, known by heart Vin.II,95; A.I,36. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhata-raṭṭha: {'def': '(梵Dhritarāsṭra)﹐持国天，音译提头赖吒、持梨哆阿罗哆、提多罗吒；又作治国天、安民天、顺怨天，四天王之一。此天王护持国土，安抚众生，又称东方天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhataraṭṭha: {'def': '持国天王，四大天王之一，守护东方，统领甘塔拔。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '﹐持国天王，四天王依四方而分四界。每一界皆由一位天王所统治。在东方，持国天王统治乾达婆(gandhabba音乐神)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhava: {'def': '【阳】丈夫，儿茶树（参考 Khadira）。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. dhava=madhuratvaca, Halāyudha] the shrub Grislea Tomentosa A.I,202, 204; J.IV,209; VI,528. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】丈夫，儿茶树(参考 Khadira)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Sk. dhava, a newly formed word after vidhava, widow, q. v.] a husband ThA.121 (dh. vuccati sāmiko tad abhāvā vidhavā matapatikā ti attho). (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhavala: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dhavala, to dhavati, see dhāvati & dhovati] white, dazzling white VvA.252; Dāvs II.123; V,26. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】白色的，清洁的。【名】白色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】白色的，清洁的。【名】：白色。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhavalatā: {'def': '(f.) whiteness VvA.197. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhañña: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Ved. dhānya, der. fr. dhana] grain, corn. The usual enumⁿ comprises 7 sorts of grain, which is however not strictly confined to grain-fruit proper (“corn”) but includes, like other enum^ns, pulse & seeds. These 7 are sāli & vīhi (rice-sorts), yava (barley), godhuma (wheat), kaṅgu (millet), varaka (beans), kudrūsaka (?) Vin.IV,264; Nd² 314; DA.I,78. -- Nd² 314 distinguishes two oategories of dhañña: the natural (pubbaṇṇa) & the prepared (aparaṇṇa) kinds. To the first belong the 7 sorts, to the second belongs sūpeyya (curry). See also bīja-bīja. -- Six sorts are mentioned at M.I,57, viz. sāli, vīhi, mugga, māsa, tila, taṇḍula. ‹-› D.I,5 (āmaka°, q. v.); A.II,209 (id.); M.I,180; A.II,32 (+dhana); Th.1, 531; Pug.58; DhA.I,173; VvA.99; PvA.29 (dhanaṁ vā dh °ṁ vā), 198 (sāsapa-tela-missitaṁ), 278 (sappi -- madhu -- tela -- dhaññādīhi vohăraṁ katvā). -- dhaññaṁ ākirati to besprinkle a person with grain (for good luck) Pv III,5⁴ (=maṅgalaṁ karoti PvA.198, see also maṅgala).

--āgāra a store house for grain Vin.I,240; --piṭaka a basket full of grain DhA.III,370; --rāsi a heap of g. A.IV,163, 170; --samavāpaka grain for sowing, not more & not less than necessary to produce grain M.I,451. (Page 334)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Sk. dhānya, adj. to dhana or dhānya. Semantically cp. āḷhiya] “rich in corn,” rich (see dhana); happy, fortunate, lucky. Often in combⁿ dhanadhañña. -- DhA.I,171; III,464 (dhaññādika one who is rich in grains etc., i. e. lucky); DhsA.116. -- dhaññapuñña-lakkhaṇa a sign of future good fortune & merit PvA.161; as adj. endowed with the mark of . . . J.VI,3. See also dhāniya. (Page 335)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】谷粒，玉黍蜀。 ~rāsi, 【阳】谷粒堆。 ~agāra, 谷仓。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】谷粒，玉黍蜀。dhaññarāsi,【阳】谷粒堆。dhaññagāra, 谷仓。dhaññaphala, 谷粒。dhaññaphalarasa, 谷汁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'dhaññavantu,【形】幸福的，幸运的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'dhaññavantu, 【形】幸福的，幸运的。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhaṁsana: {'def': '(n.-adj.) [Sk. dharṣana] destroying, bringing to ruin, only in kula° as v. l. to kula-gandhana (q. v.) at It.64, and in dhaṁsanatā at DhA.III,353 in explⁿ of dhaṁsin (q. v.). (Page 334)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhaṁsati: {'def': '[Ved. dhvaṁsati to fall to dust, sink down, perish; Idg. dheǔes to fly like dust, cp. Sk. dhūsara “dusky”; Ags. dust; Ger. dust & dunst; E. dusk & dust; prob. also Lat. furo] to fall from, to be deprived of (c. Abl.), to be gone D.III,184 (with Abl. asmā lokā dh.) A.II,67; V,76, 77; It.11; Th.1, 225, 610; J.III,260, 318, 441, 457; IV,611; V,218, 375. -- Caus. dhaṁseti [Sk. dhvaṁsayati, but more likely=Sk. dharṣayati (to infest, molest= Lat. infestare. On similar sound-change P. dhaṁs°› Sk. dharṣ cp. P. daṁseti›Sk. darśayati). Caus. of dhṛṣṇoti to be daring, to assault cp. Gr. qaρsos audacious, bold, Lat. festus, Goth. gadars=E. dare; Ohg. gitar] to deprive of, to destroy, assault, importune D.I,211; S.III,123; Sn.591; J.III,353; Miln.227; Sdhp.357, 434. Cp. pa°, pari°. (Page 334)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhaṁsin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Sk. dharṣin to dhṛṣṇoti, see dhaṁseti] obtrusive, bold, offensive M.I,236; A.II,182; Dh.244 (=DhA.III,353 paresaṁ guṇaṁ dhaṁsanatāya dh.). (Page 334)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhaṅka: {'def': '[Sk. dhvānkṣa, cp. also dhuṅkṣā] a crow S.I,207; II,258; Sn.271=Nd² 420; J.II,208; V,107, 270; VI,452; Pv III,5² (=kāka PvA.198); VvA.334. (Page 334)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】乌鸦。(p162)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】乌鸦(=kāka)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhenu: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. dhenu, to dhayati to give suck, see dhātī & dhītar] a milch cow, a female animal in general J.I,152 (miga° hind); Vv 80⁶; DhA.I,170; 396; PvA.112. In simile at Vism.313. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】母牛，任何雌性动物。 ~pa, 【阳】牛犊（未断奶的小牛）。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】母牛，任何雌性动物。dhenupa,【阳】牛犊(未断奶的小牛)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhenupa: {'def': '[dhenu+pa from pibati] a suckling calf M.I,79; Sn.26. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dheyya: {'def': '(-°) [Sk. dheya, orig. grd. of dhā, see dahati¹] 1. in the realm of, under the sway or power of: anañña° J.IV,110; kamma° A.IV,285; maccu° (q. v.) S.I,22; Sn.358, 1104; Th.2, 10 (=maccu ettha dhīyati ThA.13); māra° A.IV,228. -- 2. putting on, assigning, in nāma° Dhs.1307. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhi: {'def': '【无】（表示嫌恶，震惊等）咄！呸！（反对演说者时的喊叫）真可耻！没羞！（表示悲痛、懊恼、不幸）唉！咳！呀！(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (f.) [Sk. dhīḥ to didheti, cp. Av. dī to see, Goth. (filu-) deisei cunning. See also dhīra] wisdom, only in Com. expl. of paññā: “dhi vuccati paññā” (exegesis of dhīra) at Nd¹ 44=J.II,140=III,38. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】(表示嫌恶，震惊等)咄！呸！(反对演说者时的喊叫)真可耻！没羞！(表示悲痛、懊恼、不幸)唉！咳！呀！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ & Dhī (indecl.) [Sk. dhik] an exclⁿ of reproach & disgust: fie! shame! woe! (with Acc. or Gen.) S.V,217 (read dhī taṁ for dhītaṁ); Dh.389 (dhī=garahāmi DhA.IV,148); J.I,507; DhA.I,179 (haṁ dhī), 216 (v. l. BB but text has haṁdi). An inorganic r replaces the sandhi-cons. in dhī-r-atthu jīvitaṁ Sn.440; cp. Th.I,1150; dhi-r-atthu jātiyā J.I,59. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhikkata: {'def': '【形】轻视的，厌恶的，辱骂的。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】轻视的，厌恶的，辱骂的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhikkita: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dhikkṛta, of dhi¹+kata] reproached, reviled; used also medially: blaming, censuring, condemning J.I,155 (=garahitā Com.); also in Com. expl. of dhīra (=dhikkita-pāpa detesting evil) at Nd¹ 44=J.II,140=III,38 (cp. dhi²). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhiti: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. dhṛti to dhṛ, see dharati] energy, courage, steadfastness, firm character, resolution. S.I,122, 215 =Sn.188 (cp. SnA 237); J.I,266, 280; III,239; VI,373; Vbh.211; Dhs.13 (+thāma), 22, 289, 571; Miln.23, 329; Sdhp.574. Equivalent to “wisdom” (cp. juti & jutimant & Sk. dhīti) in expl. of dhīra as “dhitisampanna” Nd¹ 44≈(see dhi²); PvA.131. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】精力，勇气。dhitimantu,【形】精力充沛的，坚决的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】精力，勇气。~mantu, 【形】精力充沛的，坚决的。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhitimant: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dhṛtimant; cp. also dhīmant] courageous, firm, resolute A.I,25; Sn.462, 542; Th.I,6; J.II,140; VI,286 (wise, cp. dhiti). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhona: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [either=dhota, Sk. dhauta, see dhovati or=dhuta, see dhuta & dhunana. Quite a diff. suggestion as regards etym. is given by Kern, Toev. 117, who considers it as a possible derⁿ fr. (a)dho, after analogy of poṇa. Very doubtful] 1. purified M.I,386; Sn.351, 786, 813, 834 (=dhutakilesa SnA 542); J.III,160 (°sākha=patthaṭasākha Com.; v. l. BB vena°); Nd¹ 77=176 (: dhonā vuccati paññā etc., dhuta & dhota used indiscriminately in exegesis following). -- 2. (pl.) the four requisites of a bhikkhu DhA.III,344 (: dhonā vuccati cattāro paccayā, in Com. on atidhonacārin Dh.240; gloss K. dhovanā, cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 100). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】明智的。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】明智的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhopana: {'def': '(nt.) [a variant of dhovana, q. v.] 1. ceremonial washing of the bones of the dead D.II,6; aṭṭhi-dhovana Bdhgh at DA.I,84; A.V,216 (see Commentary at 364). ‹-› 2. Surgical washing of a wound J.II,117. -- 3. In vaṁsadhopana, apparently a feat by acrobats J.IV,390. It is possible that the passage at D.II,6 really belongs here. See the note at Dial. I.9. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhopati: {'def': '[a variant of dhovati, taken as Caus. formation] to wash, cleanse D.I,93 (dhopetha, imper.; v. l. B. dhovatḥa), 124 (dhopeyya; v. l. B. dhoveyya). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhorayha: {'def': '【形】能负担的，能驮轭的，【阳】驮畜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】能负担的，能驮轭的，【阳】驮畜。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for *dhor-vayha=Sk. *dhaurvahya, abstr. fr. dhurvaha; may also directly correspond to the latter] “carrying a yoke,” a beast of burden S.I,28; D.III,113 (purisa°); A.I,162.

--vata (nt.) the practice of carrying a burden, the state of a beast of burden, drudgery S.I,28; --sīla accustomed to the yoke, enduring; patient Dh.208 (=dhuravahana-sīlatāya dh. DhA.III,272); --sīlin= °sīla J.II,97 (=dhura-vahanaka-ācārena sampanna Com.). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhoreyya: {'def': '(-°) [Sk. dhaureya, der. fr. dhura] “to be yoked,” accustomed to the yoke, carrying a burden, in kamma° Miln.288. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhota: {'def': '(dhovati 的【过分】)。Dhotodano﹐纯净饭王(古译：斛饭王)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dhovati 的【过分】)。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhāuta, pp. of dhavati², see dhovati] washed, bleached, clean J.I,62 (°saṅkha a bleached shell); II,275; PvA.73 (°vattha), 116 (°hattha with clean hands), 274 (id.); Vism.224 (id.). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhova: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Sk. dhāva, see dhovati] washing, cleansing Bu II.15. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhovana: {'def': '【中】洗涤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dhāvana; see also dhopana] washing Vin.IV,262; S.IV,316 (bhaṇḍa°); A.I,132, 161, 277; It.111 (pādānaṁ); J.II,129; VI,365 (hattha°); Miln.11; Vism.343; PvA.241 (hattha-pāda°); DhA.II,19 (pāda°); fig. (ariyaṁ) A.V,216. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】洗涤。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhovati: {'def': '(dhov洗+a), 洗，冲洗，纯净。【过】dhovi。【过分】dhota。【现分】dhovanta。【义】dhovitabba。【独】dhovitvā, dhoviya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhāvati, see dhāvati] to rinse, wash, cleanse, purify Vin.II,208, 210, 214; Sn.p. 104 (bhājanāni); J.I,8; V,297. -- dhovi J.VI,366; DhA.III,207. ger. dhovitvā J.I,266; IV,2; VvA.33 (pattaṁ), 77 (id.); PvA.75, 144. inf. dhovituṁ Vin.II,120; IV,261 pp. dhota (q. v.) & dhovita J.I,266. -- See also dhopati (*dhopeti). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dhov + a), 洗，冲洗，纯净。【过】 dhovi。【过分】 dhota。【现分】 dhovanta。【潜】 dhovitabba。【无】 dhovitvā, dhoviya。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhuma: {'def': 'in °kaṭacchuka=druma° having a wooden spoon (see duma), cp. Mar. dhumārā? (Ed. in note) DhA.II,59. [Doubtful reading.] (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhunana: {'def': '【中】抖落，摆脱，废除。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】抖落，摆脱，废除。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dhūnana] shaking, in °ka (adj.) consisting in shaking off, doing away with, giving up (kilesa°) SnA 373. (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhunāti: {'def': '(dhu+nā), 投，掷，抖落，摆脱，除去。【过】dhuni。【现分】dhunanta。【义】dhunitabba,【独】dhunitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhunoti (dhūnoti), dhunāti & dhuvati, Caus. dhūnayati. Idg. *dhū to be in turbulent motion; cp. Gr. qu/w, qu/nw (to be impetuous), qu/ella (storm), qu/mos “thyme”; Lat. fūmus (smoke=fume), suffio; Lith. duja (dust); Goth. dauns (smoke & smell); Ohg. toum. Connected also w. dhāvate; see further dhūpa, dhūma, dhūsara, dhona & a secondary root Idg. *dheǔes in dhaṁsati] to shake, toss; to shake off, remove, destroy S.I,156 (maccuno senaṁ); Th.1, 256=Miln.245; dhunāti pāpake dhamme dumapattaṁ va māluto Th.I,2; J.I,11 (v. 48); III,44 (hatthe dhuniṁsu, wrung their hands); Vv 64⁹ (=VvA.278 misprint dhumanti); aor. adhosi [=Sk. adhauṣīt] Sn.787 (micchādiṭṭhiṁ= pajahi SnA 523). pp. dhuta & dhūta (q. v.). Cp. nis°, o°. (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dhu + nā), 投，掷，抖落，摆脱，除去。【过】 dhuni。【现分】 dhunanta。【潜】 dhunitabba, 【无】 dhunitvā。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhura: {'def': '【中】 1. 办公室，职责，费用。 2. 轭。 3. 车辕。 4. 前部。【形】最初的，接近的。 ~gāma, 【阳】附近的村庄。 ~ndhara, 【形】有办公室的，接受职责的。 ~nikkhepa, 【阳】放弃希望，放弃职责。 ~bhatta,【中】经常施食。 ~vahana, 【中】有轭，有办公室。 ~vihāra, 【阳】附近的寺院。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [Sk. dhur f. & dhura m.] 1. a yoke, a pole, the shaft of a carriage J.I,192 (purima-sakaṭa°), 196; Cp. II.8, 4. -- 2. (fig.) a burden, load, charge, office, responsibility Sn.256 (vahanto porisaṁ dh °ṁ “carrying a human yoke”=purisânucchavikā bhārā SnA 299), 694 (asama° one who has to bear a heavy burden=asamaviriya SnA 489); DhA.II,97 (sama°); dve dhurāni two burdens (viz. gantha° & vipassanā, study & contemplation) DhA.I,7; IV,37; asamadhura J.I,193; VI,330. Three dhurā are enum^d at J.IV,242 as saddhā°, sīla°, and paññā°.- Sdhp.355 (saddhā°), 392 (+viriya), 413 (paññā°) dh °ṁ nikkhipati to take off the yoke, to put down a burden, to give up a charge or renounce a responsibility (see °nikkhepa): nikkhittadhura A.I,71; II,148; III,65, 108, 179 sq.; a° S.V,197, 225; Nd² 131; SnA 236 (=dhuravant). -- 3. the forepart of anything, head, top, front; fig. chief, leader, leading part. nāvāya dh. the forecastle of a ship J.III,127=IV.142; dh-vāta head wind J.I,100; ekaṁ dh °ṁ nīharati to set aside a foremost part DA.I,135. ‹-› 4. the far end, either as top or beginning J.III,216 (yāva dh-sopānā); IV,265 (dh-sopānaṁ katvā making the staircase end); V,458 (magga-dhure ṭhatvā standing on the far end or other side of the road, i. e. opposite; gloss BB maggantare); VvA.44 (dh-gehassa dvāre at the door of the top house of the village, i. e. the first or last house).

--gāma a neighbouring village (lit. the first v. that one meets) J.I,8, 237; IV,243; DhA.III,414; --dhorayha a yoked ox S.I,173=Sn.79 (viriyam me dh-dh °ṁ); SnA 150. --nikkhepa the putting down of the yoke, the giving up of one’s office J.III,243; Vism.413. --bhatta a meal where a monk is invited as leader of other monks who likewise take part in it J.I,449. v. l. (for dhuva°); III,97 (v. l. dhuva°); Vism.66. --yotta yoke-tie, i. e. the tie fastening the yoke to the neck of the ox J.I,192; VI,253; --vahana bearing a burden (cp. dhorayha) DhA.III,472; --vihāra a neighbouring monastery (cp. °gāma) J.I,23; IV,243; DhA.I,126 (Np.); III,224 (id.); --sampaggāha “a solid grip of the burden” (Mrs. Rh.D.) Dhs.13, 22 etc. (opp. nikkhepa); --ssaha enduring one’s yoke Th.1, 659. Cp. dhuratā. (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.办公室，职责，费用。2.轭、槅。3.车辕。4.前部。【形】最初的，接近的。dhuragāma,【阳】附近的村庄。dhurandhara,【形】有办公室的，接受职责的。dhuranikkhepa,【阳】放弃希望，放弃职责。dhurabhatta,【中】经常施食。dhuravahana,【中】有轭，有办公室。dhuravihāra,【阳】附近的寺院。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhuratā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. dhura] in cpd. anikkhitta-dh. “a state of unflinching endurance” Nd² 394, 405=Dhs.13 etc.=Vbh.350, 370 (+dhura-sampaggāha); opp. nikkhitta-dh. weakness of character, lack of endurance (=pamāda) ibid. (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhuravant: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. dhuradhara] one who has or bears his yoke, patient, enduring S.I,214=Sn.187 (: cetasikaviriya-vasena anikkhittadhura SnA 236). (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhuta: {'def': 'dhūta (dhunāti 的【过分】), 已抖落，已摆脱，已撤走。 ~aṅga, 【中】头陀支，苦行支。 ~dhara, 【形、中】修持头陀支者，苦行者。 ~vādī, 【阳】人教授头陀支的人。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'dhūta (dhunāti 的【过分】), 已抖落，已摆脱，已撤走。dhutaṅga ,【中】头陀支，苦行支。dhutadhara,【形、中】修持头陀支者，苦行者。dhutavādī,【阳】人教授头陀支的人。《清净道论》Vism.59︰十三头陀支。即(一)粪扫衣支，(二)三衣支，(三)常乞食支，(四)次第乞食支，(五)一座食支，(六)一鉢食支，(七)时后不食支，(八)阿练若住支，(九)树下住支，(十)露地住支，(十一)塚间住支，(十二)随处住支，(十三)常坐不卧支。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& Dhūta) [cp. Sk. dhuta & dhūta, pp. of dhunāti] 1. shaken, moved Dāvs.V,49 (vāta°). -- 2. lit. “shaken off,” but always expl^d in the commentaries as “one who shakes off” either cvil dispositions (kilese), or obstacles to spiritual progress (vāra, nīvaraṇa). The word is rare. In one constantly repeated passage (Vin.I,45=305=II.2=III,21=IV.213) it is an adj. opposed to kosajja lazy, remiss; and means either scrupulous or punctilious. At D.I,5 it is used of a pain. At Sn.385 we are told of a dhutadhamma, meaning a scrupulous way of life, first for a bhikkhu, then for a layman. This poem omits all higher doctrine and confines itself to scrupulousness as regards minor, elementary matters. Cp. Vism.61 for a defⁿ of dhuta.

--aṅga a set of practices leading to the state of or appropriate to a dhuta, that is to a scrupulous person First occurs in a title suffixed to a passage in the Parivāra deprecating such practices. The passage occurs twice (Vin.V,131, 193), but the title, probably later than the text, is added only to the 2nd of the two. The passage gives a list of 13 such practices, each of them an ascetic practice not enjoined in the Vinaya. The 13 are also discussed at Vism.59 sq. The Milinda devotes a whole book (chap. VI,) to the glorification of these 13 dhutaṅgas, but there is no evidence that they were ever widely adopted. Some are deprecated at M.I,282, & examples of one or other of them are given at Vin.III,15; Bu I.59; J.III,342; IV,8; Miln.133, 348, 351; Vism.59 (°kathā), 65 (°cora), 72 (id.), 80 (defⁿ); SnA 494; DhA.I,68; II,32 (dhūtaṅga); IV,30. Nd¹ 188 says that 8 of them are desirable. --dhara mindful of punctiliousness Miln.342 (āraññaka dh. jhāyin). --vata the vow to perform the dhutaṅgas DhA VI,165. --vāda one who inculcates punctiliousness S.II,156; A.I,23; Miln.380; Vism.80; ThA.69; DhA.II,30. --vādin= °vāda J.I,130. (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhutatta: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. *dhūtatvaṁ] the state of being punctilious Vin.I,305 (of going naked). (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhutaṅga: {'def': '头陀支;头陀行', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Dhutta: {'def': 'Dhuttaka(Sk. dhūrta, dhūrtaka,from dhūrvati & dhvarati to injure, deceive),【阳】沉湎，过著堕落生活的人，恶棍，狡猾，奸狡，骗子(of abandoned life, wild, fast, cunning, crafty, fraudulent; wicked, bad. (m.) a rogue, cheat, evil-minded person, scoundrel, rascal)。Sn.v.106.︰“Itthidhutto surādhutto, akkhadhutto ca yo naro; Laddhaṁ laddhaṁ vināseti, taṁ parābhavato mukhaṁ”.(这种好色、嗜酒、好赌的人，将所得挥霍一空，是毁灭的原因。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhūrta, from dhūrvati & dhvarati to injure, deceive, cp. Lat. fraus; Idg. *dhreu, an enlarged form of which is *dreugh in Sk. druhyati, drugdha=Ohg. triogan, troum etc.: see duhana] of abandoned life, wild, fast, cunning, crafty, fraudulent; wicked, bad. (m.) a rogue, cheat, evil-minded person, scoundrel, rascal. There are three sorts of a wild life, viz. akkha° in gambling, itthi° with women, surā° in drink (Sn.106; J.IV,255). -- Vin.II,277 (robber, highwayman); A.III,38 (a°); IV,288 (itthi°); J.I,49 (surā°), 290, 291; II,416; III,287; IV,223, 494 (surā°); ThA.250 (itthi°), 260 (°purisa), 266 (°kilesa); PvA.3, 5 (itthi°, surā°), 151. ‹-› f. dhutti (dhuttī) J.II,114 (°brāhmaṇī). (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'dhuttaka, 【阳】过着堕落生活的人，恶棍，骗子。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhuttaka: {'def': '=dhutta S.I,131; Th.2, 366 (=itthi-dhutta ThA.250); DhA.III,207; Dpvs IX.19. -- f. dhuttikā always in combⁿ w. chinnikā (meretrix, q. v.) Vin.III,128; J.II,114; Miln.122. (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhuttī: {'def': 'dhuttikā, 上方的【阴】。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'dhuttikā,【阴】上方的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhuva: {'def': '【形】稳定的，长备的，经常的，不变的。 ~vaŋ, 【副】经常地，不变地。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dhruva, cp. Lith. drúta firm; Goth. triggws=Ohg. triuwi (Ger. treue, trost); Ags. tréowe= E. true, of Idg. *dheru, enlarged form of *dher, see dharati] stable, constant, permanent; fixed, regular, certain, sure D.I,18; S.I,142; IV,370; A.II,33; J.I,19; V,121 (°sassataṁ maraṇaṁ); III,325; Bu II.82;Miln.114 (na tā nadiyo dh-salilā). 334 (°phala); Vism.77; DA.I,112 (maraṇaṁ apassanto dh.), 150 (=thāvara); DhA.III,170 (adhuvaṁ jīvitaṁ dhuvaṁ maraṇaṁ); ThA.241; Sdhp.331. -- nt. permanence, stability M.I,326; Dh.147. Also Ep. of Nibbāna (see °gāmin). -- nt. as adv. dhuvaṁ continuously, constantly, always J.II,24=Miln.172; PvA.207; certainly J.I,18, V.103. -- adhuva (addhuva) changing, unstable, impermanent D.I,19 (anicca a. appāyuka); M.I,326; S.IV,302; J.I,393; III,19 (addhuva-sīla); VvA.77.

--gāmin leading to permanence, i. e. Nibbāna S.IV,370 (magga); --colā (f.) constantly dressed, of a woman Vin.III,129; --ṭṭhāniya lasting (of shoes) Vin.I,190; --dhamma one who has reached a stable condition DhA.III,289; --paññatta (a) permanently appointed (seat) Vin.IV,274; --bhatta a constant supply of food Vin.I,25, 243; II,15 (°ika); J.I,449 (where the v. l. dhura° seems to be preferable instead of dhuva°, see dhurabhatta); cp. niccabhatta; --yāgu constant (distribution of) ricegruel Vin.I,292 sq.; --lohitā (f.) a woman whose blood is stagnant Vin.III,129; --ssava always discharging, constantly flowing J.I,6, V.35. (Page 342)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】稳定的，长久的，经常的，不变的。dhuvaṁ,【副】经常地，不变地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhāna: {'def': '-dhāna, (Sk. dhāna, to dadhāti; cp. dhātu),【形】1.持拿，包括(holding, containing),【中】(a receptacle). f. dhānī a seat (=ṭhāna), in rāja° “the king’s seat,” a royal town. Often in comb with gāma & nigama (see gāma 3 a): Vin.III,89; J.VI,397; Pv.II,1318.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Sk. dhāna, to dadhāti; cp. dhātu] (adj.) holding, containing (-°) M.I,11 (ahi kaṇṭaka°; cp. ādhāna & kaṇṭaka). -- (n.) nt. a receptacle Dh.58 (saṅkāra° dust-heap=ṭhāna DhA.I,445). f. dhānī a seat (=ṭhāna), in rāja° “the king’s seat,” a royal town. Often in comb with gāma & nigama (see gāma 3 a): Vin.III,89; J.VI,397; Pv.II,13¹⁸. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāniya: {'def': '-dhāniya, (Sk. dhānya, cp. dhañña2),【形】财富(wealthy, rich, abundant in)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dhānya, cp. dhañña²] wealthy, rich, abundant in (-°) J.III,367 (pahūtadhana°; v. l. BB °dhāritaṁ); (nt.) riches, wealth J.V,99, 100. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāra: {'def': 'dhāraka, dhārī, 【形】 (在【合】中) 怀有的，持有的，穿着的，戴着的。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'dhāraka, dhārī(Sk. dhāra to dhāreti; cp. dhara),【形】(在【合】中) 怀有的，持有的，穿著的，戴著的(bearing, holding, having)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [Sk. dhāra to dhāreti; cp. dhara] bearing, holding, having D.I,74 (udaka-rahado sītavāri°); M I.281 (ubhato°) Sn.336 (ukkā°); It.101 (antimadeha°), 108 (ukkā°). See also dhārin. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāraka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) 1. bearing, one who holds or possesses DhA.III,93 (sampattiṁ). -- 2. one who knows or remembers A.II,97 (°jātika); IV,296 sq., 328 (id.). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dhāra-ka)﹐【阳】受持者。dhāraka jātika﹐有受持的性质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhāraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. dhāraṇa, to dhāreti] 1. wearing, in mālā° (etc.) D.I,5=A.II,210=Pug.58; KhA 37; cīvara° A.II,104=Pug.45. -- 2. maintaining, sustaining, keeping up Miln.320 (āyu° bhojana). -- 3. bearing in mind, remembrance Vin.IV,305; M.II,175 (dhamma°). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【中】受持，忆持。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhāraṇaka: {'def': '[der. fr. dhāraṇa] 1. a debtor (see dhāreti 4) J.II,203; IV,45. -- 2. a mnemonician Miln.79. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【中】忆持者，债务者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhāraṇatā: {'def': '(f.) 1. wearing, being dressed with (=dhāraṇa 1) Miln.257. -- 2. mindfulness (=dhāraṇa 3) Nd² 628= Dhs.14. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāraṇā: {'def': '﹐【阴】忆持，大池。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [to dhāraṇa] 1. memory Miln.79. -- 2. the earth (“the upholder,” cp. dharaṇī) J.VI,180. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāretar: {'def': '[n. ag. to dhāreti 3] one who causes others to remember, an instructor, teacher (cp. dhāraṇaka) A.IV,196 (sotā sāvetā uggahetā dh.). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāreti: {'def': '(dhar+e), 忍受，支撑，穿著，戴著。【过】dhāresi。【过分】dhārita。【现分】dhārenta 【独】dhāretvā。dhāreyya, 3s.opt.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dhar + e), 忍受，支撑，穿着，戴着。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 dhārita。【现分】 dhārenta 【无】 dhāretvā。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of dharati, q. v. for etym.] to hold, viz. 1. to carry, bear, wear, possess; to put on, to bring, give D.I,166≈(chavadussāni etc.); Vin.I,16=D.I,110≈ (telapajjotaṁ); D.II,19 (chattaṁ to hold a sunshade over a person); PvA.47 (id.); dehaṁ dh. to “wear,” i. e. to have a body It.50, 53 (antimaṁ d.); J.IV,3 (padumaṁ); VI,136; Pv.I,3¹ (vaṇṇaṁ dh.=vahasi PvA.14); tassa kahāpaṇaṁ daṇḍaṁ dh. “to inflict a fine of a k. on him” Miln.171. -- 2. to hold back, restrain Vin.IV,261 (kathaṁ dhāretha how do you suppress or conceal pregnancy?); Dh.222 (kodhaṁ). -- 3. to bear in mind, know by heart, understand: dhammaṁ to know the Dhamma A.III,176; tipiṭakaṁ buddhavacanaṁ to know the 3 Piṭakas Miln.18. -- D.II,2; Pug.41 (suṇāti, bhaṇati, dh.=remember). Cp. upadhāreti. -- With double Acc.: to receive as, to take=believe, to take for, consider as, call: upāsakaṁ maṁ dhāretu Bhagavā “call me your disciple” Vin.I,16 & passim; atthajālan ti pi naṁ dhārehi (call it . . .) D.I,46; yathā pañhaṁ Bhagavā vyākaroti tathā naṁ dhareyyāsi (believe it) D.I,222; yathā no (atthaṁ) Gotamo vyākarissati tathā naṁ dhāressāma D.I,236; evaṁ maṁ dhārehi adhimuttacittaṁ (consider as) Sn.1149 (=upalakkhehi Nd² 323). -- 4. to admit, allow, allow for, take up, support (a cause); to give, to owe D.I,125 (may allow), 126; A.II,69 (na kassa kiñci dh. pays no tribute); Miln.47 (atthaṁ). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāretu: {'def': '【阳】受持者，持有人，所有者，穿著者，顶戴者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】持有人，所有者，穿着者，戴着者。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhāreyya: {'def': '(nt.) [orig. grd. of dhāreti] the ceremony of being carried away, i. e. the marriage ceremony, marriage (cp. dhareyya under dharati) Th.2, 472 (text has vāreyya, but ThA, 285 explains dhāreyya=vivāha). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhārin: {'def': '(adj. --°) [Sk. dhārin, see dhāreti & cp. °dhara, °dhāra] holding, wearing, keeping; often in phrase antimadeha° “wearing the last body” (of an Arahant) S.I,14; Sn.471; It.32, 40. -- J.I,47 (virūpa-vesa°); Dāvs.V,15. -- f. °inī Pv.I,10⁸ (kāsikuttama°). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhārā: {'def': '【阴】1.奔流，水流，阵雨。2.武器的利刃(日语：剑叶)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 1. 奔流，水流，阵雨。 2. 武器的利刃。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (f.) [Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 2.] the edge of a weapon J.I,455; VI,449; DhA 317; DA.I,37. -- (adj.) (-°) having a (sharp) edge J.I,414 (khura°) Miln.105 (sukhuma°); ekato°-ubhato° single- & double-edged J.I,73 (asi); IV,12 (sattha). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 1] torrent, stream, flow, shower D.I,74 (sammā° an even or seasonable shower; DA.I,218=vuṭṭhi); II,15 (udakassa, streams); J.I,31; Ps.I,125 (udaka°); Pv.II,9⁷⁰ (sammā°); VvA.4 (hingulika°); PvA.139; DhA.IV,15 (assu°); Sdhp.595 (vassa°). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāta: {'def': '[Sk. *dhāyita of dhayati to suck, nourish, pp. dhīta] fed, satiated; satisfied, appeased Vin.I,222; J.I,185; II,247, 446; V,73; VI,555; Pv.I,11⁸ (so read for dāta)=PvA.59 (: suhita titta); Miln.238, 249. -- f. abstr. dhātatā satiation, fulness, satisfaction, in ati° J.II,293. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已饱，已喂养，已满足。atidhāta,【过分】太饱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已喂养，已满足。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhātar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. dhṛ] upholder J.V,225. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhātu: {'def': '(Sk. dhātu to dadhāti),【阴】元素，天然的情况，舍利(神圣的遗物)，词根，身体的体液，官能。Dhātukathā,【阴】《界论》。dhātukusala,【中】对元素熟练。dhātughara,【中】舍利室。dhātunānatta,【中】自然或元素的各式个样。dhātuvibhāga,【阳】元素的区分，分配舍利。Aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo：cakkhudhātu, rūpadhātu, cakkhuviññāṇadhātu, sotadhātu, saddadhātu, sotaviññāṇadhātu, ghānadhātu, gandhadhātu, ghānaviññāṇadhātu, jivhādhātu, rasadhātu, jivhāviññāṇadhātu, kāyadhātu, phoṭṭhabbadhātu, kāyaviññāṇadhātu, manodhātu, dhammadhātu, manoviññāṇadhātu.(十八界︰眼界、色界、眼识界、耳界、声界、耳识界、鼻界、香界、鼻识界、舌界、味界、舌识界、身界、触界、身识界、意界、法界、意识界。) dhātuso, Abl.从界(according to one’s nature)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. dhātu to dadhāti, Idg. *dhē, cp. Gr. ti/qhmi, a]nά--qhma, Sk. dhāman, dhāṭr (=Lat. conditor); Goth. gadēds; Ohg. tāt, tuom (in meaning --°=dhātu, cp. E. serf-dom “condition of . . .”) tuon=E. to do; & with k-suffix Lat. facio, Gr. (e)/)qhk(a), Sk. dhāka; see also dhamma] element. Closely related to dhamma in meaning B 1^b, only implying a closer relation to physical substance. As to its Gen. connotation cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 198. -- 1. a primary element, of which the usual set comprises the four paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind), otherwise termed cattāro mahābhūtā(ni): D.I,215; II,294; III,228; S.I,15; II,169 sq., 224; IV,175, 195; A.II,165; III,243; Vbh.14, 72; Nett 73. See discussed at Cpd. 254 sq. -- A defⁿ of dhātu is to be found at Vism.485. -- Singly or in other comb^ns paṭhavī° S.II,174; tejo° S.I,144; D.III,227; the four plus ākāsa S.III,227, plus viññāna S.II,248; III,231; see below 2 b. -- 2. (a) natural condition, property, disposition; factor, item, principle, form. In this meaning in var. comb^ns & applications, esp. closely related to khandha. Thus mentioned with khandha & āyatana (sensory element & element of sense-perception) as bodily or physical element, factor (see khandha B 1 d & cp. Nd² under dhātu) Th.2, 472. As such (physical substratum) it constitutes one of the lokā or forms of being (khandha° dhātu° āyatana° Nd² 550). Freq. also in combⁿ kāma-dhātu, rūpa° arūpa° “the elements or properties of k. etc.” as preceding & conditioning bhava in the respective category (Nd² s. v.). See under d. -- As “set of conditions or state of being (-°)” in the foll.: loka° a world, of which 10 are usually mentioned (equalling 10,000: PvA.138) S.I,26; V,424; Pv.II,9⁶¹; Vbh.336; PvA.138; KS.II,101, n. 1; -- nibbāna° the state of N. S.V,8; A.II,120; IV,202; J.I,55; It.38 (dve: see under Nibbāna); Miln.312. Also in the foll. connections: amata° It.62; bhū° the verbal root bhū DA.I,229; ṭhapitāya dhātuyā “while the bodily element, i. e. vitality lasts” Miln.125; vaṇṇa° form, beauty S.I,131; Pv.I,3¹. In these cases it is so far weakened in meaning, that it simply corresponds to E. abstr. suffix --hood or --ity (cp. °hood=origin. “form”: see ketu), so perhaps in Nibbāna°=Nibbāna-dom. Cp. dhātuka. -- (b) elements in sense-consciousness: referring to the 6 ajjhattikāni & 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni S.II,140 sq. Of these sep. sota° D.I,79; III,38; Vbh.334; dibbasota° S.II,121, 212; V,265, 304; A.I,255; III,17, 280; V,199; cakkhu° Vbh.71 sq.; mano° Vbh.175, 182, 301; mano-viññāṇa° Vbh.87, 89, 175, 182 sq. ‹-› (c) various: aneka° A.I,22; III,325; V,33; akusala° Vbh.363; avijjā° S.II,132; ābhā° S.II,150; ārambha° S.V,66, 104 sq.; A.I,4; II,338; ṭhiti° S.II,175; III,231; A.III,338; dhamma° S.II,56; nekkhamma° S.II,151; A.III,447; nissāraṇiyā dhātuyo (5) D.III,239; A.III,245, 290. See further S.I,134, 196; II,153, 248 (aniccā); III,231 (nirodha); IV,67; A.I,176; II,164; IV,385; Dhs.58, 67, 121; Nett 57, 64 sq.; ThA.20, 49, 285, -- (d) Different sets and enumerations: as 3 under kāma°, rūpa°, arūpa A.I,223; III,447; Ps.I,137; Vbh.86, 363, 404 sq.; under rūpa°, arūpa°, nirodha° It.45. -- as 6 (pathavī etc.+ākāsa° & viññāṇa°): D.III,247; A.I,175 sq.; M.III,31, 62, 240; Ps.I,136; Vbh.82 sq. -- as 7 (ābhā subha etc.): S.II,150. -- 18: Ps.I,101, 137; II,230, Dhs.1333; Vbh.87 sq., 401 sq.; Vism.484 sq. -- 3. a humour or affection of the body DA.I,253 (dhātusamatā). -- 4. the remains of the body after cremation PvA.76; a relic VvA.165 (sarīra°, bodily relic); Dāvs.V,3 (dasana° the toothrelic). -- Abl. dhātuso according to one’s nature S.II,154 sq. (sattā sattehi saddhiṁ saṁsandanti etc.); It.70 (id.); S.III,65.

--kathā N. of 3^rd book of the Abhidhamma Vism.96. --kucchi womb Miln.176; --kusala skilled in the elements M.III,62; °kusalatā proficiency in the (18) elements D.III,212; Dhs.1333; --ghara “house for a relic,” a dagoba SnA 194. --cetiya a shrine over a relic DhA.III,29; --nānatta diversity of specific experience D.III,289; S.II,143; IV,113 sq., 284; --vibhāga distribution of relics VvA.297; PvA.212. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】元素，天然的情况，舍利（神圣的遗物），词根，身体的体液，官能。 ~kathā, 【阴】元素的解说，（《论藏》的第三本书）〈界论〉。~kusala, 【中】对元素熟练。 ~ghara, 【中】舍利室。 ~nānatta, 【中】自然或元素的各式个样。 ~vibhāga, 【阳】元素的区分，分配舍利。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '界(元素)(要素)(地水风火)[PS:四界差别 catu dhātuvavatthāna (tuvavatthāna 确定;评定;安立;决定;差别)]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Dhātuka: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 有…性质的。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (only --°) having the nature, by nature, affected with, --like (cp. °dhamma B 2^a); often simply= first part of cpd. (cp. E. friend-like=friendly=friend) J.I,438 (kiliṭṭha° miserable), II.31 (sama°), 63 (badhira° deaf), 102 (paṇḍuroga° having jaundice), 114 (dhuttika°); IV,137 (vāmanaka° deformed), 391 (muddhā°); V,197 (āvāṭa°); DhA.I,89 (anattamana°). (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 有…性质的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhātukathā: {'def': 'f. 界論 [七論の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 界論 [七論之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【阴】《界论》，巴利论藏的第三本书，阐述蕴、处、界诸法之摄不摄及相应不相应之关系。内容共分十四品，首揭十四品之名目和五蕴、十二处、十八界等二十八种论母，次入十四品本文，包括摄类五品、相应类五品及摄、相应组合类四品，共703条问答分别。(《中华佛教百科全书(六)》p.3253.1))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhātura: {'def': '(adj. --°) [=*dhātuya] in cha° consisting of six elements (purisa) M.III,239 (where āpodhātu omitted by mistake). See dhātu 2 c. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhātī: {'def': '【阴】护士，养母。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】护士(nurse)，养母。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. dhātrī=Gr. tiqήnh wet nurse, to dhayati suck, suckle; Idg. *dhēi as in Gr. qh_sqai to milk, qh_lus feeding, qhlή female breast; cp. Lat. felare, femina (“giving suck”), filius (“suckling”); Oir. dīnu lamb; Goth. daddjan; Ohg. tila breast. See also dadhi, dhītā, dhenu] wet nurse, fostermother D.II,19; M.I,395; II,97; J.I,57; III,391; PvA.16, 176. In cpds. dhāti°, viz. --cela swaddling cloth, baby’s napkin S.I,205= J.III,309. (Page 340)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāva: {'def': '[Sk. dhāva] running, racing M.I,446. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāvana: {'def': '【中】奔跑。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】奔跑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dhāvana] running, galloping J.II,431; Miln.351. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāvati: {'def': '(dhāv + a), 跑，跑掉（逃走）。【过】 dhāvi。【过分】 dhāvita。【现分】 dhāvanta。【无】 dhāviya, dhāvitvā。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhāvati & dhāvate: 1. to flow, run etc.; cp. Gr. qέw (both meanings); Ags. déaw=E. dew; Ohg. tou=Ger. tau; cp. also dhārā & dhunāti. -- 2. to clean (by running water) etc.=P. dhovati, q. v.] 1. to run, run away, run quickly Sn.939 (cp. Nd¹ 419); Dh.344; J.I,308; VI,332; Nd¹ 405=Nd² 304^III,; Pv IV.16¹ =palāyati PvA.284¹; DhA.I,389 (opp. gacchati); PvA.4; Sdhp.378. -- 2. to clean etc.: see dhovati; cp. dhavala & dhārā². (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dhāv跑+a), 跑，跑掉(逃走)。【过】dhāvi。【过分】dhāvita。【现分】dhāvanta。【独】dhāviya, dhāvitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhāvin: {'def': 'see pa°. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhāvī: {'def': '【形】跑的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】跑的人。(p164)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhī: {'def': '【阴】智慧(=paññā)，厌恶(=jigucchana)。dhīmantu,【形】明智的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】智能。 ~mantu, 【形】明智的。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhīna: {'def': 'see adhīna. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhīra: {'def': '【形】明智的，明智者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [combining in meaning 1. Sk. dhīra “firm” fr. dhārayati (see dharati & dhiti); 2. Vedic. dhīra “wise” fr. dīdheti (see dhi²). The fluctuation of connotation is also scen in the expl^s of Com^s which always give the foll. three conventional etymologies, viz. dhikkitapāpa, dhiti-sampanna, dhiyā (=paññāya) samannāgata Nd¹44≈(see dhi²)] constant, firm, self-relying, of character; wise, possessing the knowledge of the Dhamma, often=paṇḍita & Ep. of an Arahant D.II,128; S.I,24 (lokapariyāyaṁ aññāya nibbutā dh.), 122, 221; Sn.45, 235 (nibbanti dhīrā), 913 (vippamutto diṭṭhigatehi dh.), 1052; It.68 (°upasevanā, opp. bāla), 122 (dh. sabbaganthapamocano); Dh.23, 28, 177 (opp. bāla); Th.1, 4; 2, 7 (dhammā=tejussadehi ariyamag‹-› gadhammehi ThA.13); J.III,396; V,116; Pv.II,1⁶; II,9⁴⁵; Nd¹ 44, 55, 482; Nd² 324 (=jutimant); Miln.342; KhA 194, 224, 230; DhA.III,189 (=paṇḍita). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】明智的，明智者。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhītalikā: {'def': '【阴】娃娃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Dimin. of dhītā; cp. dhītikā & potthalikā] a doll Vin.III,36, 126 (dāru°); DhsA.321; PvA.16. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】娃娃。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhītar: {'def': 'and Dhītā (f.) [Sk. dhītā, orig. pp. of dhayati to suck (cp. Lat. filia): see dhāta & dhātī, inflūenced in inflection by Sk. duhitṛ, although etymologically different] daughter Th.2, 336 (in faith); J.I,152, 253; VI,366; Pv.I,11⁵; DhA.III,171, 176; PvA.16, 21, 61, 105. deva° a female deva (see deva) VvA.137 etc.; nattu° a granddaughter PvA.17; mātula° a niece PvA.55; rāja° a princess J.I,207; PvA.74. In compⁿ dhītu.

--kkama one who is desirous of a daughter J.VI,307 (=dhītu atthāya vicarati Com.; v. l. dhītu-kāma); --dhītā granddaughter PvA.16. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhītikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. dhītalikā] a doll Th.2, 374 (=dhītalikā ThA.252). (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhītu: {'def': '【阴】女儿。 ~pati, 【阳】女婿。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dhītar),【阴】女儿。dhītā,【3.单.主】。dhītaro,【3.复.主】。puttassa dhītaraṁ, 孙女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhītupati: {'def': '【阳】女婿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhīvara: {'def': '【阳】渔夫。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】渔夫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhīyati: {'def': '[Sk. dhīyate, Pass. to dahati¹] to be contained ThA.13 (so read for dhiyati); PvA.71. (Page 341)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dhā + i + ya), 被生。【过】 dhīyi。【现分】 dhīyamāna。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dhā+i+ya), 被生。【过】dhīyi。【现分】dhīyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhūli: {'def': '【阴】灰尘。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】灰尘。台语：土沙粉thoo5 sua hun2，扬(霙)埃ing ia。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhūma: {'def': '[Vedic dhūma=Lat. fumus; Gr. qumόs (mood, mind), qumiάw (fumigate); Ohg. toum etc. Idg. *dhu, cp. Gr. qu/w (burn incense), qu/os (incense). See also dhunāti] smoke, fumes Vin.I,204 (aroma of drugs); M.I,220 (dh °ṁ kattā); A.V,352 (id.); A.II,53; IV,72 sq.; V,347 sq.; J.III,401, 422 (tumhākaṁ dh-kāle at the time when you will end in smoke, i. e. at your cremation); DhA.I,370 (eka° one mass of smoke); VvA.173 (for dhūpa, in gandhapuppha°); PvA.230 (micchā-vitakka° in expl. of vidhūma).

--andha blind with smoke J.I,216; --kālika (cp. above dh.-kāle) lasting till a person’s cremation Vin.II,172, 288; --ketu fire (lit. whose sign is smoke) J.IV,26; V,63; --jāla a mass of smoke J.V,497; --netta a smoke-tube, i. e. a surgical instrument for sniffing up the smoke of medical drugs Vin.I,204; II,120; J.IV,363; ThA.14; --sikhā fire (Ep. of Agni; lit. smoke-crested) Vv 35² (sikha)=VvA.161; Vism.416; also as sikhin J.VI,206. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】烟，臭气。 ~ketu, 【阳】慧星，火。 ~jāla, 【中】烟网（大量的烟）。 ~netta, 【中】烟囱，烟斗，烟袋，烟嘴。 ~sikha, 【阳】火。~māyitatta, 【中】黑暗化，乌云密布，成为似烟的。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】烟，臭气。dhūmaketu,【阳】慧星，火。dhūmajāla,【中】烟网(大量的烟)。dhūmanetta,【中】烟囱，烟斗，烟袋，烟嘴。dhūmasikha,【阳】火。dhūmāyitatta,【中】黑暗化，乌云密布，成为似烟的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dhūmāyanā: {'def': '(f.) smoking, smouldering M.I,143; Nett 24 (as v. l. to dhūpāyanā). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhūmāyati: {'def': '(dhūma 的【派】), 吸烟，发烟燃烧，乌云密布。【过】dhūmāyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dhūma 的【派】), 吸烟，发烟燃烧，乌云密布。【过】 ~māyi。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Dhūmayati [Sk. dhūmayati, denom. fr. dhūma] to smoke, to smoulder, choke; to be obscured, to cloud over M.I,142 (v. l. dhūpāyati); Pv.I,6⁴ (pariḍayhati+dh. hadayaṁ); DhA.I,425 (akkhīni me dh.= I see almost nothing). pp. dhūmāyita. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhūmāyitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. to dhūmāyati] becoming like smoke, clouding over, obscuration S.III,124 (+timirāyitattaṁ). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhūpa: {'def': '【阳】熏香(incense)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】熏香。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dhūpa of Idg. *dhūp, enlarged fr. *dhū in dhunāti (q. v.)] incense J.I,51, 64, 290 (gandha°, dvandva, cpd.); III,144; VI,42; PvA.141 (gandhap̄uppha°). dh°ṁ dadāti to incense (a room) J.I,399. Sometimes misspelt dhūma, e. g. VvA.173 (gandhapuppha°). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhūpana: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dhūpana] incensing, fumigation; perfume, incense, spice J.III,144; IV,236; Pv III,5³ (sāsapa°). (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1.熏，香熏。2.调味料，(咖哩的)调料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1. 烟熏，香熏。 2. 调味料，（咖哩的）调料。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhūpeti: {'def': '(dhūp+e), 以油滋味，以油调味，燻制，使发香。【过】dhūpesi。【过分】dhūpita。【独】dhūpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dhūp + e), 以油滋味，以油调味，熏制，使发香。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【无】 dhūpetvā。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhūpita: {'def': '[pp. of dhūpāyati] fumigated, flavoured Vv 43⁵ (tela° flavoured with oil). Cp. pa°. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhūpāyati: {'def': '(dhūpa 的【派】) 出烟，燻制。【过】dhūpāyi。【现分】dhūpāyanta。【过分】dhūpāyita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dhūpa 的【派】) 出烟，熏制。【过】 dhūpāyi。【现分】 dhūpāyanta。【过分】 ~yita。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Dhūpayati [Sk. dhūpayati; caus. fr. dhūpa] to fumigate, make fragrant, perfume Vin.I,180; S.I,40 (dhūpāyita)=Th.1, 448; A.II,214 sq.; J.I,73; Miln.333 (sīlagandhena lokaṁ dh.); DhA.I,370 (aor. dhūpāyi); III,38 (ppr. dhūpayamāna). -- pp. dhūpita. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dhūsara: {'def': '【形】灰褐色的，微黄色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dhūsara, Ags. dust=E. dust & dusk, Ger. dust; see dhvaṁsati & dhunoti & cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under furo] dust-coloured VvA.335. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】灰褐色的，微黄色的。(p165)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dhūta: {'def': '& Dhūtaṅga see dhuta. (Page 343)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dibba: {'def': '【形】天神的，天国的。dibbacakkhu,【中】天眼(「称为天眼是被生起充满光的智慧--这是得天眼清净。」(Dibbacakkhu nāma ālokapharaṇena uppannaṁ ñāṇaṁ, yaṁ--“dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā”ti (pārā.13 ma.ni.2.341) āgataṁ.(SA.CS:p.3.1.)。dibbacakkhuka,【形】有超人的眼睛的。dibbavihāra,【阳】天居(心的至高情况)。dibbasampatti,【阴】天上的福佑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Ved. divya=P. divya in verse (q. v.), Gr. dίos (*divios), Lat. dīus (*divios)=divine. Cp. deva] of the next world, divine, heavenly, celestial, superb, magnificent, fit for exalted beings higher than man (devas, heroes, manes etc.), superhuman, opp. mānusaka human. Freq. qualifying the foll. “summa bona”: cakkhu the deva-eye, i. e. the faculty of clairvoyance, attr. in a marked degree to the Buddha & other perfect beings (see cakkhumant) D.I,82, 162; II,20 (yena sudaṁ samantā yojanaṁ passati divā c’eva rattiñ ca); III,219; S.I,196; II,55 sq.; M.II,21; It.52; Th.2, 70; Ps.I,114; II,175; Vism.434; Sdhp.482; PvA.5 (of Moggallāna); Tikp 278; Dukp 54. sota the d. ear, matching the d. eye D.I,79, 154; J.V,456; also as sotadhātu A.I,255; M.II,19; D.III,38, 281; Vism.430. rūpa D.I,153. Āyu, vaṇṇa etc. (see dasa ṭhānāni) A.I,115; III,33; IV,242; PvA.9, 89. kāmā Sn.361; Dh.187; It.94; also as kāmaguṇā A.V,273. Of food, drink, dress & other commodities: A.I,182; J.I,50, 202; III,189; PvA.23, 50, 70, 76 etc. ‹-› Def. as devaloke sambhūta DA.I,120; divibhavattā dibba KhA 227; divibhāvaṁ devattabhāva-pariyāpanna PvA.14. -- See further e. g. S.I,105; D.III,146; Sn.176, 641; Dh.236, 417; Pug.60; Vism.407 (defⁿ), 423.

--osadha magical drugs Miln.283; --kāmā (pl.) heavenly joys (see above) J.I,138 (opp. mānusakā); --cakkhuka endowed with the superhuman eye S.II,156; A.I,23, 25; --paṇṇākāra (dasavidha°) the (tenfold) heavenly gift (viz. āyu, vaṇṇa etc.: see ṭhāna) DhA.III,292; --bhāva divine condition or state PvA.110; --yoga union with the gods S.I,60; --vihāra supreme condition of heart Miln.225; --sampatti heavenly bliss J.IV,3; DhA.III,292; PvA.16, 30. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】天神的，天国的。 ~cakkhu, 【中】天眼。 ~cakkhuka, 【形】有超人的眼睛的。 ~vihāra,【阳】天居（心的至高情况）。 ~sampatti,【阴】天上的福佑。(p156)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dibbati: {'def': '[Sk. dīvyati, pp. dyūta see jūta] to sport, to amuse oneself VvA.18 (in expl. of devī); to play at dice M.II,106 (akkhehi). (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(div +ya), 炫耀，消遣。【过】dibbi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(div + ya), 炫耀，消遣。【过】 dibbi。(p156)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dicchati: {'def': '[Sk. ditsati, Desid. fr. dadāti, base 4, q. v.] to wish to give, to be desirous of giving S.I,18, 20 (dicchare 3rd pl.); J.IV,64. (Page 320)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Diddha: {'def': '【形】有涂上的，下毒的。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. digdha to dih, see deha] smeared J.V,425 sq.; esp. smeared with poison, poisoned J.IV,435 (sara, a poisoned arrow); perhaps to be read at It.68 for duṭṭha (scil. sara) and at S.II,230 for diṭṭha. Cp. san°. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有涂上的，下毒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Digambara: {'def': '【阳】裸行者。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】裸行者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Digghikā: {'def': '【阴】沟渠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】沟渠。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dighacchā: {'def': '(f.) [=jighacchā] hunger A.II,117. (Page 320)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dighañña: {'def': '(adj.) [for jighañña=Sk. jaghanya fr. jaṅghā] inferior, low, last, hindmost (i. e. westward) J.V,24 (where the Com. seems to imply a reading jighacchaṁ with meaning of 1st sg. pot. intens. of ghas, but d. is evidently the right reading), 402, 403 (°rattiṁ at the end of the night). (Page 320)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Digucchā: {'def': '(f.) [=jigucchā; Sk. jugupsā] disgust DhsA.210 (asuci°). (Page 320)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Diguṇa: {'def': '【形】两倍的，双倍的。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】两倍的，双倍的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dija: {'def': '【阳】 1. 婆罗门（印度四大阶级最高的一分子），两次生的。 2. 鸟。 ~gaṇa, 【阳】一群婆罗门，一群鸟。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.婆罗门(印度四大阶级最高的阶级)，两次生的。2.鸟。dijagaṇa,【阳】一群婆罗门，一群鸟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see under dvi B I.4. (Page 320)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dikkhati: {'def': '(dis + a), 1. 看。 2. 出家。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dis+a), 1.看。2.出家。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dikkhita: {'def': '(Dikkhati的【过分】), 已传授，已献身。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dīkṣita “having commenced the preparatory rites for sacrifice”] initiated, consecrated, cira° initiated long since S.I,226=J.V,138, 139 (where dakkhita, q. v.; Com. cira-pabbājita). (Page 320)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dina: {'def': '【中】日子。dinakara,【阳】太阳。dinaccaya,【阳】一天的竭尽，傍晚。dinapati,【阳】太阳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】日子。 ~kara, 【阳】太阳。 ~ccaya, 【阳】一天的竭尽，傍晚。 ~pati, 【阳】太阳。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dina; Lat. nun-dinae (*noven-dinom); Oir. denus; Goth. sin-teins; cp. divasa] day Sdhp.239. --duddinaṁ darkness Dāvs.V,50 (d. sudinaṁ ahosi, cp. I.49, 51); also as f. duddinī Vin.I,3. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dindibha: {'def': '[cp. Sk. ṭiṭṭibha?] a kind of bird J.VI,538. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】凤头麦鸡，田凫(lap-wing﹐麦鸡东方田凫属禽类，属鴴鸟类，尤指田凫类，有狭窄的颈冠、飞行动作缓慢且不规则)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】凤头麦鸡，田凫（麦鸡东方田凫属禽类，属鸻鸟类，尤指田凫类，有狭窄的颈冠、飞行动作缓慢且不规则）。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dindima: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. ḍiṇḍima, cp. dundubhi] a musical instrument, a small drum J.VI,580; Bu I.32. See also deṇḍima. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dinna: {'def': '(deti 的【过分】), 已给，已允许。 ~ādāyī, 【形】取所给予的。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dinna, pp. of dadāti] given, granted, presented etc., in all meanings of dadāti q. v.; esp. of giving alms Pv IV.3²⁶ (=mahādāna PvA.253) & in phrase adinn’ādāna taking what is not given, i. e. stealing, adj. adinnâdāyin stealing, refraining from which constitutes the 2nd sīla (see under sīla). -- dinna: D.I,55≈(n’atthi dinnaṁ the heretic view of the uselessness of almsgiving); J.I,291; II,128; Sn.191, 227, 240; Dh.356; PvA.68 (given in marriage). Used as finite tense freq., e. g. J.I,151, 152; VI,366. -- adinna: M.I,39, 404; Sn.119 (theyyā adinnaṁ ādiyati), 156, 395, 400, 633; PvA.33 etc.

--ādāyin taking (only) what is given D.I,4; DA.I,72; --dāna almsgiving J.III,52; DhA.I,396; --dāyin giving alms, liberal, munificent D.III,191. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(deti 的【过分】), 已给，已允许。dinnādāyī,【形】取所给予的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dinnaka: {'def': '【阳】1.养子。【中】2.给予的事物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'an adopted son, in enumⁿ of four kinds of sons (atraja, khettaja, antevāsika, d.) Nd² 448; J.I,135 (=posāvanatthāya dinna). (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 养子。【中】 2. 给予的事物。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dipada: {'def': '【阳】两足动物，人。dipadinda, dipaduttama,【阳】两足尊(两足动物之中最贵族；即：世尊)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】两足动物，人。 ~inda, ~uttama, 【阳】两足尊（两足动物之中最贵族；即：世尊）。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Dippana: {'def': '【中】光亮。(p156)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】光亮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Dippati: {'def': '(dip+ya), 照耀。【过】dippi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dip + ya), 照耀。【过】 dippi。(p156)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dīpyate, see under dīpa¹ & cp. jotati] to shine, to shine forth, to be illustrious Vin.II,285. Cp. pa°. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dirasaññu: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. dara-saṁjña? See Kern, Toev. p. 118] one who has little common-sense J.VI,206, 207, 213, 214. Com. expl^s wrongly on p. 209 with “one who possesses two tongues” (of Agni), but has equivalent nippañña on p. 217 (text 214: appapañña+). (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Disa: {'def': '【阳】敌人。(p156)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. dviṣant & dviṣa (-°); dveṣṭi & dviśati to hate; cp. Gr. deinόs (corynthic dveini/a, hom. dέdvimen) fearful; Lat. dīrus=E. dire] an enemy Dh.42, 162; J.III,357; IV,217; V,453; Th.I,874--6; cp. Pss. Breth., 323, n. I. (Page 323)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】敌人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Disampati: {'def': '【阳】皇。(p156)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】皇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Disati: {'def': '[Ved. diśati, *deik to show, point towards; cp. Gr. dei/knumi (di/kh=diśā), Lat. dico (indico, index=pointer, judex), Goth. gateihan=Ger. zeigen, Ags. taecan=E. token] to point, show; to grant, bestow etc. Usually in combⁿ with pref. ā, or in Caus. deseti (q. v.). As simplex only at S.I,217 (varaṁ disā to be read for disaṁ; cp. Sk. adiśat). See also upa°. (Page 323)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Disatā: {'def': '² (f.) [Sk. *dviṣatā, see disa] state of being an enemy, a host of enemies J.IV,295 (=disasamūha, v. l. as gloss: verasamoha). (Page 323)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [Sk. diśatā, see disā] direction, quarter, region, part of the world J.IV,359; Pv.II,9²¹ (kiṁ disataṁ gato “where in the world has he gone?”); Vv II.3² (sādisatā the circle of the 6 directions, cp. VvA.102). (Page 323)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Dissati: {'def': '(dis+ya), 似乎，出现。【现分】dissanta, dissamāna, (=看得见的)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Pass. of *dassati, q. v. (Page 323)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dis + ya), 似乎，出现。【现分】 dissanta, dissamāna, (= 看得见的)。(p156)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Disā: {'def': '【阴】方向，(东南西北)方。disākāka,【阳】引向鸦(为了要知道陆地的方向，在船上养的乌鸦)。disākusala,【形】知道方向的人。disāpāmokkha,【形】世界著名的。disābhāga,【阳】一个方向。disāmūḷha,【形】迷失方向的人。disāvāsin, disāvāsika,【形】住在国外的，住在不同方向的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】方向，（东南西北）方。 ~kāka, 【阳】引向鸦（为了要知道陆地的方向，在船上养的乌鸦）。 ~kusala,【形】知道方向的人。 ~pāmokkha,【形】世界著名的。 ~bhāga, 【阳】一个方向。 ~mūḷha, 【形】迷失方向的人。 ~vāsī, ~vāsika, 【形】住在国外的，住在不同方向的。(p156)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Ved. diś & diśā, to diśati “pointing out,” point; cp. Gr. di/kh=diśā] point of the compass, region, quarter, direction, bearings. The 4 principal points usualy enum^d are puratthimā (E) pacchimā (W) dakkhiṇā (S) uttarā (N), in changing order. Thus at S.I,101, 145; II,103; III,84; IV,185, 296; Nd² 302; Pv.II,12⁶ (caturo d.); PvA.52 (catūsu disāsu nirayo catūhi dvārehi yutto), and passim. -- To these are often added the two locations “above & below” as uparimā & heṭṭhimā disā (also as uddhaṁ adho S.III,124 e. g.; also called paṭidisā D.III,176), making in all 6 directions: D.III,188 sq. As a rule, however, the circle is completed by the 4 anudisā (intermediate points; sometimes as vidisā: S.I,224; III,239; D.III,176 etc.), making a round of 10 (dasa disā) to denote completeness, wide range & all pervading comprehensiveness of states, activities or other happening: Sn.719, 1122 (disā catasso vidisā catasso uddhaṁ adho: dasa disā imāyo); Th.2, 487; Ps.II,131; Nd² 239 (see also cātuddisa in this sense); Pv.I,11¹; II,1¹⁰; Vism.408. sabbā (all) is often substituted for 10: S.I,75; D.II,15; Pv.I,2¹; VvA.184; PvA.71. -- anudisā (sg.) is often used collectively for the 4 points in the sense of “in between,” so that the circle always implies the 10 points. Thus at S.I,122; III,124. In other combinations as 6 abbreviated for 10; four disā plus uddhaṁ & anudisaṁ at D.I,222=A.III,368; four d.+uddhaṁ adho & anudisaṁ at S.I,122; III,124; A.IV,167. In phrase “mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati” (etc. up to 4th) the allcomprehending range of universal goodwill is further denoted by uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ etc., e. g. D.I,250; Vbh.272; see mettā. -- As a set of 4 or 8 disā is also used allegorically (“set, circle”) for var. combinations, viz. the 8 states of jhāna at M.III,222; the 4 satipaṭṭhānā etc. at Nett 121; the 4 āhārā etc. at Nett 117. ‹-› See also in other applications Vin.I,50 (in meaning of “foreign country”); II,217; S.I,33 (abhayā), 234 (puthu°); III,106; V,216; D.III,197 sq.; It.103; Th.1, 874; Vv 41⁶ (disāsu vissutā). -- disaṁ kurute to run away J.V,340. diso disaṁ (often spelt disodisaṁ) in all directions (lit. from region to region) D.III,200; J.III,491; Th.1, 615; Bu II.50; Pv III,1⁶; Miln.398. But at Dh.42 to disa (enemy), cp. DhA.I,324=coro coraṁ. See also J.P.T.S. 1884, 82 on Abl. diso=diśatah. Cp. vidisā.

--kāka a compass-crow, i. e. a crow kept on board ship in order to search for land (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 173; E. Hardy, Buddha p. 18) J.III,126, 267; --kusala one who knows the directions Vin.II,217; --cakkhuka “seeing” (i. e. wise) in all directions J.III,344; --ḍāha “sky-glow,” unusual redness of the horizon as if on fire, polar light (?) or zodiacal light (?) D.I,10; J.I,374: VI,476; Miln.178; DA.I,95; cp. BSk. diśodāha AvŚ II.198; --pati (disampati) a king S.I,86; J.VI,45; --pāmokkha world-famed J.I,166; --bhāga [Sk. digbhāga] direction, quarter Vin.II,217; --mūḷha [Sk. diṅmūḍha] one who has lost his bearings Dpvs IX.15; --vāsika living in a foreign country DhA.III,176. --vāsin=°vāsika DhA.IV,27. (Page 323)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ditta: {'def': '² [Sk. dṛpta; cp. dappa] proud, arrogant, insolent; wanton Th.1, 198; J.II,432; III,256=485; V,17, 232; VI,90, 114. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dippati 的【过分】), 已燃烧。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dippati 的【过分】), 已燃烧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. dīpta, dīp; cp. dīpa] blazing. Dāvs.V,32. Usually in cpd. āditta. (Page 322)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ditti: {'def': '【阴】光，光亮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】光，光亮。(p155)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】